Ansul R-102 Manual

R-102 RESTAURANT
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
DESIGN, INSTALLATION, Recharge, and Maintenance Manual
One Stanton Street / Marinette, WI 54143-2542, USA / +1-715-735-7411 / www.ansul.com

Copyright © 2014 Tyco Fire Products LP. / All rights reserved. / Part No. 418087-12
Bulletin
Bulletin No. 2018204

UL EX3470
DATE: October 19, 2018
TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 System Distributors and OEMs
FROM: Product Management - Restaurant Systems
SUBJECT: Additional Application Use for Agent Distribution Hose
NOTICE: It is the responsibility of your company to verify that this information has been received by the
employees who currently hold valid certification credentials for design and/or service of the system(s)
referenced within this bulletin.
We are pleased to announce that Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) has approved the Agent Distribution Hose
(Part No. 435982) to be used in new locations with the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System.
Newly approved locations for installation are as follows:

• Under the hood in the hazard area
• Without the restraining cable in stationary piping instances such as:
o Non-castered or stationary appliances
o Back to back hoods
o
Nozzle drops
General Installation Requirements
• Hose installed with castered appliances or any movable objects still requires the use of the restraining cable
• All existing flow requirements still apply to installing the hose.
• Hose is to be installed in a way that does not cause kinking or collapse. The bend of the installed hose to be
no less than a 3 in. (76 mm) bend radius (6 in. (152 mm) diameter).
• Each fitting on the hose must be hard mounted to solid surfaces to avoid damage at hose-to-fitting connections
and to avoid changing of nozzle aim points.
• Hose installation must avoid direct contact with flame. If the hose is ever subject to flame, it must be replaced
immediately.
• Fittings no longer need to be placed in vertical down position and hose ends do not require an offset of 6 in.
to 8 in. (152 mm to 203 mm) when installed in stationary instances.
• Hood penetration seal is to be used to connect each fitting of the hose to the hood. The hose is not to pass
through the hood, as sharp edges of the hood can cause damage to the hose coating.
Main Telephone Number: +1-800-862-6785 or +1-715-735-7415 One Stanton Street

Customer Services. . . . . . . Press 2 Technical Services. . . . . . . Press 4 Marinette, WI 54143-2542
Training Services . . . . . . . . Press 6 Quality Assurance. . . . . . . Press 8 www.ansul.com
© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2010156-04

October 19, 2018
UL EX3470
Page 2
The use of the Agent Distribution Hose (Part No. 435982) must comply with the agent distribution piping requirements
as specified in the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge, and Maintenance Manual (Part
No. 418087-12).
This bulletin serves as a supplement to the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge, and
Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12) dated September 1, 2014 and is not intended to replace the requirements
and limitations therein. The information contained in this bulletin will be added to the manual at the next revision.
Thank you for your continued support of ANSUL Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems.
Should you have questions pertaining to this bulletin, please contact your Territory Sales Manager or call Technical
Services as listed below.


Bulletin

UL EX3470 - July 20, 2018
DATE: July 31, 2018
SUBJECT: Overlapping Protection Option - Two 3.0-Gallon Tank System
We are pleased to announce an additional UL Listed Overlapping Protection Option for the ANSUL R-102
Restaurant Fire Suppression System.
The NEW Overlapping Protection option allows for a maximum of 13 total flows when utilizing two manifolded 3.0
gal (11.6 L) tanks. The NEW Overlapping Protection option will protect up to 10 ft (3 m) of appliances located below
a commercial hood with duct and plenum protection included.
Below you will find full installation details for the NEW Overlapping Nozzle Coverage option.
Overlapping Nozzle Coverage
Overlapping Coverage – Option 3

For each group of protected appliances under a common hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from
right to left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of 11.5 in. (292 mm) inside the outside edge of the cooking
hazard of each end appliance, and the inside overlapping nozzles must be located between the two end nozzles at
a maximum spacing of 25.5 in. (647 mm).
Hazard Zone
The hazard zone is defined as a theoretical, flat and level, rectangular surface that includes all the cooking hazards
of the protected appliances under a common hood. The purpose of the hazard zone is to provide a means of
locating the appliances and the overlapping nozzles, as well as aiming the overlapping nozzles. The hazard zone
measures 28 in. (711 mm) deep by the length of the cooking hazard(s). The centerline of the hazard zone must
bisect the 28 in. (711 mm) depth (from front to back) and run from right-to-left for the full width of the hazard zone.
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection

Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection is defined as protection of cooking appliances by nozzles spaced uniformly
at uniform elevations under a common hood(s). Overlapping protection of appliances is continuous for the full length
of the hood. Divided protection when group(s) of protected appliances are separated by counters or appliances not
requiring protection is not allowed with Option 3.


July 31, 2018
UL EX3470 - July 20, 2018
Page 2
Full hood continuous protection is defined as overlapping nozzle appliance protection that covers the appliance
line-up located under the total hood length. Requiring protection are the appliances under the hood that can be an
ignition source of grease in the hood, grease removal device or the duct.
Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection

Appliance protection using dedicated nozzle coverage is defined as protection of cooking appliances with enclosed
cooking hazards, such as upright broilers, which cannot be protected with overlapping nozzles and therefore must
be protected with nozzles dedicated to the appliance.
General Design Limitations

• Overlapping protection requires the use of two manifolded 3.0 gal (11.6L) tanks and a maximum of 13 total
flows. (ref: Figure 4-136, Pg. 4-69) in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual (Part
No. 418087-12).
• A maximum of ten flows shall be used as overlapping coverage nozzles.
• A maximum of three flows shall be used as plenum and duct nozzles.
• A single Double Tank nitrogen expellant gas cartridge shall be utilized.
• This installation uses both Overlapping protection, Plenum, and Duct protection.
• A conventional non-overlapping tank cannot share the same cartridge as tanks intended for overlapping
protection. In this case, an additional Regulated Actuator Assembly with another expellant gas cartridge will
be required.
• The 245 nozzle must be used for “end of zone” protection.
• The 260 nozzle must be used for zone protection.
• Maximum depth of zone is 28 in. (711 mm).
• Nozzle must be located 0 in. to 12 in. (0 mm to 304 mm) forward of zone centerline, aimed back at the zone
centerline.
• Nozzles must be spaced a maximum of 11.5 in. (292 mm) from each end of hazard and then a maximum of
25.5 in. (647 mm) on center for the remaining overlapping nozzles until the complete hazard is covered.
• For appliance hazard surfaces with listed protection exceeding the standard hazard zone of 28 in. (711
mm) in depth, the hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the hazard zone, with the front
edge overhanging the front edge of the zone. See Appliance Chart, Table 1 Pg 4-58 in the R-102 Design,
Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12).
• For appliance hazard surfaces that exceed the listed protection sizes, multiple zones must be utilized. Align
entire hazard surface area within the multiple zones.


July 31, 2018
UL EX3470 - July 20, 2018
Page 3
• All plenum, duct, and individual appliance protection is specified in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge
and Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12).
• All appliance protection currently listed in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual
(Part No. 418087-12) is also approved protection. Zone protection can be considered optional protection.
• Refer to Table 1 (Pg. 4-58 in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual (Part No.
418087-12)) for Appliance Type and Maximum Cooking Hazards.
• For Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations, refer to Items 1-4 on Pg.4-58, 4-59 in the
R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12).
• When obstructions are located adjacent to the appliance(s) protected by overlapping nozzles, the overlapping
appliance nozzle spacing must start with the appliance(s) adjacent to the obstruction. See Figure 4-118
(Pg. 4-60 in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12)).
• Refer to overlapping system piping requirements listed in the table below.
Table: Overlapping Coverage, Option-3 (for Appliance, Duct, & Plenum Coverage)
Piping Max Flow Max 3/8 in. Pipe Max No. of Max Elevation
Limitations Numbers Length Elbows Rise
68 ft 10 ft
Total Combined Pipe Network 13 25
(20.7 m) (3.0 m)
Appliance Protection 10 - - -
Duct/Plenum Protection 3 - - -
Notes: Double Tank Cartridge Only

45 ft (13.7 m) maximum pipe between nozzles
If Supply Line is Split, Appliance Branches must be on the thru side of the Tee
Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12) dated September 1, 2014 and is not intended to replace the requirements
and limitations therein. The information contained in this bulletin will be added to the manual at the next revision.
Thank you for your continued support of the ANSUL Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems.
Should you have questions pertaining to this bulletin, please contact your Territory Sales Manager or call Technical
Services as listed below.


Bulletin
UL EX3470 - April 30, 2018
DATE: May 15, 2018
TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 Restaurant System Distributors and OEMs
FROM: Product Management, Restaurant Systems
SUBJECT: New Electric Split Vat Fryer Protection Using the 245 or 290 Nozzle
We are pleased to announce new protection using either the 245 or the 290 nozzle for an electric split vat fryer
with the maximum overall vat area of 14 in. x 21 in. (356 mm x 533 mm) for the frypot including a 4 in. (102 mm)
dripboard, with each individual vat measuring 6.5 in. x 21 in. (165 mm x 533 mm) including a 4 in. (102 mm)
dripboard, and a maximum frypot only dimension of 6.5 in. x 17 in (165 mm x 432 mm) for each.
When using the 245 nozzle, it must be placed 21 in. to 27 in. (533 mm x 686 mm) anywhere above or within the
front half of the perimeter of the split vat fryer, aimed to the center point on the divided wall of the split vat fryer.
When using the 290 nozzle, it must be placed 16 in. to 21 in. (406 mm x 533 mm) above the center point of the
split-vat, ± 3 in. (76 mm) from center on the longest side and ± 1 in. (25 mm) from center on the shortest side of the
split-vat, aimed to the center point on the dividing wall of the split vat fryer.
21 in. - 27 in. 16 in. - 21 in.

Above top of Above top of
surface of Fry Vat surface of Fry Vat
FRYER
002283 002286
245 Nozzle Coverage 290 Nozzle Coverage
Maintenance Manual (418087-12) dated September 1, 2014 and is not intended to replace the requirements and
limitations therein. The information contained in this bulletin will be added to the manual at the next revision.
Should you have any questions pertaining to this bulletin, please contact your Territory Sales Manager or call
Technical Services at the number listed below.

Bulletin

UL EX3470
TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 Restaurant System Distributors and OEMs
SUBJECT: Improved 1F Range Protection With or Without Back Shelf – R-102
We are pleased to announce improved range protection with or without a back shelf. The 1F nozzle range protection
now allows the shelf to be installed at a minimum height of 18 in. (457 mm) above the hazard area compared to the
prior minimum shelf height of 20 in. (508 mm) above the hazard area.
When using the 1F nozzle for range protection with or without back shelf, the maximum length of the burner grates
being protected must not exceed 28 in. (711 mm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed
336 in.2 (2167 cm2). See the figure below for nozzle location details.
This bulletin serves as a supplement to the ANSUL R-102 System Design, Installation, Recharge, and Maintenance
Manual (Part No. 418087-12) dated September 1, 2014 and is not intended to replace the requirements and
1F NOZZLE
SHELF OR OTHER SIMILARLY SIZED
OBSTRUCTION CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S)
BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (279 mm)
18 IN.
AIM (457 mm)
40 - 48 IN. POINT MINIMUM
(1016 - 1219 mm)
14 IN.
(355 mm)
14 IN. MAXIMUM
12 IN.
(304 mm) (355 mm)
FRONT TO REAR MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM
CENTERLINE
1F NOZZLE LOCATED OVER FRONT EDGE OF BURNER GRATE AND ORIENTED
SO NOZZLE TIP FLATS ARE PARALLEL WITH BURNER GRATE FRONT TO REAR
CENTERLINE AND SHALL BE AIMED AT THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE.
Should you have questions pertaining to this bulletin please contact your Territory Sales Manager or Technical
Services at the below listed number.


Bulletin

UL EX3470
SUBJECT: R-102 Protection Options for Garland 2-platen: MWE/G2W, MWE2S, MWE/G L/R 9501 E/D/CE,
MWGJ 9801, MWE 9801 E/D/CE; Garland 3-platen: MWE/G 3W, MWE 3WS; Taylor 2-platen: 32,
34, 35, C832, C834, C835; and Taylor 3-platen: C842, C844, C845.
We are pleased to announce additional appliance-specific R-102 fire protection options for the models listed here:
• Garland 2-platen: MWE/G2W, MWE2S, MWE/G L/R 9501 E/D/CE, MWGJ 9801, MWE 9801 E/D/CE
• Garland 3-platen: MWE/G 3W, MWE 3WS
• Taylor 2-platen: 32, 34, 35, C832, C834, C835
• Taylor 3-platen: C842, C844, C845.
This protection can act as a modular type for the models listed above. In the case of multiple units installed directly
adjacent to each other, only one nozzle is required between the two units, while maintaining the nozzle spacing
over each appliance.
Manual (Part No. 418087-12) dated September 1, 2014 and is not intended to replace the requirements and
The following nozzle positioning and coverage limitations must be followed:

Nozzle Type: 1N
Nozzle Quantity: 4
Nozzle Height: 14 in. to 28 in. (356 mm to 711 mm)
Nozzle Location: 0 in. to 14 in. (356 mm) forward of back edge of cooking surface
Nozzles positioned 13 in. (330 mm) apart
0 in. to 1 in. (25 mm) right or left of side of cooking surface
Nozzle Aim Point: Front to back centerline of cooking surface


October 6, 2017
UL EX3470
Page 2
Garland 2-platen - MWE/G2W, MWE2S, MWE/G L/R 9501 E/D/CE, MWGJ 9801, MWE 9801 E/D/CE
Protection using four 1N nozzles with 13 in. (330 mm) nozzle spacing, aiming to centerline of each lower platen.
13 in.
(330 mm)
spacing
1N Nozzle 28 in.
(711 mm)
0 in. ± 1 in. On back edge of cook

(0 ± 25 mm) to first surface to 14 in.
nozzle from edge of (356 mm) in front of 14 in.
cook surface back edge (356 mm)
Front to back
centerline of
cooking surface
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
Specifications
Cook Surface Size: 24 in. x 36 in. (610 mm x 914 mm)
Heat Output: 26.2 kW, 70,000 btu


October 6, 2017
UL EX3470
Page 3
Garland 3-platen - MWE/G 3W, MWE 3WS

13 in.
(330 mm)
spacing
1N Nozzle
28 in.
(711 mm)
0 in. ± 1 in.
On back edge of cook (0 ± 25 mm) to first
14 in. surface to 14 in. nozzle from edge of
(356 mm) (356 mm) in front of cook surface
back edge
Front to back
centerline of
cooking surface
SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
Specifications


October 6, 2017
UL EX3470
Page 4
Taylor 2-platen - 32, 34, 35, C832, C834, C835
13 in.
(330 mm)
spacing
1N Nozzle
28 in.
(711 mm)

(0 ± 25 mm) surface to 14 in.
to first (356 mm) in front of 14 in.
nozzle from back edge (356 mm)
edge of
cook surface
Front to back
centerline of
cooking surface
Specifications


October 6, 2017
UL EX3470
Page 5
Taylor 3-platen - C842, C844, C845
13 in.
(330 mm)
spacing
1N Nozzle
28 in.
(711 mm)

(0 ± 25 mm) surface to 14 in.
to first (356 mm) in front of 14 in.
nozzle from back edge (356 mm)
edge of
cook surface
Front to back
centerline of
cooking surface
Specifications
Heat Output: 25 kW, 75,000 btu
Should you have questions pertaining to this bulletin, please contact Technical Services as noted below.


Bulletin

UL EX3470 - May 05, 2017
DATE: June 15, 2017
SUBJECT: R-102 Protection Options for Garland ME/G-1P, ME/G-2P, ME/G-3PX, or Taylor C850, C851, C852,
C855, C857, C858 three-platen clamshell grills
We are pleased to announce additional appliance-specific R-102 fire protection options for the Garland ME/G-1P,
ME/G-2P, ME/G-3PX, or Taylor C850, C851, C852, C855, C857, C858 three-platen clamshell grills.
This protection can act as a modular type for the models listed above. In the case of 1, 2 or 3 platens, or multiple
units installed directly adjacent to each other, one additional nozzle is required when compared to the number of
total platens. Example 1: a 2-platen grill will require 3 total nozzles. Example 2: two 3-platen grills installed directly
adjacent to each other will require 7 total nozzles.
Manual (Part No. 418087-12) dated September 1, 2014 and is not intended to replace the requirement and
Nozzle Type: 1N
Nozzle Quantity: 4 (or 1 more nozzle than the number of total platens as stated in the paragraph above)
Nozzle Location: 0 in. to 14 in. (356 mm) forward of back edge of cooking surface
Nozzles positioned 13 in. (330 mm) apart
0 in. to 1 in. (25 mm) right or left of side of cooking surface
Nozzle Aim Point: Front to back centerline of cooking surface
Copyright © 2017 Tyco Fire Products LP. All rights reserved.
www.ansul.com
S-2010156-04
Bulletin

June 15, 2017
Page 2 UL EX3470 - May 05, 2017
Garland ME/G-1P, ME/G-2P or ME/G-3PX
13 in.
(330 mm)
spacing
1N Nozzle
28 in. 0 in. ± 1 in.
(711 mm) (0 ± 25 mm) to first
nozzle from edge of
cook surface
14 in.
(356 mm)
On back edge of cook

surface to 14 in.
(356 mm) in front of
back edge
Front to back
centerline of
cooking surface
Specifications
Lower cook surface size: ME/G-1P - 11.75 in. x 22 in. (298 mm x 559 mm)
ME/G-2P - 23.75 in. x 22 in. (603 mm x 559 mm)
ME/G-3PX - 23.75 in. x 22 in. (603 mm x 559 mm) and
11.75 in. x 22 in (298 mm x 559 mm)
Upper platen size: 11.5 in x 17.5 in (292 mm x 445 mm) each
Heat Output: ME/G-1P Electric - 7.8 kW, Gas - 24,000 btu

ME/G-2P Electric - 15.6 kW, Gas - 48,000 btu
ME/G-3PX Electric - 23.4 kW, Gas - 72,000 btu
www.ansul.com
S-2012086-01
Bulletin

June 15, 2017
Page 3 UL EX3470 - May 05, 2017
Taylor C850, C851, C852, C855, C857, C858
13 in.
(330 mm)
spacing
1N Nozzle
28 in.
(711 mm)
0 in. ± 1 in.
(0 ± 25 mm) to first
14 in. nozzle from edge of
(356 mm) cook surface
On back edge of cook

surface to 14 in.
(356 mm) in front of
back edge
Front to back
centerline of
cooking surface
Specifications
Lower cook surface size: 11.4 in. x 24 in (290 mm x 610 mm) each

Upper platen size: 11 in. x 17.3 in (279 mm x 439 mm) each
Heat Output: C850 - 8 kW C851 - 25,000 btu

C852 - 15 kW C855 - 50,000 btu
C858 - 22 kW C857 - 75,000 btu
Should you have questions pertaining to this bulletin please contact Technical Services as noted below.
www.ansul.com
S-2012086-01
Bulletin

UL EX3470
DATE: April 7, 2017
SUBJECT: R-102 Protection Options for Nieco Broiler Models PB93G and PB63G
We are pleased to announce additional appliance-specific R-102 fire protection options for the Nieco Automatic
Chain Broiler Models PB93G and PB63G with catalyst filters installed in the exhaust openings.
This bulletin serves as a supplement to the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System Design, Installation,
Recharge, and Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12) dated September 1, 2014 and is not intended to replace
the requirement and limitations therein. The information contained in this bulletin will be added to the manual at the
next revision.
Nozzle Type: 230

Nozzle Quantity: 2
Nozzle Location: 0 in. to 5 in. (127 mm) from front or back edge of exhaust opening
Nozzles positioned 17.25 in. (438 mm) apart
0 in. to 4 in. (101mm) right or left of center of exhaust opening.
Nozzle Aim Point: Center of exhaust opening front to back
and center left to right
Specifications
Broiler Chamber Size: 25.06 in. x 8 in. (637 mm x 204 mm)
25.06 in. x 15 in. (637 mm x 381 mm)
Exhaust Opening Size: 16 in. x 15.19 in. (406 mm x 386 mm)

8 in. x 15.19 in. (204 mm x 386 mm)
Output Rating: 120,000 BTU/Hr.
www.ansul.com
S-2010156-04
Bulletin

April 7, 2017
Page 2 UL EX3470
20 in. 0 to 5 in.
(508 mm) (0 to 127 mm)
0-5 in. in front of or behind
(0-127 mm) 0-5 in. 12 in. exhaust opening
(305 mm) 0 to 4 in.
(0-127 mm) (0 to 101 mm)
right or left of center of
exhaust opening
Aim to center of
exhaust openings
17.25 in. (438 mm)

Fixed spacing between nozzles
SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW
Should you have questions pertaining to this bulletin please contact Technical Services as noted below.
www.ansul.com
S-2012086-01
Bulletin

UL EX3470; UL EX5174 - May 5, 2016
DATE: September 8, 2016
TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 and PIRANHA System Distributors and OEMs
SUBJECT: Restaurant Nozzle 10-Pack Offering
Tyco Fire Protection Products is pleased to announce that we are offering all restaurant nozzles with metal blow-off
caps in 10-packs for all ANSUL Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems. This will add consistency to the ordering
process and inventory control of the restaurant nozzles.
The current Restaurant Nozzle 9-packs, 25-packs, and 50-packs will be offered until inventories are depleted.
Please make note of the new part numbers and price changes when ordering restaurant nozzles as follows:
R-102 Nozzle
New Part No. (10-Packs)
443319 Nozzle, 1F
443321 Nozzle, 1/2 N
443317 Nozzle, 1N
443323 Nozzle, 1W
443325 Nozzle, 2W
443327 Nozzle, 3N
443329 Nozzle, 230
443331 Nozzle, 245
443333 Nozzle, 260
443335 Nozzle, 290
443337 Nozzle, 2120
PIRANHA Nozzle
New Part No. (10-Packs)
443339 Nozzle, AP
443341 Nozzle, DL
442088 P34, 10-Pack
442153 P41, 10-Pack
Note: Prices are subject to change without notice.
www.ansul.com
S-2010156-04
Bulletin

September 8, 2016
Page 2 UL EX3470; UL EX5174 - May 5, 2016
This bulletin is a supplement to the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge and
Maintenance Manual (418087-12) and the ANSUL PIRANHA Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge and
Maintenance Manual (423385-08).
For questions concerning the information in this bulletin, please contact Technical Services as noted below.
www.ansul.com
S-2012086-01
Bulletin

UL EX3470
DATE: May 3, 2016
TO: All Authorized ANSUL Restaurant System Distributors and OEMs
FROM: Product Management – Restaurant Systems
SUBJECT: R-102 Coverage of the Imperial Model IABR-36, IABR-48, and IABR-60 Gas-Radiant Char-Broiler
with Wood Smoker Box and Chip Holders
We are pleased to announce an appliance-specific coverage for R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems when
protecting the following Imperial Gas Radiant Char-broilers: IABR-36, IABR-48, and IABR-60 with Wood Smoker
Box and Chip Holders.
The information in this bulletin will serve as a manual supplement for the R-102 Fire Suppression System Design,
Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12) dated September 1st 2014 and will be added
to the manual at the next reprint.
See Pages 2 and 3 for details.
www.ansul.com
S-2010156-04
Bulletin

May 3, 2016
Page 2 UL EX3470
Model IABR-36 with Wood Smoker Box and Chip Holders is to be protected within the parameters indicated below.
The following nozzle position and coverage limitations must be followed:

Nozzle Quantity: 2
Nozzle Type: 3N
Nozzle Height: 25 in. (635 mm) to 40 in. (1016 mm) above the hazard surface
Nozzle Location Each nozzle protects half of the cooking area. The nozzles are located within 1 in. (25 mm) of the
center of the respective cooking area, aimed at the center of that hazard area.
3N NOZZLES
1/2 OF 1/2 OF
COOKING COOKING
AREA AREA
1 IN. (2.5 cm)
MAXIMUM 1 IN. (2.5 cm)
CENTER LINE MAXIMUM
OF RESECTIVE
COOKING AREA
+/- 1 IN. (2.5 cm) NOZZLE HEIGHT
IN ANY DIRECTION 25 IN. - 40 IN.
(65 - 102 cm)
COOKING
AREA
CENTER OF
RESPECTIVE
COOKING AREA
008494 008495
Model Grate Dimension Gas Output

IABR-36 32.5 in. (825 mm) x 21 in. (533 mm) 90,000 BTU
www.ansul.com
S-2012086-01
Bulletin

May 3, 2016
Page 3 UL EX3470
Model IABR-48 and IABR-60 with Wood Smoker Box and Chip Holder is to be protected within the parameters
indicated below.
The following nozzle position and coverage limitations must be followed:

Nozzle Quantity: Three
Nozzle Type: 3N
Nozzle Height: 25 to 40 in. (635 to 1,016 mm) above the broiler surface
Nozzle Location: All three nozzles are to be centered front to back above the broiling surface. The middle nozzle
is to be centered left to right above the broiling surface. The remaining two nozzles are to be
located 9 in. (229 mm) inside the broiler sides.
9 in.
(229 mm)
9 in.
(229 mm)
Centered
Center of
3N broiler
Center of
3N
broiler
3N
back
25 to 40 in.
(635 to 1016 mm)
Front
009867
Model Grate Dimensions

Gas Output
IABR-48 44.5 in. (1,130 mm) x 21 in. (533 mm) 120,000 BTU
IABR-60 56.5 in. (1,435 mm) x 21 in. (533 mm) 150,000 BTU
For all models, the Smoker Box and Chip Holders shall not exceed a depth of logs greater than 4 in. (102 mm) or a
maximum allowable wood chip depth of 4 in. (102 mm).
Should you have questions regarding this bulletin, please contact your US Standard Product Manager or International
Area Manager, or contact Technical Services as listed below.
www.ansul.com
S-2012086-01
Bulletin

UL EX3470; UL EX5174
DATE: December 14, 2015
TO: All Authorized ANSUL® R-102 and PIRANHA System Distributors and OEMs
SUBJECT: New Nitrogen Cartridge Options for Remote Mechanical Release Assemblies
Tyco Fire Protection Products is pleased to announce additional cartridge options for use in the Remote Mechanical
Release Assemblies (Part No. 433485 and 439946).
The current remote mechanical release assembly uses the 101-10 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge as the only option for
the actuation pressure to operate the regulated actuators. The 101-10 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge can still be used
for this application, however, in addition to the 101-10 Carbon Dioxide Cartridge, the following LT-20-R Nitrogen
Cartridges can be used for this application.
The following LT-20-R Nitrogen Cartridge options are now approved for use in the remote mechanical release
assembly:
• TC/DOT 423429
• European Part No. 428440
• Australian Part No. 428948
• Chinese Part No. 441086
This bulletin is a supplement to the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge, and
Maintenance Manual (418087-12) and the ANSUL PIRANHA Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge,
and Maintenance Manual (423385-08).
This bulletin is not intended to replace the requirements and limitations outlined within the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant
System Design, Installation, Recharge, and Maintenance Manual and the ANSUL PIRANHA Restaurant System
Design, Installation, Recharge, and Maintenance Manual listed in this bulletin. The information contained in this
bulletin will be added to the manual at the next update. However, we are providing this document immediately for
product protection.
If you have questions regarding the LT-20-R Nitrogen Cartridge options, feel free to contact Technical Services as
noted below.
Thank you for your continued support of ANSUL brand fire suppression products.
Copyright © 2015 Tyco Fire Products LP. l All rights reserved.
www.ansul.com
S-2010156-04
Bulletin

R-102: UL EX3470
TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 Restaurant System Distributors and OEM’s
SUBJECT: Garland CXBE12 Broiler
Tyco Fire Protection Products is pleased to announce an additional appliance-specific R-102 restaurant fire
protection option for the Garland Electric Dual-Side Clamshell Broiler Model CXBE12. This is an additional option to
the coverage shown in the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System Design, Installation, Recharge and
Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12).
The following nozzle positioning and coverage limitations must be followed.
Single 230 Nozzle Protection for Garland CXBE12 Broiler
230 NOZZLE
24 in. to 26 in.
(610 mm TO 660 mm) 0 in. to 2 in.
ABOVE THE (0 mm TO 51 mm)
COOKING FROM FRONT
center of
SURFACE EDGE OF
cooking
COOKING
surface
SURFACE
aim nozzle
at center
0 in. to 2 in.
of cooking
(0 mm TO 51 mm)
230 NOZZLE surface
FROM FRONT
END EDGE
OF COOKING
SURFACE
± 2 IN. (51 mm) 009654 009655

FROM CENTERLINE
Broiler Top View Broiler Side View
Copyright © 2015 Tyco Fire Products LP. l All rights reserved.
www.ansul.com
S-2010156-04
Bulletin

October 5, 2015
Page 2 R102: UL EX3470
Specifications
Top Cooking Surface: 10.2 in. x 22.4 in.
(259 mm x 568 mm)
Bottom Cooking Surface: 10.8 in. x 22.2 in

(274 mm x 564 mm)
Total Load: 16 kW
This bulletin is a supplement to the ANSUL R-102 Restaurant System Design, Installation, Recharge, and
Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087-12), dated 2014-SEP-01.
This bulletin is NOT intended to replace the requirements and limitations outlined within the ANSUL R-102 System
Manual listed in this bulletin. The information contained in this bulletin will be ADDED to the manual at the next
update. However, we are providing this document immediately for appliance protection.
Should you have questions regarding this bulletin, please contact Technical Services as noted below.
Thank you for your continued support of ANSUL brand fire suppression products.
www.ansul.com
S-2012086-01
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual FOREWORD
UL EX3470 ULC EX3470
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11
This manual is intended for use with ANSUL ® R-102

Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems.
Those who install, operate, recharge, or maintain these fire
suppression systems should read this entire manual. Specific
sections will be of particular interest depending upon one’s
responsibilities.
Design, installation, recharge, and maintenance of the system
must conform to the limitations detailed in this manual and
performed by an individual who attended an ANSUL training
program and became trained to install, recharge, design, and
maintain the ANSUL system.
Fire suppression systems are mechanical devices. They need
periodic care. Maintenance is a vital step in the performance
of your fire suppression system. As such it must be performed
in accordance with NFPA 96 (Standard for the Installation
of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden
Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment) and NFPA 17A
(Standard on Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems) by an
authorized ANSUL distributor. To provide maximum assurance
that the fire suppression system will operate effectively and
safely, maintenance must be conducted at six-month intervals,
or earlier if the situation dictates. Twelve-year maintenance
must include agent tank hydrostatic testing.
ANSUL PART NO. 418087-12
ANSUL, R-102, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered
marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
EXPLANATION OF SAFETY ALERTS R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
!
p DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation in which a person will expe-
rience serious personal injury or death if the situation is not
avoided.
! WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation in which a person could expe-
rience serious personal injury or death if the situation is not
avoided.
! CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation in which a person could expe-
rience minor or moderate personal injury if the situation is not
avoided.
CAUTION
Addresses practices not related to personal injury, such as
a system part malfunctioning, property damage, or system
failure.
NOTICE
Addresses general practices or observations
related to system function that are not related
to personal injury.
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual REVISION RECORD
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 1
DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO.
2014-SEP-01 Complete manual has

been reformatted along
with several revised
pages that contain
updated technical
information. For clarity,
all pages have been
changed to Revision 11,
regardless of previous
revision number.
Technical information
changes have been
noted with a revision
indicator (u).
Indicates revised information.

Indicates change in page sequence.
REVISION RECORD R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO.
Indicates revised information.

Indicates change in page sequence.
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS
2014-SEP-1 REV. 11 PAGE TOC-1
SECTION PAGES SECTION PAGES

I. GENERAL INFORMATION 1-1 – 1-4 III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 – 3-12
DESIGN AND APPLICATION 1-1 (Continued)
UL LISTING 1-1 PULLEY TEE 3-8
SYSTEM APPROVALS 1-1 ANSUL STAINLESS STEEL CABLE 3-8

REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION 3-9
DEFINITION OF TERMS 1-1 – 1-3
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 3-9
II. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2-1 – 2-2 MECHANICAL GAS VALVES 3-9
TOTAL SYSTEM 2-1 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES 3-10
Single-Tank 2-1 MANUAL RESET RELAY 3-10
Double-Tank 2-1 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES 3-10
Three-Tank 2-2
ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 3-11
Multiple-Tank 2-2
REGULATOR TEST KIT 3-11
III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 – 3-12 FUSIBLE LINK 3-11
EXTINGUISHING AGENT 3-1 MAXIMUM REGISTERING 3-11
THERMOMETER
AUTOMAN REGULATED 3-1
RELEASE ASSEMBLY HOSE/GROMMET PACKAGE 3-11
(MECHANICAL) IN-LINE BURST DISC ASSEMBLY 3-12
(MANIFOLDED SYSTEMS ONLY)
AUTOMAN REGULATED 3-1
RELEASE ASSEMBLY 1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE 3-12
(ELECTRICAL) NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE 3-12
REMOTE MECHANICAL RELEASE 3-2 STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATOR HOSE 3-12
SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE 3-2 AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE AND 3-12
ASSEMBLY RESTRAINING CABLE KIT
RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY 3-2 IV. SYSTEM DESIGN 4-1 – 4-76
REGULATED ACTUATOR 3-3 NOZZLE PLACEMENT 4-1 – 4-31
ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS
AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY 3-3 Duct Protection 4-1 – 4-3
OEM RELEASE/BRACKET 3-3 Transition Protection 4-4
ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM Electrostatic Precipitator 4-4
IN-CABINET USE ONLY) Protection
Plenum Protection 4-5 – 4-6
OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR 3-3 Appliance Protection
ASSEMBLY Fryer – Single Nozzle Protection 4-7 – 4-9
TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY 3-4 Fryer – Multiple Nozzle Protection 4-10 – 4-12
Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan 4-12
24VDC REGULATED RELEASE 3-4
Range Protection 4-13 – 4-17
ASSEMBLY
Griddle Protection 4-18 – 4-21
ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLY 3-4 Chain Broiler Protection 4-21
GAS CARTRIDGES 3-5 Horizontal Chain Broiler Protection 4-21
Overhead Chain Broiler Protection 4-22
NOZZLES 3-5 Salamander Broiler Protection 4-23
SILICONE LUBRICANT 3-5 Upright Broiler/Salamander 4-23 – 4-24
Protection
SWIVEL ADAPTOR 3-6
Gas-Radiant/Electric Char-Broiler 4-24
RUBBER BLOW-OFF CAP 3-6 Protection
METAL BLOW-OFF CAP 3-6 Electric Char-Broiler Protection 4-24
Lava-Rock (Ceramic) Char-Broiler 4-25
REDUCING COUPLING 3-6 Protection
CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY 3-6 Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection 4-25
‘‘QUIK-SEAL’’ ADAPTOR 3-6 Alternate Ceramic/Natural 4-26
Charcoal Char-Broiler Protection
‘‘COMPRESSION-SEAL’’ ADAPTOR 3-7 Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Protection 4-26
‘‘HOOD SEAL’’ ADAPTOR 3-7 Wok Protection 4-27
ASSEMBLY Nozzle Application Chart 4-28 – 4-31
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL 4-32 – 4-52
COCKING LEVER/LOCK PIN 3-7
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE 4-53 – 4-60
DETECTORS 3-8
PULLEY ELBOWS 3-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE TOC-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-1
SECTION PAGES SECTION PAGES

IV. SYSTEM DESIGN (Continued) 4-1 – 4-76 V. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5-1 – 5-44
TANK AND CARTRIDGE 4-61 (Continued)
REQUIREMENTS INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5-35
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT 4-61 – 4-63 GAS VALVE
GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5-36 – 5-38
DISTRIBUTION PIPING 4-63 – 4-70 SWITCHES
REQUIREMENTS INSTALLING ALARM 5-39
General Piping Requirements 4-63 INITIATING SWITCH
Supply and Branch Line 4-64 – 4-65 ELECTRICAL SWITCH 5-40 – 5-42
Identification REQUIREMENTS
1.5 Gallon System 4-66
3.0 Gallon System 4-67 WIRING 24VDC REGULATED 5-43
6.0 Gallon Manifolded System 4-68 – 4-69 RELEASE ASSEMBLY
9.0 Gallon System 4-70
VI. TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE 6-1 – 6-4
DETECTION SYSTEM 4-71 – 4-73
REQUIREMENTS TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION 6-1
Detector Identification 4-71 TESTING MECHANICAL GAS 6-1 – 6-2
Detector/Pulley Elbow/Conduit 4-71 VALVES
Off-set Design Limitations TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS 6-2
Detector Placement Requirements 4-71 – 4-72 VALVES
Detection Line Requirements 4-72
Fusible Link Selection 4-72 TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH 6-2 – 6-3
Electric Thermal Detector 4-73 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 6-3 – 6-4
MANUAL PULL STATION 4-73
REQUIREMENTS VII. RECHARGE AND RESETTING 7-1 – 7-6
PROCEDURES
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE 4-74
REQUIREMENTS CLEANUP PROCEDURES 7-1
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE 4-74 – 4-75 RECHARGE 7-1 – 7-4
REQUIREMENTS RESETTING 7-4 – 7-6
Approvals 4-75
REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE 7-6
ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 4-75
REQUIREMENTS VIII. MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 8-1 – 8-12
ELECTRICAL SWITCH 4-75 SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE 8-1 – 8-5
REQUIREMENTS EXAMINATION
V. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5-1 – 5-44 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE 8-5

EXAMINATION
INSTALLING RELEASE ASSEMBLY 5-1 – 5-3
COMPONENTS 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE 8-6 – 8-11
EXAMINATION
INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION 5-4 – 5-5
PIPING IX. APPENDIX 9-1 – 9-18
INSTALLING THE AGENT 5-5 – 5-8 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE 9-1 – 9-4
DISTRIBUTION HOSE (FOR
CASTERED/MOVEABLE EQUIPMENT) SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX 9-5 – 9-8
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND 5-8 – 5-12 PARTS LISTS 9-9 – 9-14
EXPELLANT GAS LINE MULTIPLE NOZZLE FRYER 9-15 – 9-16
INSTALLING THE DETECTION 5-13 – 5-16 PROTECTION CALCULATION
SYSTEM EXAMPLES
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL 5-17 – 5-18 WIRING DIAGRAM 9-16 – 9-17

PULL STATION
General Installation Requirements 5-17
Installation for Remote Manual Pull 5-17 – 5-18
Station Utilizing EMT Conduit Only
INSTALLING MECHANICAL 5-18 – 5-22
GAS VALVE
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL 5-22 – 5-34
PULL STATION OR MECHANICAL
GAS VALVE UTILIZING
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 1-1
DESIGN AND APPLICATION UL LISTING

The ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System is The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System has been test-
developed and tested to provide fire protection for restaurant ed and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as a pre-en-
cooking appliances, hoods, and ducts. It is a pre-engineered gineered system. The system is in compliance with UL Test
group of mechanical and electrical components for installation Standard 300. These tests require extinguishment of fires which
by an authorized ANSUL distributor. The basic system consists are initiated in deep fat fryers, ranges, griddles, char-broilers,
of an AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a woks, upright broilers, chain-broilers, filters, plenum chambers,
regulated release mechanism and a liquid agent storage tank hoods, and ducts after pre-loading each appliance with a pre-
housed within a single enclosure. Nozzles, detectors, cartridg- scribed amount of cooking grease. Each fire is allowed to prog-
es, liquid agent, fusible links, pulley tees, and pulley elbows are ress to maximum intensity before the fire suppression system
supplied in separate packages in the quantities needed for each is actuated.
fire suppression system arrangement.
The system provides automatic actuation; or it can be actuated SYSTEM APPROVALS
manually through a remote manual pull station. The system is • UL EX3470
also capable of shutting down appliances at system actuation. • ULC EX3470
For appliance shutdown requirements, refer to the current ver- • COA #5663 (NYC)
sion of NFPA 17A, “Standard For Wet Chemical Extinguishing
Systems,” and NFPA 96, “Standard For Ventilation Control and DEFINITION OF TERMS
Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.” Actuation Gas Line: Piping and/or stainless steel braided hose
Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull station, assemblies from the AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly
mechanical and electrical gas valves, and electrical switches which supplies high pressure nitrogen or carbon dioxide to the
for automatic equipment and gas line shut-off. Accessories can Regulated Actuator Assembly for multiple-tank system actuation.
be added, such as alarms, warning lights, etc., to installations Agent Tank: A pressure vessel containing the liquid agent.
where required. AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical): An
The R-102 system suppresses fire by spraying the plenum area, assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism,
the filters, cooking surfaces, and the exhaust duct system with agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose, solenoid,
a predetermined flow rate of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire and electric switch within a metal enclosure. The enclosure con-
Suppressant. When the liquid agent is discharged onto a cook- tains knockouts to facilitate component hookups.
ing appliance fire, it cools the grease surface, and reacts with AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Mechanical): An
the hot grease (saponification) forming a layer of soap-like foam assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism,
on the surface of the fat. This layer acts as insulation between agent tank (ordered separately), and expellant gas hose within a
the hot grease and the atmosphere, thus helping to prevent the metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate
escape of combustible vapors. component hookups.
Exhaust fans in the ventilating system should be left on. The Authority Having Jurisdiction: The ‘‘authority having juris-
forced draft of these fans assists the movement of the liquid diction’’ is the organization, office, or individual responsible
agent through the ventilating system, thus aiding in the fire sup- for ‘‘approving’’ equipment, an installation, or a procedure.
pression process. These fans also provide a cooling effect in the The phrase ‘‘Authority Having Jurisdiction’’ is used in a broad
plenum and duct after the fire suppression system has been dis- manner since jurisdictions and ‘‘approval’’ agencies vary as
charged. The system is UL listed with or without fan operation. do their responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, the
Make up or supply air fans, internal to the exhaust hood(s) being ‘‘authority having jurisdiction’’ may be a federal, state, local, or
protected, shall be shut down upon system actuation. other regional department or individual such as a fire chief, fire
Along with the fire suppression system, the total system design marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department,
must include hand portable fire extinguisher(s) located within the health department, building official, electrical inspector, or
cooking/restaurant area that can be used to manually suppress others having statutory authority. For insurance purposes, an
a fire that may be burning in an unprotected area. Class K extin- insurance company representative may be the ‘‘authority having
guisher(s) must be provided for hazards where there is a potential jurisdiction.’’ In many circumstances the property owner or his
for fires involving combustible cooking media (vegetable or animal designated agent assumes the role of the ‘‘authority having juris-
oils and fats). Refer to NFPA 10, “Standard For Portable Fire diction;’’ at government installations, the commanding officer or
Extinguisher,” for additional information. departmental official may be the ‘‘authority having jurisdiction.’’
Blow-Off Cap: A siliconized rubber or metal cap which covers
the end of the nozzle to protect the nozzle tip and minimize
cooking grease migration into the nozzle orifice.
Branch Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from
the supply line to the nozzle(s).
SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 1-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued) Fusible Links: A fixed temperature heat detecting device
Bursting Disc: A disc installed in the tank adaptor which min- employed to restrain the operation of a mechanical control until
imizes the remote chance of siphoning of the agent into the its designed temperature is reached, allowing separation of the
discharge piping during extreme temperature variations. link and system operation.
Cartridge: A hermetically sealed, steel pressure vessel con- Gas Valve: An electrically or mechanically operated device
taining nitrogen or carbon dioxide gas used to pressurize the used to shut off the gas supply to the cooking equipment when
agent tank. the system is actuated.
Gas Valve Air Cylinder: An air cylinder, located in the release
Cooking Appliance: Includes, but is not limited to, fryers, grid-
mechanism, which operates pneumatically to mechanically
dles, ranges, upright broilers, chain broilers, natural charcoal
unlatch a mechanical gas valve actuator, causing the gas valve
broilers, or char-broilers (electric, lava rock, gas-radiant, or
to close upon system actuation.
mesquite).
High Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the
Cooking Area: Cooking area is defined as the maximum
nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
surface that requires protection. Each type of appliance has a
defined cooking area with parameters that vary for each appli- Hood: A device provided for cooking appliances to direct and
ance. For example, the cooking area for a griddle is the entire capture grease-laden vapors and exhaust gases from cooking
flat cooking surface, while a fryer may have two areas that need appliances. It shall be constructed in a manner which meets the
consideration, depending on whether the fryer has a dripboard requirements of NFPA 96.
or not. Liquid Agent: A potassium-based solution used for the knock-
Conduit Offset Assembly: A pre-formed piece of conduit which down and suppression of fire.
can be installed between the ANSUL regulated release and the Low Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the
conduit to allow the wire rope for the detection, gas valve and nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
remote manual pull station to be installed in a more convenient
Maximum Length of Cooking Appliance: The maximum
manner.
dimension, on any side, which may be protected by one nozzle.
Depth: When referring to depth as a linear dimension, it is the
Maximum Piping: Specified length of piping and number of
horizontal dimension measured from front to back of the appli-
fittings which must not be exceeded for each system.
ance or plenum.
Medium Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between
Detector: A device which includes the detector bracket, detector
the nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected.
linkage, and fusible link used for automatic operation of the fire
suppression system. Minimum Piping: Minimum length of distribution piping required
between the agent tank outlet and any nozzle protecting a
Detector Linkage: A device used to support the fusible link.
range, fryer, or wok.
Discharge Hose Assembly: An agent distribution hose to be
Nozzle: A device designed to deliver the liquid agent with a
used with castered cooking appliances with castered supports
specific flow rate and stream pattern.
to allow the movement of the appliance for service or cleaning
purposes. Overlapping Protection: When discharge nozzles are spaced
equally apart over one or more appliances requiring protection.
Distribution Piping: Piping which delivers the extinguishing Nozzles used in this manner provide area protection of eligible
agent from the tank to each discharge nozzle. See also Supply appliances within the protected area. Two types of overlapping
or Branch lines. protection is available: full hood continuous protection and group
protection. Overlapping protection is in addition to appliance spe-
Ducts (or Duct System): A continuous passageway for the
cific coverages.
transmission of air and vapors which, in addition to the contain-
ment components themselves, may include duct fittings, damp- Plenum: The space enclosed by the filters and the portion of the
ers, duct filters, duct transitions, in-line or end-duct pollution con- hood above the filters.
trol units (PCUs), and/or other items or air handling equipment. Pre-engineered System: NFPA 17A defines a pre-engineered
Electrostatic Precipitator: A device used to aid in the cleaning system as one which has “…predetermined flow rates, nozzle
of the exhaust air. This device is normally installed at or near the pressures, and quantities of liquid agent.” The R-102 system, as
base of the ventilation duct or may be included as an integral prescribed by UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), has specific pipe
part of a pollution control unit (PCU). sizes, maximum and minimum pipe lengths and numbers of fit-
tings, and number and types of nozzles. The hazards protected
Expellant Gas Line: Piping and/or hose which supplies the
by this system are also specifically limited as to type and size by
nitrogen or carbon dioxide gas from the regulated release
UL based upon actual fire tests. All limitations on hazards that
assembly/regulated actuator assembly to each agent tank.
can be protected and piping and nozzle configurations are con-
Flexible Conduit: A flexible means to route stainless steel cable tained in the R-102 installation and maintenance manual which
from the AUTOMAN Regulated Release to a manual pull station is part of the UL listing.
or mechanical gas valve.
Flow Number: Term used in system design to describe the flow
capacity of each nozzle used to determine the quantity of tanks
needed to cover a certain group of hazards.
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 1-3
DEFINITION OF TERMS (Continued)

Pulley Elbow: A device used to change the direction of the wire
rope which runs between: the regulated release mechanism
and the detectors, the regulated release mechanism and the
mechanical gas valve, and/or the regulated release mechanism
and the remote manual pull station.
Pulley Tee: A device used to change the direction of two wire
ropes which run from a regulated release or a regulated actu-
ator to two remote manual pull stations, or from two regulated
releases or regulated actuators to a single mechanical gas valve
or from one regulated release or regulated actuator to two gas
valves.
Regulated Actuator Assembly: An assembly which contains
the regulator, pneumatic actuator, agent tank, and expellant gas
hose within a metal enclosure. This assembly is used to pressur-
ize additional agent tanks in a multiple tank system.
Regulated Release Mechanism: An enclosed device within
the AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which releases the
expellant gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other devices
when signaled automatically by a detector or manually with a
remote pull station.
Regulator: A device used to regulate the pressure from the
nitrogen cartridge into the agent tank(s) when the system is
actuated.
Remote Manual Pull Station: A device which provides manual
actuation of the system from a remote location.
Remote Mechanical Release: A device that provides actua-
tion gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other devices when
signaled automatically by a detector, or manually with a remote
pull station.
Salamander Broiler: A broiler very similar in design to the
upright broiler. A salamander broiler is used for general broiling
of meats and fish, toasting, and holding/warming foods. Most
contain a removable grease drip tray.
Series Detector: Any detector located in-line between the regu-
lated release assembly and the terminal detector.
Silicone Lubricant: A heat-resistant organic compound used to
lubricate O-rings, rubber and mechanical components.
Supply Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from
the agent tank outlet and serves as a manifold for the branch
lines.
Terminal Detector: The last in a series of detectors, or the only
detector used in a single-detector system. This detector is thus
named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends,
or ‘‘terminates.’’ There is only one terminal detector per detection
system.
Transition: An extension of the hood or canopy which allows for
the smooth transmission of gases, air, and vapors between the
hood opening and the base of the ventilation duct.
Vent Plug: A device used to prevent pressure build-up within
the agent tank or agent distribution lines due to temperature
fluctuations.
SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 1-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
NOTES:
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 2 – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 2-1
TOTAL SYSTEM Double-Tank System

There are four types of R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression The R-102 double-tank system is available with stainless steel
Systems: enclosures and consists of:
1. Single-tank System 1.
AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or
2. Double-tank System Mechanical)
3. Three-tank System (1 Cartridge) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge
4.
Multiple Tank System (Three Tanks or More – Multiple 3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
Cartridges) 4. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly
The type of system required for the particular installation will be 5. Discharge Nozzles
determined through the guidelines covered in “System Design.” 6. Detection Components
Additional equipment which may be required to complete the
system design is explained in the “System Components” sec- 7. Additional Devices (As Required)
tion. Additional devices covered are: remote manual pull sta- The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
tions, mechanical and electrical gas shut-off valves, electrical mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank
switches, and pressure switches. hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant
piping, detection system, and additional equipment.
Single-Tank System
The enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but
The R-102 single-tank system is available with a stainless steel within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly expellant
enclosure and consists of: gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the
1.
AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or system. Refer to “System Components” section for individual
Mechanical) component descriptions.
2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge
3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
4. Discharge Nozzles
5. Detection Components
6. Additional Devices (As Required)
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hook-
up, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing detection sys-
tem and additional equipment. Refer to “System Components”
section for individual component descriptions.
FIGURE 2-2
008321
FIGURE 2-1
000133
SECTION 2 – SYSTEM DESCRIPTION R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 2-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
TOTAL SYSTEM (Continued) Multiple Tank System (Three Tanks or More – Multiple
Three-Tank System (1 Cartridge with Three 3.0 Gal Tanks Cartridges)
ONLY) The R-102 multiple-tank system is available with stainless steel
The R-102 three-tank system is available with stainless steel enclosures and consists of:
enclosures and consists of: 1. AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly
1.
AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or (Electrical or Mechanical) or AUTOMAN Remote Release
Mechanical) Assembly(ies)
2. Double Tank Enclosure Assembly 2. Nitrogen Cartridge(s) and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge(s)
3. Nitrogen Cartridge 3. Regulated Actuator Assembly(ies)
4. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 4. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant
5. Discharge Nozzles 5. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly(ies)
6. Detection Components 6. Discharge Nozzles
7. Additional Devices (As Required) 7. Detection Components
The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release 8. Additional Devices (As Required)
mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release
hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank
piping, detection system, and additional equipment. hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actua-
The double tank enclosure assembly is mounted separately but tion piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional
within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly expellant equipment.
gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the The remote release assembly(ies) is used in large systems or
system. Refer to “System Components” section for individual multi-hood systems to actuate regulated actuator assembly(ies)
component descriptions. ONLY. The remote release assembly contains a release mecha-
nism (unregulated), with enclosure knockouts to facilitate install-
ing the actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and
additional equipment.
Each regulated actuator assembly is mounted separately but
within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly actua-
tion/expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous
actuation of the system. The assembly contains the pneumatic
actuator, regulator, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent
tank hookup, and enclosure plugs to facilitate installing expellant
piping.
Each enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but
within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly or reg-
ulated actuator assembly expellant gas piping requirements to
ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to “System
Components” section for individual component descriptions.
FIGURE 2-3
008322
FIGURE 2-4
008323
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 3 – SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 3-1
EXTINGUISHING AGENT Automatic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detec-
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon – Part tion system separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of
No. 79694 or 3.0 gallon – Part No. 79372) is a potassium-based the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual
solution designed for fast knock-down and suppression of pull station pull ring.
grease-related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
which provide one complete tank charge. (Refer to Section V, (MECHANICAL)
Page 5-2.1, for maximum agent fill capacity.) Agent storage life NOTE: A
GENT TANK MUST BE
expectancy is twelve years and can be stored at a temperature of ORDERED SEPARATELY
(SEE PAGE 3-3)
–40 °F to 130 °F (–40 °C to 54 °C). Note: When installing agent
in R-102 system, temperature range is 32 °F (0 °C) to 130 °F RELEASE
MECHANISM
(54 °C). The distributor must record the batch numbers and date
of shipment receipt to be filed with each installation record.
“ANSULEX” LOW pH LIQUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT
REGULATOR
SHIPPING WT. 20.9 LB (9.5 kg)

3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON
FIGURE 3-2
009454
SHIPPING WT. 35 LB (15.9 kg) SHIPPING WT. 19 LB (8.6 kg)
000136 000137
FIGURE 3-1 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL)

The AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Assembly (Part
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) No. 429856) is identical to the mechanical version except it also
The AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly (Part contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical
No. 429853) contains the regulated release mechanism, expel- switch.
lant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts
The solenoid is used to provide electrical actuation of the
to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping; detec-
release mechanism. The electric switch is used to protect the
tion system; and additional equipment. This regulated release
solenoid by opening the circuit to the solenoid once the system
assembly is used in single, double, and multiple-tank systems
is fired. Additional electrical switches can be added as required
and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mecha-
for automatic equipment and gas shut-off accessories, as well
nism can be used to interconnect both the actuation and expel-
as initiating audible and visual alarms.
lant gas lines as required per system design. The regulator is
designed to allow a constant flow of gas into the tank at 110 psi
AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
(7.6 bar) when the system is actuated. The agent tank must be
(ELECTRICAL)*
ordered separately.
NOTE: A
GENT TANK MUST SHIPPING WT. 22.1 LB (10.0 kg)
In single, double, and multiple-tank systems, the provided BE ORDERED
SEPARATELY
expellant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet (SEE PAGE 3-3)
of the regulator. In double and multiple-tank system configura-
tions, the back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant REGULATOR
SWITCH
gas feed for one additional tank-enclosure or tank-bracket
hookup. The enclosure contains the required knockouts to
facilitate this connection. If a pressure switch is to be attached
to the regulator, additional fittings are required. SOLENOID
The tank is mounted within the enclosure. The tank contains

an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst
disc helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the pipe due to
significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank
is located. The tank is stainless steel and, under normal condi-
tions, requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years.
The detection and additional equipment required per system
design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure
contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups. FIGURE 3-3
009455
The system can be actuated automatically or manually. *N

ote: AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release (Part No. 429856) is not intend-
ed to be used with electric detection.
SECTION 3 – SYSTEM COMPONENTS R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 3-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
REMOTE MECHANICAL RELEASE SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY

The Remote Mechanical Release (Part No. 433485) is used The Single Tank Enclosure Assembly (Part No. 429870) is used
to actuate up to five R-102 regulated actuators. The remote in double and multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to
mechanical release utilizes a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge a rigid surface near the regulated release or regulated actuator
as the actuation pressure to operate the regulated actuators. assembly its expellent gas line will be connected to.
The release is housed in a stainless steel enclosure. The enclosure is designed for mounting either a 1.5 gallon (Part
Also available is an OEM Remote Release/Bracket Assembly No. 429864) or a 3.0 gallon tank (Part No. 429862) in a mini-
(Part No. 439946). The OEM Remote Release/Bracket contains mum amount of space.
the same release mechanism as the standard Remote Release,
and must be installed in a suitable equipment enclosure either ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
horizontally or vertically. The remote release contains all the
necessary mounting and conduit holes needed to fully install
NOTE: A
GENT TANK MUST
the assembly. Note: OEM Release/Bracket Assembly must be BE ORDERED
installed high enough in cabinet so that there is sufficient room SEPARATELY
(SEE PAGE 3-3)
to install and remove cartridge.
MOUNTING
RELEASE ENCLOSURE
MECHANISM
SHIPPING WT.
13 LB (5.9 kg)
FIGURE 3-5
000142
SHIPPING WEIGHT:
14.4 LB (6.5 kg)
RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 3-4 The Bracket Assembly (Part No. 429878) is used in double and
009456
multiple-tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface
near the regulated release assembly or regulated actuator
assembly that its expellant gas line will be connected to.
The tank bracket is constructed of mild steel and painted red.
It is designed for mounting the tank in a minimum amount of
space. The Bracket Assembly can only be utilized with 3.0 gal-
lon tanks (Part No. 429862).
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING
BRACKET
SHIPPING WT. 7 LB (3.2 kg)
FIGURE 3-6
000141
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 3-3
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY

The Regulated Actuator Assembly (Part No. 429850) contains the (FOR OEM IN-CABINET USE ONLY)
regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose for agent tank The OEM Regulated Mechanical Release/Bracket Assembly
hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant (Part No. 79493) contains the same regulated release mecha-
piping. This assembly is used in multiple-tank systems and must nism as the standard AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly.
be mounted to a rigid surface. The OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly (Part
No. 437324*), is identical to the mechanical version except that
The regulator contains two outlets 135° apart. One outlet is
it contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical
used to interconnect the expellant gas hose to the enclosed
switch. These release/bracket assemblies must be installed in
agent tank. The other outlet connects an expellant gas line to
a suitable equipment enclosure either horizontally or vertically.
an additional enclosure or bracket assembly. The regulator is
They contain all the necessary mounting and conduit holes
designed to allow a constant flow of expellant gas into each
needed to fully install the assembly. The agent tank is installed
agent tank at 110 psi (7.6 bar).
separately and need not be bracketed once it is piped and filled.
The pneumatic actuator is designed to puncture the expellant Note: OEM Release/Bracket Assembly must be installed high
gas cartridge seal upon receiving pressure from the regulated enough in cabinet so that there is sufficient room to install and
release assembly actuation piping. The enclosure contains a remove cartridge.
knockout to facilitate distribution piping hookup. *Note: OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly (Part No. 437324) is
not intended to be used with electric detection.
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
NOTE: AGENT TANK

MUST BE
MOUNTING
ORDERED PNEUMATIC RELEASE BRACKET
SEPARATELY ACTUATOR MECHANISM
(SEE PAGE 3-3) ASSEMBLY
REGULATOR
REGULATOR
SHIPPING WT.
9.3 LB (4.2 kg)
SHIPPING WT.
19 LB (8.6 kg)
FIGURE 3-7 FIGURE 3-9

000143 009457
AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY

The agent tank shipping assembly (3 Gallon (Part No. 429862) The OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly (Part No. 418691)
and 1.5 Gallon (Part No. 429864)) consists of a stainless steel includes the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose
tank and an adaptor/tube assembly. The adaptor/tube assem- and OEM bracket. Also available is an OEM Regulated Actuator
bly contains a burst disc. The burst disc prevents agent leakage Assembly with all the above mentioned components except for
due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the bracket. This assembly is Part No. 418522.
the tank is located. Under normal conditions, the tank requires
hydrostatic testing every twelve years. The date of manufacture
is stamped on the tank nameplate.
The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with only
ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation.
TANK ADAPTOR/
TUBE ASSEMBLY
3 GALLON
SHIPPING WT.
7 LB (3.2 kg)
1.5 GALLON
SHIPPING WT.
5 LB (2.3 kg)
SHIPPING WT. 4 LB (1.8 kg)
AGENT
TANK FIGURE 3-10
002225
FIGURE 3-8
000140
PAGE 3-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLIES

The Two Tank Enclosure Assembly (Part No. 429872) consists Several complete shipping assemblies are available containing
of two expellant gas hoses, two grommets, and the mounting both the release or actuator mechanism and the agent tank.
enclosure. The assembly is used in 9-gallon systems. It can be When ordering a complete shipping assembly, order the follow-
coupled with a 3-gallon regulated release assembly or a 3-gal- ing part numbers:
lon regulated actuator assembly to give a total of 9 gal (34.1 L)
Shipping Wt.
of agent. Agent tanks must be ordered separately.
Part No. Description lb (kg)
The tank enclosure is designed to mount in a minimum amount
of space. 430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release 33 (15)
Shipping Assembly including:
429853 Mechanical Regulated
Release Assembly
429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
SHIPPING WT.
430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release 30 (14)
26 LB (11.8 kg) Shipping Assembly including:
429853 Mechanical Regulated
Release Assembly
430309 3.0 Gallon Regulated Actuator 36 (16)
429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly

FIGURE 3-11 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
002277
430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 18 (8)
24VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
429870 Single Tank Mounting Box
The 24VDC Regulated Release Assembly (Part No. 429859) is Assembly
used where electric, thermostat detection is required via the use 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly
of a releasing control unit. This assembly consists of a 24VDC 418511 Hose Assembly
AUTOMAN II-C regulated release mechanism, expellant gas
hose, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 20 (9)
piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equip- Shipping Assembly including:
ment. Agent tank must be ordered separately. 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box
Assembly
The system can be actuated automatically or manually. 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
Automatic actuation occurs when the control panel receives 418511 Hose Assembly
a signal from the detection circuit. The panel then sends an
electrical signal to the 24VDC regulated release, causing it to 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 40 (18)
actuate. When actuation occurs, the gas cartridge is punctured, Shipping Assembly including:
pressurizing the agent tank and discharging the agent through 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box
the distribution piping. Manual actuation of the system occurs Assembly
when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull ring. 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2)
430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping 20 (9)
NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE Assembly including:
ORDERED SEPARATELY
(SEE PAGE 3-3) 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket
Assembly
SHIPPING WT. 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly
34 LB (15.4 kg)

FIGURE 3-12
002279
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 3-5
GAS CARTRIDGES NOZZLES

The R-102 system uses gas cartridges to store nitrogen or There are 11 types of discharge nozzles each designed to
carbon dioxide expellant gases under pressure until the system distribute the liquid agent in a uniform pattern throughout the
is actuated, at which time the cartridge seal is punctured and hazard area:
the released gas expels liquid agent from one or more tanks 1. 1/2N Nozzle 7. 245 Nozzle
through the discharge piping and out the discharge nozzles. 2. 1F Nozzle 8. 260 Nozzle
Four nitrogen gas cartridges and three carbon dioxide gas car- 3. 1W Nozzle 9. 290 Nozzle
tridges are available as shown in Figure 13. 4. 1N Nozzle 10. 2120 Nozzle
Cartridges noted as TC/DOT are both Transport Canada (TC) 5. 2W Nozzle 11. 3N Nozzle
and Department of Transportation (DOT) approved. Cartridges 6. 230 Nozzle
noted as DOT are Department of Transportation approved only.
Although these nozzles are similar in appearance and have
Cartridge selection options are provided in Section 4 under certain common parts, the tip of each nozzle is designed for a
Tank and Cartridge Requirements. specific application and must only be used in those areas. See
NITROGEN GAS CARTRIDGES Nozzle Application Chart in Section 4 – System Design, for
individual nozzle usage. Nozzles are shipped with metal blow-
off caps included.
A 25 pack of Nozzle O-rings (Part No. 439848) is also available.

17 1/4 IN. 3/8 – 18 NPT
11 5/8 IN. (438 mm) FEMALE THREAD
12 1/4 IN.
7 7/8 IN. (295 mm)
(311 mm)
(200 mm)
NOZZLE
IDENTIFICATION
INTERNAL CUP
2 1/2 IN. 2 1/2 IN. 4 3/16 IN. 3 9/16 IN. STRAINER INSIDE
(64 mm) (64 mm) (106 mm) (90 mm)
LT-20-R LT-30-R DOUBLE-TANK LT-A-101-30
CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE
000145 000146 000147 000148
CARBON DIOXIDE CARTRIDGES
SILICONE
O-RING
11 5/8 IN.
FIGURE 3-14
009474
9 IN. 7 7/8 IN. (295 mm)
(229 mm) (200 mm)
Nozzle Identification Chart
Nozzle
Nozzle Nozzle Package Flow
2 IN. 2 1/2 IN. 2 1/2 IN. Type Part No. Quantity No. Nozzle Material
(51 mm) (64 mm) (64 mm)
101-10 CARTRIDGE 101-20 CARTRIDGE 101-30 CARTRIDGE
1/2N Nozzle 439837 9 1/2 Chrome-Plated Body
000149 000150 000151
1F Nozzle 439836 9 1 Chrome-Plated Body
FIGURE 3-13 1W Nozzle* 439839 25 1 Chrome-Plated Body
Additional cartridge shipping assemblies are available for 1N Nozzle* 439838 25 1 Chrome-Plated Body
European and Australian requirements. 2W Nozzle 439840 25 2 Chrome-Plated Body
Cartridge European Australian TC/DOT 230 Nozzle 439842 25 2 Chrome-Plated Body
Description
_________ Part No. Part No.
_______ ______ Part No.
_______ 245 Nozzle 439843 25 2 Chrome-Plated Body
LT-20-R 428440 428948 423429
260 Nozzle 439844 9 2 Chrome-Plated Body
LT-30-R 428441 426553 423435
Double Tank 428446 426563 423493
LT-A-101-30 428442 426555 423491
3N Nozzle 439841 9 3 Chrome-Plated Body
101-10 – CO2 428443 N/A 423439
*Stainless steel versions are available in the 1W nozzle (Part No. 439864) and
101-20 – CO2 428445 N/A 423441 the 1N nozzle (Part No. 439865).
101-30 – CO2 428444 N/A 423443
Note: For 101-10 cartridge, Part No. 15850 is DOT only. SILICONE LUBRICANT
Dow Corning Compound 111 (Part No. 78112) is available in a
5.3‑ounce tube. Compound has excellent qualities for sealing
and lubricating system components.
PAGE 3-6 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SWIVEL ADAPTOR CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY

The Swivel Adaptor Assembly consists of a swivel nut, swivel The conduit offset assembly (Part No. 435961) is used to
body and swivel ball. All are chrome-plated. The swivel adaptor change direction of the wire rope on detection, mechanical gas
allows any nozzle to be rotated approximately 30° in all direc- valve, and remote pull station lines. The conduit offset assem-
tions. Swivel Adaptors must be ordered as a Swivel Adaptor bly can only be used in the area where the conduit attaches to
Shipping Assembly (Part No. 423572) which contains 25 Swivel the regulated release assembly. When using the conduit offset
Adaptors or Part No. 419385, which contains 9 Swivel Adaptors. assembly, the maximum number of pulley elbows allowed is
16. The Conduit Offset Shipping Assembly (Part No. 436063)
3/8 – 18 NPT
FEMALE THREAD consists of 6 conduit offsets.
CONDUIT
COUPLING
3/8 – 18 NPT
MALE THREAD CONDUIT
30 DEGREE OFFSET
ROTATION
FIGURE 3-15
000003
METAL BLOW-OFF CAP CONDUIT

CONNECTOR
The Metal Blow-Off Cap helps keep the orifice of the nozzle free
of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent
distribution.
FIGURE 3-18
000153
The Metal Blow-Off Cap Package (Part No. 439861) contains
10 blow-off caps.
“QUIK-SEAL” ADAPTOR
Also available is a 10 pack of Stainless Steel Blow-Off Caps
The “Quik-Seal” adaptor is a listed mechanical bulkhead fitting
(Part No. 439866).
that produces a liquid-tight seal around both distribution piping
and detection conduit which runs through restaurant hoods and
ducts. The “Quik-Seal” adaptor accepts threaded pipe or con-
duit. The adaptor is available for 1/4 in. (Part No. 78196), 3/8 in.
(Part No. 77285), 1/2 in. (Part No. 77287), or 3/4 in. (Part No.
METAL CAP 77289) pipe or conduit sizes. When using with EMT conduit, a
STAINLESS
STEEL WIRE
conduit connector must be installed in each end of the adaptor.
The “Quik-Seal” Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered
FIGURE 3-16 as stated below:
009475
Shipping
REDUCING COUPLING Assembly Hole Size
Size Part No. Qty. Required
The reducing coupling (Part No. 436228) is made of stainless
steel material with 3/8 in. x 1/2 in. NPT inlet threads. If neces- 1/4 in. 78196 24 3/4 in.
3/8 in. 77285 24 1 1/8 in.
sary, the reducing coupling can be utilized when installing the
1/2 in. 77287 24 1 1/8 in.
Agent Distribution Hose Line Kit (Part No. 435982). Two cou-
3/4 in. 77289 24 1 3/8 in.
plings are required per Agent Distribution Hose.
ADAPTOR BODY
1/4 IN.
(6 mm) GASKET
LOCKWASHER
NUT
1 3/16 IN.
(30 mm)
FIGURE 3-19
000154
FIGURE 3-17
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 3-7
“COMPRESSION-SEAL” ADAPTOR COCKING LEVER/LOCK PIN

This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a The cocking lever is a component required to cock (arm) both
liquid-tight seal around pipe and conduit when installing distribu- the mechanical/electrical AUTOMAN release and the mech
tion piping and detection conduit through restaurant hoods and anical gas valve. After the AUTOMAN is cocked (armed), the
ducts. The “Compression-Seal” adaptor is a straight-through lock pin must be inserted to eliminate the accidental firing of
design requiring no cutting or threading of conduit or pipe. The the release mechanism. These components are available as
adaptor is available for pipe sizes of 1/4 in. (Part No. 79149), either an individual shipping assembly or a shipping assembly
3/8 in. (Part No. 79151), 1/2 in. (Part No. 79147), and EMT con- containing both. Listed below are the various shipping assem-
duit size of 1/2 in. (Part No. 79153). Each “Compression-Seal” bly part numbers.
Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: Part No. Description
Shipping 441042 Short Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Pin
Assembly Hole Size
(Mechanical/Electrical AUTOMAN)
Size Part No. Qty. Required
1/4 in. Pipe / 1/2 in. tube 79149 24 3/4 in. 441041 Long Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Pin
3/8 in. Pipe / 5/8 in. tube 79151 24 1 1/8 in. (Mechanical/Electrical AUTOMAN)
1/2 in. Pipe 79147 24 1 1/8 in. 26310 Cocking Lever only (AUTOMAN II-C)
1/2 in. EMT Conduit 79153 24 1 1/8 in.
416018 Cocking Lever only (Mechanical Gas Valve)
COMPRESSION NUT
438031 Lock Pin
Short Handle Cocking Lever

ADAPTOR BODY
GASKET
LOCKWASHER
NUT
FIGURE 3-20 *Requires a crescent wrench or

000155 open end/box wrench
*
“HOOD SEAL” ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY
This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a
liquid-tight seal around 1/2 in. EMT conduit when installing the
detection line through restaurant hoods and duct. The adap- Long Handle Cocking Lever
tor accepts a high temperature pulley elbow and, when used,
correctly positions the elbow or conduit in line with the conduit
adaptor hole in the detector bracket. The “Hood Seal” elimi-
nates the need for multiple elbows when penetrating the top of
a hood when installing the detection line. “Hood Seal” Adaptors
are available in quantities of six as Shipping Assembly Part No.
423253.
SEAL NUT
Lock Pin
SEAL WASHER
ADAPTOR
BODY
GASKET
PULLEY
ELBOW
(NOT PART
OF ASSEMBLY)
USE ONLY PULLEY ELBOW, PART NO. 423250

000156
008325
PAGE 3-8 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
DETECTORS PULLEY ELBOWS

The detector consists of three basic components: the bracket, There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the
linkage, and fusible link. (Fusible links are not included and must direction of the wire rope by 90°. ANSUL recommends for tem-
be ordered separately.) The bracket holds the entire assembly peratures not in excess of 700 °F (371 °C). Part No. 415670
to the mounting surface. The linkage is used to support the has socket ends with set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part
fusible link. The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific No. 423250 has compression ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit.
temperature and release the wire rope, thereby actuating the Pulley elbows must be ordered in quantities of 50 as Shipping
regulated release mechanism. Assembly Part No. 415671 (socket end type) and Part No.
The scissor style detector allows the wire rope to be strung com- 423251 (compression end type).
pletely through the detection system conduit and brackets first PART NO. 415670 PART NO. 423250
and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later.
The detector consists of two types of assemblies:
The Terminal Detector (Part No. 435546) includes a test link
and is placed last in a series of detectors. This detector is some-
times referred to as the end-of-line detector and is thus named
because it is at the point at which the wire rope “terminates,” or
is anchored at the detector bracket. Only one terminal detector FIGURE 3-24
is required per detection system. 000160/000161
The Series Detector (Part No. 435547) is any detector located

in-line between the regulated release assembly and the terminal PULLEY TEE
detector. The Pulley Tee (Part No. 427929) is used to change the direc-
When using Part No. 435546 and 435547 detectors, a total of tion of two wire ropes by 90°. It must be used in areas where
15 detectors can be in one detection system: 14 series detectors the temperatures are within the range of 32 °F to 130 °F (0 °C
(Part No. 435547) and 1 terminal detector (Part No. 435546). to 54 °C). Pulley tees can be used in mechanical gas valve
actuation lines and remote manual pull station lines. Pulley tees
Note 1: Series Detector (Part No. 435547) is also available as cannot be used within a detection line.
Part No. 435548, 25/Pkg.
Note 2: Scissor-style linkage is also available in a 10-Pack (Part
No. 439515).
BRACKET
LINKAGE
FIGURE 3-25
FUSIBLE 000447
LINK
ANSUL STAINLESS STEEL CABLE

FIGURE 3-23 The 1/16 in. stainless steel cable is run from the terminal detec-
000159
tor, through conduit, all series detectors and pulley elbows,
and into the regulated release mechanism trip lever. When any
fusible link separates, the tension on the cable is relaxed, and
the trip lever actuates the regulated release mechanism. The
cable can also be used for mechanical gas valves and remote
manual pull stations. The cable is available in 50 ft (15.2 m)
(Part No. 15821) and 500 ft (152.4 m) (Part No. 79653) lengths.
The ANSUL stainless steel cable contains a blue tracer cable.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 3-9
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION MECHANICAL GAS VALVES

The remote manual pull station (Part No. 434618 or 435960) The mechanical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of
is made out of a molded red composite material. The red color gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release
makes the pull station more readily identifiable as the manual assembly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1
means for fire suppression system operation. The pull station 1/4 in., 1 1/2 in., and 2 in. ANSUL style; and 2 1/2 in. and 3 in.
is compatible with the ANSUL Flexible Conduit. The molded ASCO style. The valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both
manual pull station should be mounted at a point of egress styles are UL Listed and includes the air cylinder, tubing, and
and positioned at a height determined by the authority having fittings (Part No. 15733) for connection to the release mecha-
jurisdiction. Trim Rings (Part No. 427074) (pack of 10), are nism.
available. Maximum
Part No. 434618 (Without Wire Rope) Part Operating
Part No. 435960 (With 50 ft (15.2 m) of Wire Rope) No. Description Pressure
55598 3/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55601 1 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55604 1 1/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55607 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
55610 2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (0.69 bar)
25937 2 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (0.35 bar)
25938 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (0.35 bar)
Flow Capacity BTU/HR, at 1 in. P.D.

FIGURE 3-26 (CFH) 0.64 SP GR
008326 Pipe Size P.D. 1 in. WC 1000 BTU/ft3
(inches) 0.64 SP GR Natural Gas
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 3/4 751 751,000
Flexible conduit allows for quicker installations and the conve- 1 1288 1,288,000
nience of being able to route the cable over, under and around 1 1/4 1718 1,718,000
obstacles. Flexible conduit can be used as a substitute for stan- 1 1/2 2630 2,630,000
dard EMT conduit or can be used with EMT conduit. Flexible 2 4616 4,616,000
conduit can be used only with the Molded Manual Pull Station 2 1/2 5700 5,800,000
(Part No. 434618) and mechanical gas valve installations. The 3 7100 7,300,000
Flexible Conduit comes in a 500 ft (152.4 m) length (Part No. To calculate gas flow for other than 1 inch p.d.:
434525) or together with 500 ft (152.4 m) of wire rope (Part No.
435959). New cfh = (cfh at 1 inch) x u new p.d.
A 50 ft (15.2 m) Flexible Conduit pre-fed with wire rope (Part To calculate gas flow for other than 0.64 SP GR:
No. 439104) is available. New cfh = (cfh at 0.64) x u 0.64
Also available is a Flexible Conduit Strain Relief (50-pack) (Part New SP GR
No. 435979). A B C
A 50-pack of Flexible Conduit Inserts (Part No. 434347) and a Valve Size in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
50-pack of P-Clips (Part No. 436150) are also available. 3/4 in. 3 3/4 (95.3) 6 3/8 (161.9) 5 1/2 (139.7)
1 in. 3 3/4 (95.3) 6 3/8 (161.9) 5 1/2 (139.7)
Note 1: Flexible conduit is intended for indoor use ONLY. 1 1/4 in. 4 7/8 (123.8) 7 3/8 (187.3) 6 3/8 (161.9)
1 1/2 in. 4 7/8 (123.8) 7 3/8 (187.3) 6 3/8 (161.9)
Note 2: Flexible conduit cannot be used in detection sys-
2 in. 5 7/8 (149.2) 7 7/8 (200.0) 6 11/16 (169.9)
tems.
2 1/2 in. 7 13/16 (198.4) ----- 9 1/16 (230.2)
3 in. 7 25/32 (197.6) ----- 9 1/16 (230.2)
C C
A
B A
3/4 IN. THRU 2 IN. 2 1/2 IN. THRU 3 IN.
004209
004208
FIGURE 3-27
PAGE 3-10 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES MANUAL RESET RELAY

The electrical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of The Manual Reset Relay (Part No. 426151) is required when
either natural or LP gas to the appliances upon actuation of using an electrical gas valve shut-off system. After the electric
the regulated release assembly. The valves are available in gas valve has closed, either due to system actuation or power
sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/4 in., 1 1/2 in., 2 in., 2 1/2 in., and 3 failure, the valve cannot be re-opened, allowing gas to flow,
in. The valve is held open by an energized solenoid and upon until the reset relay button is manually pressed, re-energizing
system actuation, the switch contacts in the regulated release the circuit. The reset relay is available 120 VAC. The manual
assembly open, thus de-energizing the circuit to the gas valve reset relay is also recommended for electrical shut down.
solenoid, causing the valve to close. Valves are available in 120
VAC and are UL Listed.
Part Max. Operating
No. Description Pressure
13707 3/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
13708 1 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
550360 1 1/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar)
FIGURE 3-29
000087
Flow Capacity BTU/HR, at 1 in. P.D.
(CFH) 0.64 SP GR
Pipe Size P.D. 1 in. WC 1000 BTU/ft3 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES
(inches) 0.64 SP GR Natural Gas The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas
3/4 264.96 247,500 valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric
1 1091.01 1,119,000 power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are
1 1/4 1662.49 1,730,000 designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated.
1 1/2 1818.35 1,900,000 Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit (Part No. 423878),
2 3117.18 3,251,000 Two Switch Kit (Part No. 423879), Three Switch Kit (Part No.
2 1/2 6078.49 5,821,000 423880), and Four Switch Kit (Part No. 423881). Mounting
3 7169.51 7,430,000 hardware and 24 in. (610 mm) long wire leads are provided with
To calculate gas flow for other than 1 inch p.d.: each kit. A Two-Switch Assembly without wire leads (Part No.
New cfh = (cfh at 1 inch) x u new p.d. 436770) is also available. Each switch has a set of single-pole,
double-throw contacts rated at:
To calculate gas flow for other than 0.64 SP GR:
UL/cUL/CSA Rating ENEC Rating
New cfh = (cfh at 0.64) x u 0.64 250 VAC, 21A Resistive IE4T105µ Approved
New SP GR 250 VAC, 2 HP 250V, 21A Resistive
Valve A B 125 VAC, 1 HP 8A Motor Load
Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
3/4 in. 3 5/16 (81) 3 5/8 (92)
1 in. 5 (127) 6 27/32 (174)
1 1/4 in. 7 13/16 (198) 7 29/32 (201)
1 1/2 in. 5 (127) 5 19/32 (142)
2 in. 6 3/32 (155) 5 15/16 (151)
2 1/2 in. 7 13/16 (198) 7 29/32 (201)
3 in. 7 13/16 (198) 7 29/32 (201)
FIGURE 3-30
001612
FIGURE 3-28
004210
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 3-11
ALARM INITIATING SWITCH FUSIBLE LINK

The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit (Part No. 428311) can be field Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detec-
mounted within the AUTOMAN release. This switch must be tor(s) according to the temperature condition chart below:
used to close a supervised alarm circuit to the building main fire SL STYLE
alarm panel when the AUTOMAN release actuates. This action To Be Used
will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actua- Fusible Link Where
tion in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary Shipping Temperature Color
mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. Assembly Temperature Does Not of
The switch is rated 50 mA, 28 VDC. Part No. Rating Exceed Link
439085 (25) 165 °F 100 °F Black
(74 °C) (38 °C)
439086 (25) 212 °F 150 °F White
(100 °C) (66 °C)
439087 (25) 280 °F 225 °F Blue
ALARM
INITIATING
(138 °C) (107 °C)
SWITCH 439088 (25) 360 °F 290 °F Red
SWITCH (182 °C) (143 °C)
COVER
439089 (25) 450 °F 360 °F Green
(232 °C) (182 °C)
SWITCH MOUNTING
BRACKET (NOT INCLUDED A-PC STYLE
WITH ALARM INITIATING
SWITCH KIT) Fusible Link To Be Used
Shipping Where
Assembly Temperature Temperature
FIGURE 3-31 Part No. Rating Does Not Exceed
004890
439227 (10) 165 °F (74 °C) 100 °F (38 °C)
439228 (10) 212 °F (100 °C) 150 °F (66 °C)
REGULATOR TEST KIT 439229 (10) 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C)
The Test Kit Assembly (Shipping Part No. 56972) is required 439230 (10) 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C)
to test the regulator setting and nitrogen flow during 12-year 439231 (10) 450 °F (232 °C) 360 °F (182 °C)
maintenance examinations. This will ensure that the regulator 439232 (25) 500 °F (260 °C) 400 °F (204 °C)
is functioning properly.
TEMPERATURE
RATING STAMPED ON
FUSIBLE LINK BODY
FIGURE 3-32
000169
VENT PLUG ASSEMBLY SL STYLE A-PC STYLE

000170 000171
The Vent Plug Assembly (Part No. 74274) is installed on the FIGURE 3-33
agent tank adaptor to prevent pressure buildup within the agent
tank or distribution lines due to temperature fluctuations. MAXIMUM REGISTERING THERMOMETER
The Maximum Registering Thermometer (Part No. 15240) may
CARTRIDGE RECEIVER GASKET
be used to indicate the highest normal temperature for the pro-
The Cartridge Receiver Gasket (Part No. 181) is installed in the tected area. Once this is established, the correct rated fusible
release and actuator assembly cartridge receiver to create a link can be c hosen. Other methods for determining maximum
seal between the cartridge receiver assembly and the cartridge. temperatures may be used.
HOSE/GROMMET PACKAGE
The Hose/Grommet Package (Part No. 418511) consists of a
24 in. rubber hose and two grommets. This package is required
when expellant gas hose is routed outside the AUTOMAN
Regulated Release, Regulated Actuator, and/or tank enclosure
assemblies.
PAGE 3-12 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
IN-LINE BURST DISC ASSEMBLY (MANIFOLDED NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE

SYSTEMS ONLY) The Nozzle Aiming Device (Part No. 439877) is available to
The in-line burst disc assembly is required to eliminate the properly aim each nozzle to the correct aiming point. The device
siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme temperature clamps to the nozzle and emits a small laser light that reflects on
variations. In addition to eliminating the siphoning effect, the the surface that it is aiming at. The nozzle can then be rotated to
common in-line burst disc assembly eliminates the possibility point at a predetermined aiming point and then tightened to hold
of one or more individual discs located in the tank adaptor from that angle. The aiming device adaptor attaches to the nozzle.
failing to burst. The assembly consists of a stainless steel body The shipping assembly consists of the aiming device and the
which houses the burst disc. When utilizing this assembly in a adaptor.
manifolded system, it is necessary to modify (remove) the burst
disc located in all of the R-102 tank adaptors in the system. The
in-line burst disc assembly is to be mounted as close to the tank
outlet as possible. After system discharge, the assembly must
be disassembled and a new burst disc installed. ADAPTOR
(PART NO. 439876)
Part No. Description NOZZLE
AIMING
416970 In-Line Burst Disc Assembly DEVICE
(PART NO.
417911 Burst Disc (Pack of 10) 551265) FIGURE 3-36
006520
1.54 IN.
(39 mm)
STAINLESS STEEL BRAIDED ACTUATION HOSE
The Stainless Steel Actuation Hose is used to connect the actu-
ation line compression tees between each pneumatic actuator.
The hose has the same thread, 7/16-20, as the fittings. The
actuation hose allows flexibility between the AUTOMAN and
each regulated actuator.
Hose
Part No. Length Couplings
31809 16 in. (406 mm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females
32335 20 in. (508 mm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females
32336 24 in. (610 mm) 7/16-20 x 7/16-20 Females
430815 42 in. (1067 mm) 7/16-20 Female x 1/4 in. NPT
Male
RED SIDE OF BURST
DISC TO BE TOWARDS Fitting
ADAPTOR (PART NO. 417707)
Part No. Description
FIGURE 3-34 31810 Male Elbow (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT)
008383
31811 Male Tee (7/16-20 x 7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT)
1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE 415371 Tee (7/16-20 x 1/8 in. Male NPT x 1/8 in. Female NPT)
32338 Male Straight Connector (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT)
The 1/4 in. check valve (Part No. 25627) blocks the flow of 25627 1/4 in. Check Valve
actuation gas from the actuator that was actuated to the actu-
ator(s) that was not actuated. This prevents actuation gas from
escaping from an open actuator which may have had the car-
tridge removed. 7/16-20
7/16-20 FIGURE 3-37
CHECK VALVE (PART NO. 25627) 000433
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE AND RESTRAINING CABLE

KIT
The Agent Distribution Hose and Restraining Cable Kit (Part
No. 435982) consists of a 5 ft (1.5 m) long Agent Distribution
Hose, a 3 ft (0.9 m) long Restraining Cable, and a Restraining
Cable Hardware Package. The Agent Distribution Hose can be
1/4 IN. NPT
(6 mm) 2 IN. utilized with castered cooking appliances with castered sup-
(51 mm) ports found in commercial kitchens. The hose allows for move-
ment of the appliance for cleaning without having to disconnect
any fire suppression system discharge piping.
FIGURE 3-35
000899 Note: The Agent Distribution Hose is authorized for use with
only UL Listed ANSUL Wet Chemical Restaurant Fire Suppres
sion Systems.
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 4 – SYSTEM DESIGN
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-1
SYSTEM DESIGN GENERAL INFORMATION

The ANSUL R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System may be 1. Nozzles must be located 2-8 in. (51-203 mm) into the center
used on a number of different types of restaurant cooking appli- of the duct opening, discharging up. See Figure 4-1.
ances and hood and duct configurations. The design information
listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters
of this pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible
for the design of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a
current ANSUL certificate in an R-102 training program.
The R-102 and the PIRANHA systems use compatible agents
and components, therefore, they may be used together for
cooking appliance, hood, and duct protection. The primary
AUTOMAN Release can be either an R-102 or a PIRANHA
AUTOMAN Release and can actuate up to two additional R-102
or PIRANHA Regulated Actuators. In systems utilizing a 101 2 – 8 IN.
remote release, any combination of the maximum number of (51 – 203 mm)
regulated actuators can be used.

• Both systems must actuate simultaneously.
• Each system must be designed and installed per its appropri- FIGURE 4-1
ate manual. 000173
• Adjacent appliances requiring protection must be protected 2. In installations where a UL listed damper assembly is
with the same type of system, either R-102 or PIRANHA, employed, the duct nozzle can be installed beyond the 8
unless the center-to-center spacing between the adjacent
in. (203 mm) maximum, to a point just beyond the damper
R-102 and PIRANHA nozzles is no less than 36 in. (914 mm).
assembly that will not interfere with the damper. Exceeding
• When appliances are protected with R-102 nozzles, the
the maximum of 8 in. (203 mm) in this way will not void the
hood and connecting duct above those appliances cannot be
protected with PIRANHA nozzles. UL listing of the system.
• Mixing systems in a common plenum is not allowed. 3. Previously listed three flow number and five flow number
duct protection detailed in earlier published manual (Part No.
One of the key elements for restaurant fire protection is a correct
418087-06) can also still be utilized.
system design. This section is divided into 10 sub-sections:
Nozzle Placement Requirements, Tank Quantity Requirements, DUCT SIZES UP TO 50 IN. (1270 mm)
Actuation and Expellant Gas Line Requirements, Distribution PERIMETER/ 16 IN. (406 mm) DIAMETER
Piping Requirements, Detection System Requirements,
Manual Pull Station Requirements, Mechanical Gas Valve • One 1W nozzle = one flow number
Requirements, Electrical Gas Valve Requirements, Electrical • 50 in. (1270 mm) perimeter maximum
Switch Requirements, and Pressure Switch Requirements.
• 16 in. (406 mm) diameter maximum
Each of these sections must be completed before attempting
any installation. System design sketches should be made of all
DUCT SIZES UP TO 100 IN. (2540 mm)
aspects of design for reference during installation.
PERIMETER/ 32 IN. (812 mm) DIAMETER
NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS • One 2W nozzle = two flow numbers
This section gives guidelines for nozzle type, positioning, and • 100 in. (2540 mm) perimeter maximum
quantity for duct, plenum, and individual appliance protection.
• 32 in. (812 mm) diameter maximum
This section must be completed before determining tank quan-
tity and piping requirements. The chart below shows the maximum protection available from
each duct nozzle.
Duct Protection – Single Nozzle 3.0 Gallon 1.5 Gallon
All duct protection is UL listed without limitation of maximum duct Description System System
length (unlimited length). This includes all varieties of ductworks 2W Nozzle Maximum Maximum
both horizontal and vertical including ducts that run at angles to 100 in. (2540 mm) 100 in. (2540 mm)
the horizontal and ducts with directional bends. Perimeter Perimeter
Note: Ducts from multiple hoods connected to a common 1W Nozzle Maximum Maximum
ductwork must be protected in compliance with NFPA 96 and 50 in. (1270 mm) 50 in. (1270 mm)
all local codes. Perimeter Perimeter
The R-102 system uses different duct nozzles depending on the
size of duct being protected.
SECTION 4 – SYSTEM DESIGN R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 4-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Duct Protection – Multiple Nozzle Read over from the 8.0 in. (203 mm) line on the table to the
1W Module column. At that point, the chart shows that the “B”
DUCT SIZES UP TO 135 IN. (3429 mm) PERIMETER – module length for the 1W nozzle can be 22.0 in. (558 mm).
THREE FLOW OPTION Center the 1W nozzle in that module. The 2W module can now
be centered within the remaining module.
• One 1W nozzle and one 2W nozzle = three flow numbers
• 135 in. (3429 mm) perimeter maximum
• No round duct option available
• Follow design table in Figure 4-2 to determine maximum
module size for each nozzle
1W Module 2W Module
Side A Side B Side B Side B
Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) w. (mm)
4 (101) 60.0 (1524) 23.0 (584) 37.0 (939)
5 (127) 60.0 (1524) 23.0 (584) 37.0 (939)
6 (151) 59.5 (1511) 22.5 (571) 37.0 (939)
7 (177) 59.0 (1498) 22.0 (558) 37.0 (939)
8 (203) 58.5 (1485) 22.0 (558) 36.5 (927)
9 (228) 58.0 (1473) 21.5 (546) 36.5 (927)
10 (254) 57.0 (1447) 21.0 (533) 36.0 (914)
11 (279) 56.0 (1422) 20.5 (520) 35.5 (901)
12 (304) 55.5 (1409) 20.0 (508) 35.5 (901)
13 (330) 54.5 (1384) 19.5 (495) 35.0 (889)
14 (355) 53.5 (1358) 18.5 (469) 35.0 (889)
15 (381) 52.0 (1320) 18.0 (457) 34.0 (863)
16 (406) 51.0 (1295) 17.0 (431) 34.0 (863)
17 (431) 49.5 (1257) 16.0 (406) 33.5 (850)
18 (457) 47.5 (1206) 14.5 (368) 33.0 (838)
19 (482) 46.0 (1168) 13.5 (342) 32.5 (825)
20 (508) 43.5 (1104) 12.0 (304) 31.7 (805)
21 (533) 41.0 (1041) 10.0 (254) 31.0 (787)
22 (558) 38.0 (965) 7.5 (190) 30.5 (774)
23 (584) 33.5 (850) 4.0 (101) 29.5 (749)
FIGURE 4-2
006521
Example: Protection is required for a duct that has an “A”

dimension of 8 in. (203 mm) wide and a “B” dimension of 55 in.
(1397 mm) long.
Referring to the table in Figure 2, if the “A” dimension is
8 in. (203 mm), the “B” dimension must not exceed 58.5
in. (1485 mm). In this example, the “B” dimension is 55 in.
(1397 mm), therefore, this duct can be protected with a three
flow application.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-3
Duct Protection – Multiple Nozzle (Continued) When working with Chart 4-2, one half of the quantity of nozzles
determined must be equally positioned in the top half of the
DUCT SIZES GREATER THAN 100 IN. (2540 mm) area of the duct and the remaining half of the nozzles must be
PERIMETER positioned in the bottom half of the duct area.
• Ducts over 100 in. (2540 mm) perimeter may be modularized Example: The duct to be protected has a Side “A” of 40 in.
using 2W nozzles (1016 mm) and a Side “B” of 60 in. (1524 mm). Referring to the
design chart, this duct requires four nozzles. One half of 4 = 2.
• No round duct option available
Therefore, two nozzles must be equally positioned in each of the
• Follow the design chart to determine maximum module size two duct areas. See Figure 4-3.
for each 2W nozzle SIDE “B”
• When determining number of nozzles required, it is sometimes 30 IN. (762 mm) 30 IN. (762 mm)
an advantage to check the chart using the shortest side as

Side “A” and then recheck it using the longest side as Side 20 IN.
(508 mm)
“A.” This comparison may reveal a need for a lesser quantity
40 IN.
of nozzles one way versus the other way. SIDE
(1016 mm)
“A”
When working with Chart 4-1, the quantity of nozzles deter-
20 IN.
mined must be equally divided within the duct area. (508 mm)
60 IN.
CHART 4-1 (1524 mm)
B FIGURE 4-3
006523
A in.
SIDE “B” cm
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 in.
64 66 69 71 74 76 79 81 84 86 89 91 94 97 99 102 104 107 109 112 114 117 119 122 124 127 130 132 135 137 140 142 145 147 150 152 155 157 160 163 165 168 170 173 175 178 180 183 cm
4 10
5 13
6 15
7 18
8 20
9 23
10
11 1 25
28
12 30
13 33
14 36
15 38
SIDE
16
17 2 41
43
SIDE
“A”
“A” 18 46 cm
in. 19 48
20 51
21 53
22 56
23 58
24 61
25 64
26
27 3 66
69
28 71
29 74
30 76
31 79
32
33 4 81
84
34
35 5 6
86
89
36 5 6 7 91
CHART 4-2
B
A
NOTE: NOZZLE QUANTITIES LISTED IN CHART 4-2 MUST BE EQUALLY DIVIDED INTO EACH OF THE TWO DUCT MODULES.
36 91
37 94
38 97
39 99
40
41 2 4 102
104
6
42 107
43 109
44 112
45 114
46 117
47 119
006522
48 122
PAGE 4-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Transition Protection
Transitions are protected at a point in the transition where the The 1/2N nozzle must be centered 10 to 26 in. (254 to 660 mm)
perimeter or the diameter is equal to or less than the maximum below the precipitator and aimed to discharge at the center of
size duct that can be protected. The nozzle(s) must be located each precipitator cell. However, if it is physically impossible to
in the center of the area at that point, or center of the module mount the nozzle at 10 to 26 in. (254 to 660 mm) due to precip-
protected when more than one duct nozzle is required. Note: itator placement, the nozzle may be mounted closer than 10 in.
Nozzles to protect ducts with a transition that is more than (254 mm). See Figure 4-5.
4 ft (1.2 m) in height, will be required to be positioned in
the opening of the transition from the hood 2 to 8 in. (50
to 203 mm) into the opening using standard duct nozzle
design parameters. See Figure 4-4. SEE DUCT FOR
DUCT TRANSITION
NOZZLE PROTECTION
DUCT
TRANSITION
PRECIPITATOR
10-26 IN.*
(254-660 mm)
4 FT
(1.2 m)
MAX.
NOZZLE FOR
PRECIPITATOR
PROTECTION
* IF PHYSICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AT 10 TO 26 IN. (254 TO 660 mm), NOZZLE MAY BE

FIGURE 4-4 MOUNTED CLOSER THAN 10 IN. (254 mm).
000174
FIGURE 4-5
000196
Electrostatic Precipitator Protection

Note: For protection of Pollution Control Units (PCUs) or air
Some restaurant ventilating ducts have an electrostatic precip- scrubbers with or without ESPs, contact Technical Services for
itator installed at or near the base. These precipitators are non-UL listed recommended application.
generally small and are used to aid in the cleaning of exhaust air.
Ducts with precipitators located at or near the base can be
protected using duct nozzle(s) above the precipitator and 1/2N
nozzle(s) for the precipitator. One 1/2N nozzle must be used
for each cell being protected. This nozzle is stamped with 1/2N,
indicating that it is a 1/2-flow nozzle and must be counted as 1/2
flow number.
When protecting ducts equipped with precipitators, the duct
nozzle(s) must be installed above the precipitator and aimed to
discharge downstream. If the area above the precipitator is a
duct, the nozzle(s) must be positioned according to duct protec-
tion guidelines. If the area above the precipitator is a transition,
the transition guidelines must be followed.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-5
Plenum Protection Option 2: The 1W nozzle must be placed perpendicular, 8-12 in.
The R-102 system uses the 1W nozzle or the 1N nozzle for (203-304 mm) from the face of the filter and angled to
plenum protection. The 1W nozzle is stamped with 1W and the center of the filter. The nozzle tip must be within
the 1N nozzle is stamped with 1N, indicating they are one-flow 2 in. (50 mm) from the perpendicular center line of the
nozzles and must be counted as one flow number each. When filter. See Figure 4-8.
protecting a plenum chamber, the entire chamber must be 12 IN. (305 mm)
protected regardless of filter length. MAXIMUM
4 IN.
(101 mm)
VERTICAL PROTECTION – GENERAL
8 IN. (204 mm)
1W NOZZLE – SINGLE AND “V” BANK PROTECTION MINIMUM
One 1W nozzle will protect 4 linear feet (1.2 m) of plenum. The

maximum distance from the end of the hood to the first and last NOZZLE TIP
nozzle must be no more than 2 ft (0.6 m). After the first nozzle, MUST BE WITHIN
THIS AREA
any additional nozzles must be positioned at a maximum of 4 ft
(1.2 m) apart down the entire length of the plenum. The plenum
width must not exceed 4 ft (1.2 m). (The 1W nozzle can be used
on single or V-bank filter arrangements.) See Figure 4-6. FIGURE 4-8
000200
2 FT (0.6 m)
MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL PROTECTION – OPTION 1
4 FT (1.2 m)
MAXIMUM 1N NOZZLE SINGLE BANK PROTECTION
4 FT (1.2 m) 4 FT (1.2 m)
2 FT (0.6 m)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM One 1N nozzle will protect 10 linear feet (3.0 m) of single filter bank
MAXIMUM plenum. The nozzle(s) must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in.
(50 to 102 mm) from the face of the filter, centered between the
filter height dimension, and aimed down the length. The nozzle
must be positioned 0-6 in. (0-152 mm) from the end of the hood to
the tip of the nozzle. See Figure 4-9.
2 – 4 IN. 10 FT (3.0 m)
(50 – 12 mm) MAXIMUM
FIGURE 4-6
000197
000201
When protecting plenums with the 1W nozzle, two options of

coverage are available:
Option 1: The 1W nozzle must be on the center line of the
single or “V” bank filter and positioned within 1-20 in.
(26-508 mm) above the top edge of the filter. See
000202
Figure 4-7.
FIGURE 4-9
20 IN. (508 mm)
MAXIMUM
1 IN. (26 mm)

MINIMUM
20 IN. (508 mm)

MAXIMUM
1 IN. (26 mm)

MINIMUM
FIGURE 4-7
000199
PAGE 4-6 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Plenum Protection (Continued) For a plenum, either single or “V” bank, with a linear extension
HORIZONTAL PROTECTION – OPTION 2 longer than 10 ft (3.0 m), each bank may be protected using one
1N nozzle every 10 ft (3.0 m) or less depending on the overall
1W NOZZLE – “V” BANK PROTECTION
length of the plenum. See Figure 4-12. The nozzles may point
One 1W nozzle will protect 6 linear feet (1.8 m) of “V” bank in the opposite directions as long as the entire plenum area is
plenum. The nozzle must be mounted horizontally, positioned 1/3 protected, and the 10 ft (3.0 m) limitation is not exceeded. See
the filter height down from the top of the filter. Nozzles can be Figure 4-13. The nozzle positioning shown in Figure 4-14 is not
located at 6 ft (1.8 m) spacings on longer plenums. The nozzle an acceptable method of protection because the plenum area
must be positioned 0-6 in. (0-152 mm) from the end of the hood to directly under the tee is not within the discharge pattern of either
the tip of the nozzle. See Figure 4-10. nozzle.
1W NOZZLE
10 FT (3.0 m)
MAXIMUM
10 FT (3.0 m)
MAXIMUM
1/3 (H)
HEIGHT OF
FILTER (H) 10 FT (3.0 m)
6 FT (1.8 m)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
4 FT
(1.2 m)
MAXIMUM
30 FT (9.1 m)
FIGURE 4-12
000206
10 FT (3.0 m)
MAXIMUM
FIGURE 4-10
006524
10 FT (3.0 m)
TWO 1N NOZZLES – “V” BANK PROTECTION MAXIMUM
Two 1N nozzles will protect 10 linear feet (3.0 m) by 4 ft (1.2 m)

wide of “V” bank plenum. The nozzles must be mounted in the 10 FT (3.0 m)
MAXIMUM
plenum, 2 to 4 in. (50 to 101 mm) from the face of the filter,
centered between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the
length. The nozzle must be positioned 0-6 in. (0-381 mm) from the
end of the hood to the tip of the nozzle. See Figure 4-11.
30 FT (9.1 m)
2 – 4 IN.
(50 – 101 mm)
2 – 4 IN.
(50 – 101
mm)
FIGURE 4-13
000203 000207
4 FT (1.2 m)
MAXIMUM
10 FT (3.0 m)
MAXIMUM
INCORRECT
000204
FIGURE 4-14
000208
FIGURE 4-11
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-7
Appliance Protection
The following pages detail types of appliance protection. Each
design requires several factors: correct nozzle choice, correct
nozzle height above hazard, correct nozzle location and correct
aiming point.
Fryer – Single Nozzle Protection

1. Design requirements for fryers are broken down into two
types.
A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARDS
If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the
internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back)
and length of the frypot.
B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARDS
If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both
the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to
back) and length of the frypot portion, and then measure
the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area
including any dripboard areas.
2. Using Table, “Maximum Cooking Area Dimension – Single
Nozzle Fryer Protection,” determine which nozzle is needed
to protect the fryer based on the maximum dimensions
listed.
A. If the fryer does not include a dripboard, use the
maximum dimensions listed in the first column of the
table to select the correct nozzle.
B. If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, use both the
maximum frypot dimensions in the first column of the
table, and the maximum overall dimensions in the
second column of the table to select the correct nozzle.
None of the maximum dimensions in either column may
be exceeded.
3. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are
exceeded, an additional nozzle(s) will be required. Refer to
the multiple nozzle requirements.
Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside of the frypot
without the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 18 in. in length
(457 mm x 457 mm) and the inside of the overall area includ-
ing the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 24 in. in length
(457 mm x 610 mm). From the Table “Maximum Cooking Area
Dimension – Single Nozzle Fryer Protection,” either the 3N or
the 290 nozzle should be selected to protect the fryer, depend-
ing on the maximum nozzle height above the fryer and the
positioning requirements allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures.
PAGE 4-8 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Fryer – Single Nozzle Protection (Continued)
Maximum Area Dimensions – Single Nozzle Fryer Protection

Max. Size
Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle
Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 230 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure
14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (686 mm to 1193 mm) 4-15 and 4-16
(355 mm x 381 mm) (355 mm x 533 mm)
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 245 20 in. to 27 in. See Figure
14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (508 mm to 685 mm) 4-15 and 4-16
(355 mm x 381 mm) (355 mm x 533 mm)
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 4-17
14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (330 mm to 406 mm)
(355 mm x 381 mm) (355 mm x 533 mm)
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 290 16 in. to 27 in. See Figure 4-17
14 1/2 in. x 14 in. 14 1/2 in. x 26 1/2 in. (406 mm to 685 mm)
(368 mm x 355 mm) (368 mm x 673 mm)
TOP OF FRYER TOP OF FRYER
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
SPLIT VAT
NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING
SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING
SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA.
002280
002283
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-9
Fryer – Single Nozzle Protection (Continued)

Maximum Area Dimensions – Single Nozzle Fryer Protection (Continued)
Max. Size
Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle
14.5 in. x 16.5 in. 14.5 in. x 26.5 in. 290 16 in. to 21 in. See Figure 4-17
(368 mm x 419 mm) (368 mm x 673 mm) (406 to 533 mm)
19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 4-17
(495 mm x 482 mm) (495 mm x 644 mm) (330 to 406 mm)
19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 3N See Figure 4-18 See Figure 4-18
(495 mm x 482 mm) (495 mm x 644 mm)
18 in. x 18 in. 18 in. x 27 3/4 in. 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 4-19
(457 mm x 457 mm) (457 mm x 704 mm) (635 mm to 889 mm)
TOP OF FRYER
FRO
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRO NT
NT
290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZARD AREA ± 3 IN. RIGHT-TO-LEFT 000008
(76 mm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND ± 000010
CENTERLINE
1 IN. (25 mm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD
AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE COOKING AREA. FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
NOTE: 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE SURFACE
FIGURE 4-17 AREA WITHIN THE FRONT HALF OF THE FRY POT AND AIMED AT THE CENTER.
002286
FIGURE 4-19
34 IN. (863 mm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL
DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND
CENTER OF HAZARD AREA
21 in. (534 mm)

MINIMUM
VERTICAL
NOZZLE
HEIGHT
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
3N NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF

COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA.
FIGURE 4-18
002287
PAGE 4-10 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Fryer – Multiple Nozzle Protection A. If the module considered does not include any portion
Design Requirements: of the dripboard, use only the maximum frypot area and
maximum dimension listed in the first column of the
Fryers exceeding the coverage of a single nozzle can be divided
table to select the correct nozzle.
into modules. Each module must not exceed the maximum
area allowed for a single nozzle. However, when utilizing multi- B. If the module considered includes any dripboard areas,
ple nozzle protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer with use both the maximum frypot area and dimension
dripboard can be used, regardless of whether the fryer has a listed in the first column of the table, and the maximum
dripboard or not. overall area and dimensions listed in the second
column of the table to select the correct nozzle.
The maximum size fryer that can be modularized is 864 in.2
3. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be
(55742 mm2).
exceeded. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes
1. Design requirements for multiple nozzle fryers are broken are exceeded, the area divided into modules will need to be
down into two types: redefined with the possibility of an additional nozzle.
A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARD(S)
If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the Options For Modularizing Fryers
internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) The following Figure 4-20 shows approved methods of divid-
and length of the frypot. Then, multiply the depth and ing (modularizing) fryers so that each section can be properly
length to obtain the area of the frypot in square inches. protected.Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside vat
without the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 30 in. in length
B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARD(S)
(457 mm x 762 mm) and the inside of the overall vat includ-
If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure ing the dripboard measures 24 in. in depth x 30 in. in length
both the internal depth and length of the frypot portion, (610 mm x 762 mm). Because the fryer is 30 in. (762 mm) in
and then measure the internal depth and length of the length, it exceeds the coverage of a single nozzle.
overall hazard area including any dripboard areas.
Dividing the length in half, each module now has an overall
Determine the area of both the frypot and the area of
vat dimension of 24 in. in depth x 15 in. in length (610 mm x
the overall vat by multiplying corresponding depth and
381 mm). From the Table, “Maximum Cooking Area Dimension
length dimensions.
– Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection,” either the 3N or the 290
2. Divide the frypot or overall vat into modules, each of which nozzle should be selected to protect each fryer module, depend-
can be protected by a single nozzle, based on the maximum ing on the maximum nozzle height above the fryer and the
dimension and area coverage of the nozzle as specified positioning requirements allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures,
in Table, “Maximum Cooking Area Dimension – Multiple 4-15 through 4-19.
Nozzle Protection.” See additional examples in Appendix Section.
AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE

CANNOT EXCEED 324 IN.2 (20903 mm2)
EACH MODULAR AREA, INCLUDING DRIPBOARD,

MUST NOT EXCEED 497 IN.2 (32064 mm2) AREA OF EACH FRY
POT MODULE
CANNOT EXCEED
324 IN.2
(20903 mm2)
MIDPOINT MIDPOINT
AREA OF THIS
MODULE (FRY
POT PLUS DRIP
BOARD) CANNOT
EXCEED
497 IN.2 002296
DRIP BOARD DRIP BOARD DRIP BOARD (32064 mm2)
EXAMPLE ONLY
000215
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD
000214
EXAMPLE ONLY
EXAMPLE ONLY
FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
FIGURE 4-20
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-11
Fryer – Multiple Nozzle Protection (Continued)

Maximum Area Dimension – Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection
Max. Size Module
Max. Size Module Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle
Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat
21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 230 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure 4-21
(533 mm x 0.14 m2) (533 mm x 0.19 m2) (686 mm to 1194 mm)
(533 mm x 0.14 m2) (533 mm x 0.19 m2) (508 mm to 686 mm)
(533 mm x 0.14 m2) (533 mm x 0.19 m2) (330 mm to 406 mm)
25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 4-22
(644 mm x 0.24 m2) (644 mm x 0.32 m2) (330 mm to 406 mm)
26 1/2 in. x 203 in.2 26 1/2 in. x 384 1/4 in.2 290 16 in. to 27 in. See Figure 4-22
(673 mm x 0.13 m2) (673 mm x 0.25 m2) (406 mm to 686 mm)
25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 3N See Figure 4-23 See Figure 4-23
(644 mm x 0.24 m2) (644 mm x 0.32 m2)
27 3/4 x 324 in.2 27 3/4 x 497 in2 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 4-24
(704 mm x 0.21 m2) (704 mm x 0.32 m2) (635 mm to 889 mm)
34 IN. (864 mm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL

DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE
AND CENTER OF
HAZARD AREA
21 in. (533 mm)

MINIMUM
VERTICAL
NOZZLE
HEIGHT
002291
000218 000213 FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD

3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD OF THE MODULAR IT IS PROTECTING AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT
RESPECTIVE MODULE AREA.
POSITION NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE
MODULE IT IS PROTECTING AND AIM AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT MODULAR AREA. FIGURE 4-23
FIGURE 4-21
AIM POINT
(DIAGONAL
AIM POINT (DIAGONAL CENTER OF
CENTER OF MODULE MODULE
COOKING AREA) COOKING
AREA)
RIGHT-TO-LEFT RIGHT-
CENTERLINE TO-LEFT
CENTER-
LINE
002290
002293
FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD
290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR THE 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE
AREA ± 3 IN. (76 mm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE PERIMETER AND FORWARD OF THE RIGHT-TO-LEFT CENTERLINE OF THE COOKING
MODULE AND ± 1 IN. (25 mm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF AREA. THE AIMING POINT OF THE NOZZLE MUST BE AT THE DIAGONAL CENTER OF
THE MODULE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE MODULE. THE MODULAR COOKING AREA.
PAGE 4-12 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection – Tilt Skillet / Braising Pan

Protection for tilt skillets or braising pans is to be based upon the
coverage limitations provided for deep fat fryer protection. Refer COVER MUST NOT
INTERFERE WITH EDGE
to Section IV, DESIGN, starting on Page 4-10, for maximum fryer OF DISCHARGE PATTERN
nozzle coverages and maximum fryer nozzle height limitations.
Although the maximum 864 in.2 (55741 mm2) total surface
cooking area requirement applies to fryer protection, it does not FOR MINIMUM
AND MAXIMUM
apply to tilt skillets or braising pans. NOZZLE
HEIGHTS, REFER
Each tilt skillet/braising pan protected module must not exceed TO FRYER
NOZZLE
the fryer limitations for “MAXIMUM SIZE MODULE OVERALL PARAMETERS
WITH DRIPBOARD” coverage per nozzle as described in Table
on Page 4-11.
Tilt skillets and braising pans generally utilize a hinged cover.
Fryer protection nozzles are to be placed toward the front of the 000071
appliance to minimize the potential for the tilt skillet or braising

pan cover to interfere with the nozzle discharge. See Figures
4-25 and 4-26.
FRYER NOZZLE USED FOR TILT SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN PROTECTION MUST BE
POSITIONED NEAR THE FRONT EDGE OF THE PAN AND AIMED AT THE FRONT TO BACK
COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE CENTERLINE OF THE PAN. THE DISCHARGE FROM THE NOZZLE(S) MUST COMPLETELY
WITH NOZZLE DISCHARGE CLEAR THE PAN COVER WITH AN UNOBSTRUCTED VIEW TO THE BACK OF THE PAN.
FIGURE 4-26
000011
THE NOZZLE IS TO BE PLACED TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE APPLIANCE TO MINIMIZE

THE POTENTIAL FOR THE SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN COVER TO INTERFERE WITH
THE NOZZLE DISCHARGE.
FIGURE 4-25
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-13
Range Protection
The R-102 system uses five different nozzles for the protection
of ranges. Two of the design options require a one-flow nozzle 10 IN.
and three of the design options require two-flow nozzles. (254 mm)
MAXIMUM
NOTICE 32 IN.
(812 mm)
A 13 in. (330 mm) diameter wok pan is the 1N
MAXIMUM
largest wok size that can be protected on NOZZLE
ranges.
AIMING POINT
When protecting hot top ranges, the entire
cooking surface must be protected.
10 IN.
(254 mm)
MAXIMUM
Range Protection 1N (1-Flow) Nozzle – High Proximity 006540
Application FIGURE 4-28
No Obstructions
Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a 1N
nozzle. The nozzle is stamped with 1N, indicating that this is a
one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number.
When using this nozzle for range protection, the maximum
length of the burner grates being protected with a single nozzle
must not exceed 32 in. (812 mm) and the maximum area of the
burner grates must not exceed 384 in.2 (24774 mm2) per nozzle.
When protecting a range, the 1N nozzle must be located a
maximum of 10 in. (254 mm) from each burner grate centerline
and must be aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See
Figures 4-27 and 4-28.
40 IN.
(1016 mm)
30 IN.
(762 mm)
006539
FIGURE 4-27
PAGE 4-14 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Range Protection 245 (2-Flow) Nozzle – High Proximity

Application
COOKING
No Obstructions AREA
40 in. to 50 in. (1016 mm to 1270 mm) above the cooking

surface.
This high proximity application uses the 245 nozzle.
COOKING
The nozzle is stamped with 245 indicating this is a two-flow 245 NOZZLE TIP
AREA
LOCATION CENTER OF
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. COOKING SURFACE
One 245 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 672 in.2

OR
11 3/8 IN. (288 mm)
(43354 mm2) with a maximum longest dimension of 28 in. MAXIMUM FROM
CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE
(711 mm). TO CENTER OF ANY
BURNER GRATE
When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must
be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures
4-29 and 4-30. COOKING
AREA
245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION

CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE
245 NOZZLE TIP COOKING

LOCATION CENTER OF AREA
COOKING SURFACE
OR
50 IN. 11 3/8 IN. (288 mm)
(1270 mm) MAXIMUM FROM
MAXIMUM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE
HEIGHT 000766
TO CENTER OF ANY
OF 245 BURNER GRATE
NOZZLE FIGURE 4-30
TIP
40 IN.
(1016 mm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 245
NOZZLE
TIP
000236
FIGURE 4-29
NOTICE
Four burner grates shown in Figure 4-30. For
single or double burner grates, locate nozzle
at center of cooking surface or 11 3/8 in.
(288 mm) maximum from nozzle centerline to
center of any burner grate.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-15
Range Protection 260 (2-Flow) Nozzle – Medium Proximity COOKING

Application AREA
No Obstructions
30 in. to 40 in. (762 mm to 1016 mm) above the cooking surface.
The medium proximity application uses the 260 nozzle.
COOKING
The nozzle is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two-flow AREA
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. 260 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTER
ne 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 768 in.2
O OF COOKING
(49548 mm2) with a maximum dimension of 32 in. (812 mm). SURFACE
OR
When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must 10 IN. (254 mm)
MAXIMUM FROM
be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures CENTERLINE
OF NOZZLE TO
4-31 and 4-32. CENTER OF ANY COOKING
BURNER GRATE AREA
260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION
CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE
260 NOZZLE TIP

LOCATION CENTER
OF COOKING COOKING
SURFACE AREA
OR
40 IN. 10 IN. (254 mm)
(1016 mm) MAXIMUM FROM
MAXIMUM CENTERLINE
HEIGHT OF NOZZLE TO
OF 260 CENTER OF ANY
NOZZLE BURNER GRATE
TIP
FIGURE 4-32
30 IN. 000766
(762 mm)
NOTICE
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 260
NOZZLE
TIP
Four burner grates shown in Figure 4-32. For
single or double burner grates, locate nozzle
at center of cooking surface.
000236
FIGURE 4-31
PAGE 4-16 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Range Protection 1N (1-Flow) Nozzle – Low Proximity Range Protection Two 290 (2-Flow) Nozzles – Low
Application Proximity Application
15 in. to 20 in. (381 mm to 508 m) above the cooking surface. 15 in. to 20 in. (381 mm to 508 mm) above the cooking surface.
The low proximity 1-flow nozzle application for the protection of The low proximity 2-flow application requires the use of two 290
ranges requires the 1N nozzle. nozzles.
The nozzle is stamped with 1N indicating that it is a one-flow Both nozzles are stamped with 290 indicating they are two flow
nozzle and must be counted as one flow number, nozzles and must be counted together for a total of four flow
When using the 1N nozzle for low proximity range protection numbers.
with or without obstruction, the maximum length of the burner Two 290 nozzles will protect a cooking area of 1008 in.2
grates being protected must not be exceed 24 in. (609 mm) (65032 mm2) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (914 mm).
length, aimed along a centerline to a point 20 in. (508 mm) from hen using two of these nozzles for low proximity range protec-
W
the end of the length, protecting a maximum width of 18 in. (457 tion, the nozzles must be positioned along the cooking surface
mm). perimeter to 1.5 in. (38 mm) inside the perimeter, and aimed at
When protecting a range, the 1N nozzle must be located a a 45° angle along the longitudinal centerline of the range. See
maximum of 9 in. (228 mm) from each burner grate centerline Figures 4-35 and 4-36.
and must be positioned above the edge of the hazard area to be
290 NOZZLE TIP
protected. LOCATION 0 – 1.5 IN.
(0 – 38 mm)
The 1N nozzle tip must be positioned at or below the obstruc- IN FROM EDGE OF
45°
tion, if present. The protected area begins at the point straight COOKING SURFACE 45°
down from the nozzle tip. The nozzle can be placed at the side
of the range aimed either left or right, or can be placed in the
front or back of the range. See Figures 4-33 and 4-34 for nozzle 15 IN. TO 20 IN. 15 IN. TO 20 IN.
(381 to 508 mm) (381 to 508 mm)
location details. MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
002276
FIGURE 4-35
COOKING LONGITUDINAL
15 – 20 IN. AIM
(381 – 508 mm) AREA CENTERLINE
POINT
20 IN.
(508 mm)
COOKING
AREA
007924
FIGURE 4-33
000239
PROTECTED AREA 290 NOZZLE TIP

LOCATION CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION ± 2 IN. (50 mm)
9 IN. 0 – 1.5 IN. (38 mm) IN FROM EDGE
(228 mm) OF COOKING SURFACE
18 IN.
(457 mm) COOKING
AREA
000240
007925
COOKING
AREA
AIM POINT
20 IN.
(508 mm)
24 IN.
(609 mm)
FIGURE 4-34
290 NOZZLE TIP
LOCATION CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE
290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION ± 2 IN. (50 mm)
0 – 1.5 IN. (38 mm) IN FROM EDGE
OF COOKING SURFACE
FIGURE 4-36
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-17
Range Protection (With or Without Back Shelf/Obstruction) Range Protection 260 (2-Flow) Nozzle (With or Without
When this type of hazard is equipped with a back shelf or other Back Shelf/Obstruction)
similarly sized obstruction located above the range top, two Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a 260
protection options are available: One requires a 1F nozzle and nozzle. The nozzle is stamped with 260 indicating that it is a
the other option requires a 260 nozzle. two-flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
When using the 260 nozzle for range protection with or without
Range Protection 1F (1-Flow) Nozzle (With or Without Back
back shelf or other similarly sized obstruction, the maximum
Shelf/Obstruction)
length of burner grates being protected must not exceed 32 in.
Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a (812 mm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must
1F nozzle. The nozzle is stamped with 1F indicating that it is a not exceed 384 in.2 (24774 mm2). Nozzle must be located on
one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. the front edge of the burner grates and aimed at a point 10 in.
When using the 1F nozzle for range protection with or without back (254 mm) from the back edge of the burner grates. Nozzle must
shelf or other similarly sized obstruction, the maximum length of be mounted 30 to 40 in. (762 to 1016 mm) above the hazard
the burner grates being protected must not exceed 28 in. (711 surface. See Figure 4-38.
mm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed
336 in.2 (21677 mm2). See Figure 4-37 for nozzle location details. 260 NOZZLE
1F NOZZLE OBSTRUCTION CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S)
OBSTRUCTION CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S)
18 IN.
(457 mm)
30 - 40 IN. MINIMUM
20 IN.
(762 - 1016 mm)
AIM (508 mm)
40 - 48 IN. POINT MINIMUM
(1016 - 1219 mm)
10 IN.
(254 mm)
FROM BACK
14 IN. OF BURNER
(355 mm) GRATES
14 IN. MAXIMUM
12 IN.
(304 mm) (355 mm)
FRONT TO REAR MAXIMUM
FIGURE 4-38
MAXIMUM 000238a
CENTERLINE
1F NOZZLE LOCATED OVER FRONT EDGE OF BURNER GRATE AND ORIENTED
SO NOZZLE TIP FLATS ARE PARALLEL WITH BURNER GRATE FRONT TO REAR
CENTERLINE AND SHALL BE AIMED AT THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 4-37
000238
PAGE 4-18 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Griddle Protection 1N (1-Flow) Nozzle – High Proximity Griddle Protection 290 (2-Flow) Nozzle – High Proximity
Application Application
The R-102 system uses four different nozzles for the protection Option 1 – Nozzle Center Located
of griddles. One of the applications requires a 1-flow nozzle and 30 in. to 50 in. (762 mm to 1270 mm) above the cooking surface.
three of the applications require a 2-flow nozzle.
This high proximity application uses the 290 nozzle.
High Proximity Application: 35 in. to 40 in. (889 to 1016 mm)
above the cooking surface. The nozzle is stamped with 290 indicating this is a 2-flow nozzle
and must be counted as two flow numbers.
This high proximity application uses the 1N nozzle.
ne 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 720 in.2
O
The nozzle is stamped with 1N indicating this is a one-flow (46451 mm2) with a maximum dimension of 30 in. (762 mm).
nozzle and must be counted as one flow number.
hen using this nozzle for high proximity applications, the
W
One 1N nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1080 in.2 nozzle must be positioned within 1 in. (25 mm) of the center
(69677 mm2) with the maximum longest side of 36 in. (914 mm). of the cooking surface and pointed vertically down. See Figure
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be 4-41 and 4-42.
positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to a maximum of CENTER LINE OF GRIDDLE
2 in. (50 mm) inside the perimeter, and aimed to the midpoint of SURFACE ± 1 IN. (25 mm) IN
ANY DIRECTION
the cooking surface. See Figure 4-39 and 4-40.
NOTICE 50 IN.
(1270 mm)
When using this type of griddle protection, MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
only five flow numbers are allowed on a 1.5 OF 290
gal (5.7 L) system and only 11 flow numbers NOZZLE TIP
are allowed on a 3 gal (11.4 L) system. 30 IN.

(762 mm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 290
NOZZLE
TIP
MIDPOINT OF
COOKING SURFACE
FIGURE 4-41
000244
1N NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING

ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN SURFACE
COOKING
0 – 2 IN. (0 – 50 mm) OF COOKING EDGE
AREA
SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE
AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING NOZZLE 1 IN. (25 mm)
SURFACE. LOCATION MAXIMUM
FIGURE 4-39
000241
NOZZLE LOCATION
0 – 2 IN. (0 – 50 mm)
INSIDE PERIMETER 40 IN.
OF COOKING SURFACE (1016 mm) COOKING
MAXIMUM AREA
HEIGHT
OF 1N
NOZZLE TIP
1 IN. (25 mm)
35 IN. (889 mm) MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
HEIGHT
EDGE OF 1N
OF NOZZLE TIP CENTER OF GRIDDLE SURFACE OR A
COOKING MAXIMUM DIMENSION OF 20.6 IN.
SURFACE (523 mm) FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE TO
FURTHEST CORNER OF GRIDDLE
FIGURE 4-42
000773
FIGURE 4-40
000243
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-19
Griddle Protection 260 (2-Flow) Nozzle – High Proximity Griddle Protection 290 (2-Flow) Nozzle – Medium Proximity
Option 2 – Nozzle Perimeter Located Option 2a – Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued)
30 in. to 50 in. (762 mm to 1270 mm) above the cooking surface. 20 in. to 30 in. (508 mm to 762 mm) above the cooking surface.
This high proximity application uses the 260 nozzle. The medium proximity application uses the 290 nozzle.
The nozzle is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two-flow The nozzle is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two-flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 260 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 in.2 One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 in.2
(92903 mm2) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (1219 mm). (92903 mm2) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (1219 mm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must hen using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must
W
be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to 2 in. be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (50 mm) inside
(50 mm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See
surface. See Figure 4-43 and 4-44. Figure 4-45 and 4-46.
COOKING AREA
NOZZLE LOCATION
0 – 2 IN. (0 – 50 mm)
OF COOKING SURFACE (1270 mm)
MAXIMUM CENTER OF
HEIGHT COOKING SURFACE
OF 260
NOZZLE TIP COOKING
AREA
30 IN. (762 mm)
MINIMUM
HEIGHT AIM POINT
EDGE OF 260
OF NOZZLE TIP
COOKING
SURFACE
000243
290 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0 – 2 IN. (0 – 50 mm) OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE
MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF
FIGURE 4-43 COOKING SURFACE.
000243 FIGURE 4-45
000241
COOKING AREA
NOZZLE LOCATION
0 – 2 IN. (0 – 51 mm)
MIDPOINT OF INSIDE PERIMETER 30 IN.
COOKING SURFACE OF COOKING SURFACE (762 mm)
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
COOKING
OF 290
AREA
AIM POINT NOZZLE TIP
20 IN. (508 mm)

MINIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 290
NOZZLE TIP
260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE

ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE
WITHIN 0 – 2 IN. (0 – 51 mm) OF EDGE OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE COOKING
MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF SURFACE
COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 4-44
000241
FIGURE 4-46
000243
PAGE 4-20 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Griddle Protection 2120 (2-Flow) Nozzle – Low Proximity Griddle Protection 2W (2-Flow) Nozzle – Low Proximity
Option 2b – Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued)
Option 2c – Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued)
The low proximity application uses the 2120 nozzle.
The low proximity application uses the 2W nozzle.
The nozzle is stamped with 2120 indicating this is a two-flow
The nozzle is stamped with 2W indicating this is a two-flow
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
One 2120 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440
One 2W nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1080 in.2
in.2 (92903 mm2) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (1219 mm).
(69677 mm2) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (914 mm).
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must
When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be
be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (50 mm) inside perim-
positioned 0-10 in. (0-254 mm) forward or behind the right to left
eter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure
centerline of the hazard area. See the diagram below for nozzle
4-47 and 4-48.
location and aiming.
NOZZLE LOCATION OVERHEAD VIEW

0 – 2 IN. (0 – 51 mm)
OF COOKING SURFACE (508 mm) 36 IN. (914 mm) MAX.
MAXIMUM
HEIGHT
OF 2120
NOZZLE TIP
2W NOZZLE AIM POINT
10 IN. (254 mm) 0-3 IN. (0-76 mm) TO REAR OF
COOKING SURFACE CENTER
MINIMUM 0 - 10 IN. LINE WHEN 2W NOZZLE IS
HEIGHT (0 - 254 mm) FROM
CENTERLINE MAX. POSITIONED AT OR TO THE
OF 2120 REAR OF CENTER LINE
NOZZLE TIP 30 IN.
CL (762 mm)
2W NOZZLE AIM POINT MAX.
0 - 10 IN. 0-3 IN. (0-76 mm) FORWARD
000243 (0 - 254 mm) FROM OF COOKING SURFACE
CENTERLINE MAX. CENTER LINE WHEN 2W
NOZZLE IS POSITIONED AT
OR FORWARD OF COOKING
SURFACE CENTER LINE
EDGE OF
COOKING SURFACE 008149
FIGURE 4-47
000243 AIM POINT 9 IN. (228 mm)
FROM EITHER SIDE OF
COOKING AREA COOKING SURFACE
FIGURE 4-49
FRONT VIEW
CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE 0 - 3 IN. (76 mm)
NOTE: A 2W NOZZLE CAN PROTECT A
COOKING GRIDDLE WITH A MAXIMUM COOKING
SURFACE OF 30 IN X 36 IN. (762 mm X
AREA 914 mm), AT A HEIGHT OF 10 - 20 IN. (254
- 508 mm).
AIM POINT 20 IN. THE 2W NOZZLE CAN BE POSITIONED
(508 mm) A MAXIMUM OF ± 10 IN. (254 mm)
MAX. FORWARD OR BEHIND COOKING
SURFACE CENTER LINE AND A
MAXIMUM OF 3 IN. (76 mm) AWAY
10 IN. FROM EITHER SIDE OF THE COOKING
(254 mm) SURFACE, AIMED IN 9 IN. (228 mm) TO
2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE MIN. A POINT 0 - 3 IN. (0 - 76 mm). FORWARD
OR TO THE REAR OF THE COOKING
ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE SURFACE CENTER LINE.
WITHIN 0 – 2 IN. (0 – 51 mm) OF
COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE
MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF
COOKING SURFACE.
FIGURE 4-48
000241 AIM POINT 9 IN.
(228 mm) FROM
EITHER SIDE OF
COOKING SURFACE
008150
FIGURE 4-50
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-21
Griddle Protection 1W (1-Flow) Nozzle – Low Proximity Chain Broiler Protection

Application The following listed protection guidelines can be applied to any
15 in. to 20 in. (381 mm to 508 mm) above the cooking surface. manufacturer’s chain broilers, if the chain broiler meets the
The low proximity 1-flow nozzle application for the protection of specified parameters. Chain broilers utilizing catalytic converters
griddles requires the 1W nozzle. can be protected from overhead using model specific protec-
tion identified in the “Specific Application by Model” section in
The nozzle is stamped with 1W indicating that this is a one-flow System Design. Or, they can be protected with standard 1N
nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. nozzle horizontal chain broiler protection with the nozzles posi-
When using the 1W nozzle for low proximity griddle protection tioned at either end of the chain broiler openings. Refer to the
with our without obstruction, the maximum length of the cooking “Horizontal Chain Broiler Protection” section for specific design
surface to be protected must not exceed 26 in. (660 mm). The information.
nozzle must be centered at one end of the maximum 26 in.
(660 mm) length, aimed along a centerline to a point 20 in. (508 Horizontal Chain Broiler Protection
mm) from the end of the length, protecting a maximum width of The R-102 system can use two 1N nozzles for horizontal chain
20.5 in. (520 mm). broiler protection. The nozzle is stamped 1N, indicating that
The 1W nozzle tip must be positioned at or below the obstruc- this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow
tion, if present. The protected area begins at the point straight number (total of two flow numbers for each chain broiler being
down from the nozzle tip. The nozzle can be positioned above protected).
the edge of the hazard area to be protected. See Figure 4-51 Two 1N nozzles are always needed for chain broiler protec-
and 4-52. tion when the hazard area to be protected does not meet the
Note: If the hazard area exceeds the single nozzle coverage “Overhead Broiler Protection” requirements. The maximum
listed above, additional nozzles will be required. The additional internal size of the broiler is 43 x 31 in. (1092 mm x 787 mm).
nozzle can be positioned in front at high proximity or at the side The nozzles must be positioned at each end of the enclosed
at low proximity. cooking chamber 1 to 3 in. (25 mm to 76 mm) above the surface
of the chain and a maximum distance of 4 in. (101 mm) away
from the broiler opening. The nozzles may be mounted at either
corner as long as they are at opposite ends of the chain broiler
and positioned to discharge diagonally across the top of the
chain. See Figure 4-53 and 4-54.
15 – 20 IN. AIM
(381 – 508 mm) POINT
20 IN.
(508 mm)
007924
FIGURE 4-51 000245
PROTECTED AREA
1 – 3 IN.
20.5 IN. (25 – 76 mm)
(520 mm)
007926
000246
AIM POINT
20 IN. FIGURE 4-53
(508 mm)
26 IN.
(660 mm)
FIGURE 4-52
PAGE 4-22 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Horizontal Chain Broiler Protection (Continued)

The nozzles may vary in position as long as they are evenly
spaced from the exhaust center and are always 180° opposite
of each other. If the opening is not square, the nozzles must be
positioned along the centerline, parallel to the longest side of the
opening. See Figure 4-56.
MAXIMUM INTERNAL
BROILER SIZE 43 X 31 IN.
(1092 X 787 mm)
FIGURE 4-54
000247
Overhead Chain Broiler Protection

The R-102 system can use two 1W nozzles for overhead chain
broiler protection. The nozzle is stamped with 1W, indicating
that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow FIGURE 4-56
number. 000249
Overhead protection is only available for chain broilers with Note: The Metal Blow-off Cap must be used when utilizing
exhaust opening dimensions that are not less than 60% of the chain broiler protection.
internal broiler length and not less than 60% of the internal Example No. 1 – Internal broiler size is 24 in. long x 20 in. wide
broiler width, to a minimum size of 12 in. x 12 in. (305 mm x (609 mm x 508 mm), with an opening of 16 in. x 16 in.
305 mm). Internal broiler size can not be larger than 32 in. x (406 mm x 406 mm).
34 in. (812 mm x 863 mm).
To determine minimum opening size, multiply the internal
When overhead protection is used, the nozzles must be length and the internal width by 0.6:
centered above the exhaust opening within 4 to 8 in. (101 to 203
mm) of each other and they must be located 10 to 26 in. (254 to Length of opening – 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in.
660 mm) above the top of the broiler surface. See Figure 4-55. (609 mm x 0.6 = 366 mm)
Width of opening – 20 in. x 0.6 = 12.0 in.
4-8 IN. (101-203 mm) (508 mm x 0.6 = 304 mm)
The minimum allowable opening for overhead protection
10-26 IN.
would be 14.4 in. x 12.0 in. (365 mm x 304 mm).
(254-660 mm)
This example would be acceptable for overhead protec-
tion.
Example No. 2 – Internal broiler size is 30 in. long x 24 in.
12 IN. (305 mm)
wide (762 x 609 mm) with an opening of 22 in. x 12 in.
MINIMUM (558 x 304 mm).
12 IN. (305 mm)
MINIMUM To determine minimum opening size, multiply internal
length and internal width by 0.6:
MAXIMUM INTERNAL
Length of opening – 30 in. x 0.6 = 18.0 in.
BROILER SIZE (762 mm x 0.6 = 457 mm)
32 X 34 IN.
(812 x 863 mm) Width of opening – 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in.
(609 mm x 0.6 = 365 mm)
FIGURE 4-55
000248 Minimum allowable opening for overhead protection
would be 18 in. x 14.4 in. (457 mm x 365 mm).
Because this broiler has an opening of 22 in. x 12 in.
(558 mm x 304 mm), the 12 in. (304 mm) width is below
the minimum allowable calculated dimension of 14.4 in.
(365 mm) and therefore would not be acceptable for
overhead protection.
Salamander Broiler Protection

The R-102 system uses three different nozzle locations for
salamander broiler protection. All of the design options require
a one-flow nozzle.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-23
Salamander Broiler Protection – 1N (1-Flow) Nozzle Salamander Broiler Protection – 1N (1-Flow) Nozzle Local
Overhead Note: The use of the Agent Distribution Hose should be consid-
A salamander broiler with a maximum hazard area (internal ered when protecting a salamander broiler/range combination
broiler chamber) of 16 in. (406 mm) deep x 29 in. (736 mm) wide appliance that employs casters.
can be protected using a 1N nozzle. The nozzle is stamped with A salamander broiler with a maximum hazard area (internal
1N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle. broiler chamber) of 15 in. (381 mm) deep x 31 in. (787 mm) wide
The single 1N nozzle must be located directly in line with either can be protected using a 1N nozzle. The nozzle is stamped with
vertical edge of the broiler opening, 6 in. (152 mm) to 12 in. (304 1N, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle.
mm) in front of the broiler, and 0 in. to 12 in. (304 mm) above the The single 1N nozzle must be affixed to the side of the cooking
top of the broiler. The nozzle must be aimed at the center of the chamber, above the grate on either vertical edge of the broiler
broiler opening. See Figure 4-57a. opening. The nozzle must be aimed at the center of the grates.
VERTICAL EDGE See Figure 4-57c.
OF BROILER
OPENING
1N NOZZLE
(PART NO. 419335)
NOZZLE
12 IN. LOCATION ZONE
(304 mm)
6 IN. (152 mm)
6 IN.
(152 mm)
AIM AT CENTER
AIM AT CENTER OF OF BROILER
BROILER OPENING OPENING
FIGURE 4-57a 1N NOZZLE AIMED

008426
AT CENTER OF
GRATES
Salamander Broiler Protection – 1F (1-Flow) Nozzle
FIGURE 4-57c
Overhead 008428
A salamander broiler with a maximum hazard area (internal

broiler chamber) of 15.5 in. (393 mm) deep x 31 in. (787 mm)
Upright Broiler/Salamander Protection
wide can be protected using a 1F nozzle. The nozzle is stamped
with 1F, indicating that this is a one-flow nozzle. The R-102 system uses two 1/2N Nozzles for all upright broiler
protection. The nozzle is stamped 1/2N, indicating that this is
The single 1F nozzle must be located directly in line with the
a half-flow nozzle. A pair of these nozzles will equal one flow
center of the broiler opening, 8 in. (203 mm) to 12 in. (304 mm)
number.
in front of the broiler and 12 in. (304 mm) to 18 in. (457 mm)
above the top of the broiler. The nozzle must be aimed at the Two 1/2N nozzles will protect a maximum hazard area (internal
center of the top broiler opening when the grate is located in the broiler chamber) of 30 in. x 32.5 in. (761 mm x 825 mm). These
middle position. The nozzle must be orientated so the nozzle nozzles must always be used in pairs on an upright broiler. One
tip flats are parallel with the grate left to right centerline. See nozzle must be positioned above the grate and pointed at the
Figure 4-57b. back opposite corner of the broiler chamber. The second nozzle
must be pointed down into the center of the drip pan through the
NOZZLE
1F NOZZLE
6 IN. LOCATION ZONE open slot. See Figure 4-58.
(PART NO.
(152 mm)
419333) 8 IN. (203 mm)
4 IN. 12 IN.
(101 mm) (304 mm)
AIM AT CENTER OF THE AIM AT CENTER OF THE TOP

TOP BROILER OPENING BROILER OPENING WHEN THE
WHEN THE GRATE GRATE IS LOCATED IN THE
IS LOCATED IN THE MIDDLE POSITIONAIM AT CENTER
MIDDLE POSITION OF BROILER OPENING
FIGURE 4-57b
008426
PAGE 4-24 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Upright Broiler/Salamander Protection (Continued) Electric Char-Broiler Protection (Optional)

The R-102 system uses the 1N nozzle for electric char-broiler
UPRIGHT BROILER BROILER CHAMBER protection.
The nozzle is stamped with a 1N, indicating that this is a
One 1N nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length of
34 in. (863 mm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed
680 in.² (43870 mm²). The nozzle tip must be located 20 in. to
50 in. (508 mm to 1270 mm) above the hazard surface. When
using this nozzle for electric char-broiler protection, the nozzle
must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of
DRIP
PAN the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at the center of
the cooking surface. See Figure 4-59b.
COOKING
FRONT SIDE VIEW AREA
VIEW
FIGURE 4-58 COOKING

000252
AREA
000256
Gas-Radiant/Electric Char-Broiler Protection

The R-102 system uses the 1N nozzle for gas-radiant/electric
char-broiler protection.
50 IN.
The nozzle is stamped with a 1N, indicating that this is a (1270 mm)
MAXIMUM
One 1N nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length of
20 IN. (508 mm)
36 in. (914 mm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed MINIMUM
864 in.2 (55741 mm2). The nozzle tip must be located 15 in. to
40 in. (381 mm to 1016 mm) above the hazard surface. When 000257
using this nozzle for gas-radiant/electric char-broiler protection,
the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the
perimeter of the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at FIGURE 4-59b
the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 4-59a.
COOKING
AREA
COOKING
AREA
000256
40 IN.
(1016 mm)
MAXIMUM
15 IN. (381 mm)

MINIMUM
000257
FIGURE 4-59a
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-25
Lava Rock (Ceramic) Char-Broiler Protection Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection

The R-102 system uses the 1N nozzle for all lava rock char- The R-102 system uses the 1N nozzle for all natural charcoal
broiler protection. The nozzle is stamped with 1N, indicating broiler protection. The nozzle is stamped with 1N indicating
that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow that this is a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow
number. number.
One 1N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum One 1N nozzle will protect a hazard area which has a maximum
length of 24 in. (609 mm) and a total cooking area which does length of 24 in. (610 mm) and a total cooking area which does
not exceed 312 in.2 (20128 mm2). The nozzle tip must be not exceed 288 in.2 (18580 mm2). The nozzle tip must be
located 18 in. to 35 in. (457 mm to 889 mm) above the hazard located 18 in. to 40 in. (457 mm to 1016 mm) above the hazard
surface. When using this nozzle for lava rock (ceramic) char- surface. When using this nozzle for natural charcoal broiler
broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or
or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and angled within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and aimed at
to the center. See Figure 4-60. the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 4-61.
COOKING The coverage of such appliances only applies when the depth of
AREA COOKING
AREA the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (101 mm).
COOKING
COOKING
AREA
AREA
000258
000260
35 IN.
(889 mm)
MAXIMUM
40 IN.
(1016 mm)
MAXIMUM
18 IN.
(457 mm)
MINIMUM
4 IN. (101 mm) 18 IN.

MAXIMUM (457 mm)
000259
DEPTH MINIMUM
000259
FIGURE 4-60
FIGURE 4-61
PAGE 4-26 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char-broiler Protection Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Protection

The R-102 system may also use the 3N nozzle for all ceramic The R-102 system uses the 3N nozzle for mesquite char-broiler
(lava rock) and natural charcoal char-broiler protection. The protection. The nozzle is stamped with 3N indicating that this is
nozzle is stamped with 3N, indicating that this is a three-flow a three-flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers.
nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers. One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum
One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 30 in. (762 mm) and a total cooking area which does
length of 30 in. (762 mm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 720 in.2 (46451 mm2). The nozzle tip must be
not exceed 720 in.2 (46451 mm2). The nozzle tip must be located 14 in. to 40 in. (355 mm to 1016 mm) above the hazard
located 14 in. to 40 in. (355 mm to 1016 mm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or
surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and aimed at
within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and angled the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 4-63.
to the center. See Figure 4-62. Mesquite logs and pieces, no larger than 4 in. (102 mm) in diam-
For natural charcoal char-boiler protection, this coverage only eter, may be protected with a maximum allowable wood depth
applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. of 6 in. (152 mm).
(101 mm).
COOKING
AREA COOKING
COOKING COOKING AREA
AREA AREA
000260
000260
40 IN.
(1016 mm)
40 IN. MAXIMUM
(1016 mm)
MAXIMUM
6 IN. (125 mm) 14 IN.

MAXIMUM (355 mm)
4 IN. (101 mm) 14 IN. DEPTH MINIMUM
MAXIMUM (355 mm)
DEPTH MINIMUM
000259
000259
FIGURE 4-63
FIGURE 4-62
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-27
Wok Protection 2. A 1N nozzle will protect a wok 11 in. (279 mm) minimum
The R-102 system uses two different nozzles for the protection diameter up to 24 in. (609 mm) maximum diameter. The wok
of woks. depth must be no less than 3 in. (76 mm) and no greater
than 6 in. (152 mm). The nozzle is stamped with 1N indi-
1. A 260 nozzle will protect a wok 14 in. (355 mm) minimum cating that this a one-flow nozzle and must be counted as
diameter up to 30 in. (762 mm) maximum diameter. The wok one flow number. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must
depth must be no less than 3.75 in. (95 mm) and no greater be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the
than 8 in. (203 mm). wok, aimed at the center, 30 in. to 40 in. (762 mm to 1016
The nozzle is stamped with 260 indicating that this is a mm) above the hazard surface, as shown in Figure 4-65.
two-flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers.
NOTICE
When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as
shown in Figure 4-64. When using this type of wok protection,
only five flow numbers are allowed on a
NOZZLE MUST BE POSITIONED WITHIN 1 IN. (25 mm) RADIUS 1.5 gal (5.7 L) system, and only eleven
OF THE CENTER OF THE WOK, POINTED VERTICALLY DOWN
flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gal (11.4
L) system.
40 IN.
(1016 mm)
260 NOZZLE
30 IN.
(762
mm)
35 – 45 IN. MINIMUM DEPTH
(889 – 1143 mm) 3.0 IN. (76 mm)
MAXIMUM DEPTH
MINIMUM DEPTH 3.75 IN. (95 mm)
6.0 IN. (152 mm)
MAXIMUM DEPTH 8 IN. (203 mm)
11 IN. (279 mm) MINIMUM DIAMETER
24 IN. (609 mm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER
FIGURE 4-65
000261
14 IN. (355 mm) MINIMUM DIAMETER
30 IN. (762 mm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER
FIGURE 4-64
000261
PAGE 4-28 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Nozzle Application Chart

NOTICE
The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating
the quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct, This chart is for general reference only. See
plenum, or appliance. complete details for each type of hazard.
Minimum Nozzle
Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping –
Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part No. Flow No.
Duct or Transition Length – Unlimited 1 – 439839 1W
(Single Nozzle) Perimeter – 50 in. (1270 mm)
Diameter – 16 in. (406 mm)
(Single Nozzle) Perimeter – 100 in. (2540 mm)
Diameter – 31 7/8 in. (809 mm)
(Dual Nozzle) Perimeter – 150 in. (3810 mm)
Diameter – 48 in. (1219 mm)
Electrostatic Precipitator Individual Cell 1 – 439837 1/2N
(At Base of Duct)
Plenum Length – 10 ft (3.0 m) 1 – 439838 1N
(Horizontal Protection)
Plenum Length – 6 ft (1.8 m) 1 – 439839 1W
(Horizontal Protection) Width – 4 ft (1.2 m)
Plenum Length – 4 ft (1.2 m) 1 – 439839 1W
(Vertical Protection) Width – 4 ft (1.2 m)
Fryer (Split or Maximum Size
Non-Split Vat) (without drip board)
14 in. (355 mm) x
15 in. (381 mm) 1 13 – 16 in. 439845 290
Low Proximity (330 – 406 mm)
Non-Split Vat) (without drip board)
14 1/2 in. (368 mm) x
14 in. (355 mm) 1 16 – 27 in. 439845 290
Medium Proximity (406 – 685 mm)
Non-Split Vat)* (without drip board)
15 in. (381 mm) x
14 in. (355 mm)
High Proximity 1 27 – 47 in. 439842 230
Medium Proximity 1 20 – 27 in. 439843 245
Fryer (Non-Split Vat Only) Maximum Size
(without drip board)
19 1/2 in. (495 mm) x
19 in. (482 mm)
High Proximity 1 21 – 34 in. 439841 3N
Low Proximity 1 13 – 16 in. 439845 290
Maximum Size
(without drip board)
18 in. (457 mm)
x 18 in. (457 mm)
(635 – 889 mm)
* For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-10 and 4-11.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-29
Nozzle Application Chart (Continued)

Minimum Nozzle
Fryer (Non-Split Vat Only) Maximum Size
(Continued) (without drip board)
14 1/2 in. (368 mm)
x 16.5 in. (419 mm)
(406 – 533 mm)
Fryer (Non-Split Maximum Size
Vat Only)* (with drip board)
21 in. (533 mm) x
14 in. (355 mm)
(Fry Pot must not exceed
15 in. x 14 in.
(381 mm x 355 mm))
(685 – 1193 mm)
Medium Proximity 1 20 – 27 in. 439843 245
(508 – 685 mm)
Maximum Size
(with drip board)
25 3/8 in. (644 mm)
x 19 1/2 in. (495 mm)
(Fry pot side must not
exceed 19 1/2 in.
(495 mm) x 19 in.
(483 mm)
(533 – 863 mm)
Low Proximity 1 13 – 16 in. 439845 290
(330 – 406 mm)
Maximum Size
(with drip board)
18 in. (457 mm)
x 27 3/4 in. (704 mm)
(635 – 889 mm)
Maximum Size
(with drip board)
14 1/2 in. (368 mm)
x 26.5 in. (673 mm)
(406 – 533 mm)
Non-Split Vat) (with drip board)
14 in. (355 mm) x
21 in. (533 mm) 1 13 – 16 in. 439845 290
Low Proximity (330 – 406 mm)
Non-Split Vat) (with drip board)
14 1/2 in. (368 mm) x
26 1/2 in. (673 mm) 1 16 – 27 in. 439845 290
Medium Proximity (406 – 685 mm)
* For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-10 and 4-11.
PAGE 4-30 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

Minimum Nozzle
Range Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 – 40 in. 439838 1N
32 in. (812 mm) (762 – 1016 mm)
Area – 384 in.2
(24774 mm2)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 15 – 20 in. 439838 1N
24 in. (609 mm) (381 – 508 mm)
Area – 432 in.2
(27870 mm2)
Longest Side 40 – 48 in. 439836 1F
28 in. (711 mm) (1016 – 1219 mm)
Area – 336 in.2 (With Backshelf)
(21677 mm2)
Longest Side 30 – 40 in. 439844 260
32 in. (812 mm) (762 – 1016 mm)
Area – 384 in.2 (With Backshelf)
(24774 mm2)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 40 – 50 in. 439843 245
28 in. (711 mm) (1016 – 1219 mm)
Area – 672 in.2
(43354 mm2)
Longest Side
(Medium Proximity) 1 30 – 40 in. 439844 260
32 in. (812 mm) (762 – 1016 mm)
Area – 768 in.2
(49548 mm2)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 2 15 – 20 in. 439845 290
36 in. (914 mm) (381 – 508 mm)
Area – 1008 in.2
(65032 mm2)
Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 – 50 in. 439844 260
48 in. (1219 mm) (762 – 1270 mm)
Area – 1440 in.2 (perimeter
(92903 mm2) located)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 – 50 in. 439845 290
30 in. (762 mm) (762 – 1270 mm)
Area – 720 in.2 (center located)
(46451 mm2)
Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 35 — 40 in. 439838/439865 1N/1NSS
36 in. (914 mm) (889 – 1016 mm)
Area – 1080 in.2 (perimeter located)
(69677 mm2)
Longest Side 1 20 – 30 in. 439845 290

(Medium Proximity) (508 – 762 mm)
48 in. (1219 mm) (perimeter
Area – 1440 in.2 located)
(92903 mm2)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 15 – 20 in. 439839 1W
26 in. (660 mm) (381 – 508 mm)
Area – 533 in.2 (center located)
(34387 mm2)
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-31

Minimum Nozzle
Griddle (Continued) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10 – 20 in. 439840 2W
36 in. (914 mm) (254 – 508 mm)
Area – 1080 in.2 (perimeter located)
(69677 mm2)
Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10 – 20 in. 439846 2120
48 in. (1219 mm) (254 – 508 mm)
Area – 1440 in.2 (perimeter
(92903 mm2) located)
Chain Broiler* Length – 34 in. (863 mm) 2 10 – 26 in. 439839/439864 1W/1WSS
(Overhead Protection) Width – 32 in. (812 mm) (254 – 660 mm)
Chain Broiler Length – 43 in. (1092 mm) 2 1 – 3 in. 439838/439865 1N/1NSS
(Horizontal Protection) Width – 31 in. (787 mm) (25 – 76 mm)
Gas-Radiant/Electric Longest Side – 36 in. (914 mm) 1 15 – 40 in. 439838/439865 1N/1NSS
Char-Broiler Area – 864 in.2 (381 – 1016 mm)
(55741 mm2)
Electric Char-Broiler Longest Side – 34 in. (863 mm) 1 20 – 50 in. 439838/439865 1N/1NSS
Area – 680 in.2 (508 – 1270 mm)
(43870 mm2)
Lava-Rock Broiler Longest Side – 24 in. (609 mm) 1 18 – 35 in. 439838/439865 1N/1NSS
Area – 312 in.2 (457 – 889 mm)
(20128 mm2)
Natural Charcoal Broiler Longest Side – 24 in. (609 mm) 1 18 – 40 in. 439838/439865 1N/1NSS
Area – 288 in.2 (457 – 1016 mm)
(18580 mm2)
Lava-Rock or Natural Longest Side – 30 in. (762 mm) 1 14 – 40 in. 439841 3N
Charcoal Char-Broiler Area – 720 in.2 (355 – 1016 mm)
(46451 mm2)
Wood Fueled Char-Broiler Longest Side – 30 in. (762 mm) 1 14 – 40 in. 439841 3N
Area – 720 in.2 (355 – 1016 mm)
(46451 mm2)
Upright Broiler/ Length – 32.5 in. (825 mm) 2 – 439837 1/2N
Salamander Width – 30 in. (762 mm)
Salamander Length – 29 in. (736 mm) 1 – 439838 1N
Broiler Width – 16 in. (406 mm)
Length – 31 in. (787 mm) 1 – 439836 1F
Width – 15 in. (381 mm)
Length – 31 in. (787 mm) 1 – 439838 1N
Width – 15 in. (381 mm)
Wok 14 in. – 30 in. (355 – 762 mm) 1 35 – 45 in. 439844 260
Diameter (889 – 1143 mm)
3.75 – 8.0 in. (95 – 203 mm)
Deep
11 in. – 24 in. (279 – 609 mm) 30 – 40 in. 439838/439865 1N/1NSS
Diameter (762 – 1016 mm)
3.0 – 6.0 in. (76 – 152 mm)
Deep
* Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening – 12 in. x 12 in. (305 mm x 305 mm), and not less than 60% of internal broiler size.
PAGE 4-32 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL FRY POT CENTERLINE
8 IN. 1 1/8 IN.

Due to the configuration, application, and/or additional features (203 mm) 1 1/8 IN. (28 mm)
that pose protection problems using conventional protection, (28 mm)
1W NOZZLE
noted in the guidelines previously addressed, the following appli-
290 NOZZLE
ances/applications are considered hazard specific. 6 IN.
(152 mm)
The following hazard specific applications have been individually
tested and listed by make and model number of the equipment AIM POINT 7 3/4 – 8 IN. ONLY
TOP OF VAT (196 – 203 mm)
designated.
000282
Dean Industries Gas Fryer, Model 2424 GTI, 120,000 BTU/ LOW PROXIMITY (7 3/4 – 8 IN. (196 – 203 mm) NOZZLE HEIGHT)
hr. Rating
This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a combination 2 1/4 IN.
of a 290 nozzle and a 1W nozzle for low proximity (7 3/4 – 8 in. 2 1/4 IN. (57 mm)
(57 mm)
(197 – 203 mm) nozzle height only) and two 230 nozzles (Part 230 NOZZLE
No. 419339) for high proximity (45 in. (1143 mm) nozzle height FRONT EDGE
only). OF FRY POT 230 NOZZLE
The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 24 in. x 24 in. (610 mm 11 IN.
(279 mm)
x 610 mm). 45 IN. ONLY
(1143 mm)
Nozzles must be positioned and aimed as shown in Figure 4-66.
TOP OF FRYER
Note: For low proximity protection, see Special Piping Layout

in Figure 4-67. AIM POINT
000283
HIGH PROXIMITY (45 IN. (1143 mm) NOZZLE HEIGHT ONLY)
FIGURE 4-66
Section B (Hood Penetration to Nozzles) Piping Limitations

Dean Industries Model GTI Gas Fryer Special Piping
1. Piping configuration shall be as shown with ±1/4 in. (6 mm)
Layout
tolerance on dimensions.
Section A (Tank to Hood Penetration) Piping Limitations
2. All nozzles shall be at the same elevation.
Maximum Length: 30 ft (9.1 m)
3. Each pair of appliance nozzles shall be equally spaced from
Maximum Rise: 6 ft (1.8 m)
left-to-right centerline of fryer.
Maximum Number of 90° Elbows: 7
Maximum Number of Tees: 0 1W
290
TO 3 GAL (11.4 L) TANK
1W
2 1/4 IN.
290 21 IN. (533 mm) or (57 mm)
SECTION A 2 3/4 IN. 24 IN. (609 mm)
2 1/8 IN.
(53 mm) (69 mm)
HOOD PENETRATION
1W
21 IN. (533 mm) or 2 1/4 IN.
290 (57 mm)
8 1/4 IN. 24 IN. (609 mm)
(209 mm)
29 5/8 IN.
(752 mm) 290
2 11/16 IN. 2 1/4 IN.
1W 21 IN. (533 mm) or
(68 mm) (57 mm)
24 IN. (609 mm)
2 1/4 IN.
(57 mm)
SPECIFIC DISCHARGE PIPING FOR LOW PROXIMITY PROTECTION OF FOUR DEAN INDUSTRIES MODEL GTI GAS FRYERS FIGURE 4-67
000284
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-33
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued)

Far West Hospitality Products Gas Fryer, Model PAR-1-20, Frymaster 14 KW – 208V Electric Fryer, Model MACH 14
63000 BTU/hr Rating Series
This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a single, 290 This specialized single vat electric fryer can be protected either
nozzle. with a single 230 nozzle located 27 in. to 47 in. (685 mm to
The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 21 in. x 21 in. (533 1193 mm) above the top surface of the fryer or with a single 245
mm x 533 mm). nozzle located 20 in. to 27 in. (508 mm to 685 mm) above the
top surface of the fryer.
The 290 nozzle must be located on the front-to-rear centerline
and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 4-68. Either nozzle must be located anywhere along or within the
perimeter of the cooking surface and aimed at the midpoint.
4 1/2 IN.
(114 mm)
See Figure 4-69. The maximum size of the fry pot (without drip
board) is 13 3/4 in. x 16 3/4 in. (349 mm x 425 mm) and the
maximum size of the cooking surface (with drip board) is 13 3/4
in. x 20 7/8 in. (349 mm x 530 mm). The vat may be divided in
half to make two split vats.
230 NOZZLE TIP OR 245 NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER
OF THE COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT.
14 IN.
(355 mm) 20 7/8 IN. 230 NOZZLE
13 IN.
(330 mm) (530 mm)
MAXIMUM
230 NOZZLE
BACK OF 245 27 IN. – 47 IN.
FRYER NOZZLE (685 mm –
1193 mm) ABOVE
13 3/4 IN. TOP SURFACE
(349 mm) OF FRYER
MAXIMUM
245 NOZZLE
SIDE VIEW OF FRYER 20 IN. – 27 IN.
(508 mm –
000285
685 mm)
ABOVE TOP
SURFACE OF
290 NOZZLE LOCATED ON FRONT-TO-REAR CENTERLINE ± 4.5 IN. (114 mm) FROM FRYER
SIDE TO SIDE CENTERLINE AND AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING AREA.
16 3/4 IN. (425 mm)

MAXIMUM
13 IN.
14 IN. (330 mm) FIGURE 4-69
(355 mm) 000209
000286
FIGURE 4-68
PAGE 4-34 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

REAR
Frymaster Energy Efficient RE 14 Fryer FRONT-TO-REAR
VAT CENTERLINE
This electric fryer can be protected with either a single 230
nozzle located 27 to 47 in. (685 mm to 1193 mm) above the top
surface of the fryer or with a single 245 nozzle located 20 to 27
in. (508 mm to 685 mm) above the top surface of the fryer. RIGHT-TO-LEFT VAT
CENTERLINE
Either nozzle must be located anywhere along or within the AIM
perimeter of the cooking surface and aimed at the midpoint. POINT
See Figure 4-70. The maximum size of the fry pot (without drip
board) is 14 x 15 1/2 in. (355 mm x 393 mm) and the maximum NOZZLE 3 1/4 IN.
LOCATION
size of the cooking surface (with drip board) is 14 x 20 7/8 in. ZONES
(82 mm)
(355 mm x 530 mm). The vat may be divided in half to make 2 IN.
(51 mm)
two split vats.
2 1/4 IN. 2 1/4 IN.
230 NOZZLE TIP OR 245 NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER (57 mm) (57 mm)
OF THE COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT.
20 7/8 IN. 230 NOZZLE

(530 mm)
MAXIMUM FRONT
230 NOZZLE FIGURE 4-71

245 27 IN. – 47 IN.
NOZZLE (685 mm – 002297
1193 mm) ABOVE
14 IN. TOP SURFACE 2. The distance between the start of the first branch line and the
(355 mm)
MAXIMUM
OF FRYER
start of the last branch line shall not exceed 79 in. (2006 mm).
245 NOZZLE 3. The total length of all branch lines shall not exceed 162 in.
20 IN. – 27 IN.
(508 mm – (4114 mm).
685 mm)
ABOVE TOP 4. The 3 gallon agent tank shall be elevated above the connec-
SURFACE OF tions between the supply and branch lines.
FRYER
5. The requirements of the following table shall not be
exceeded:
Duct Plenum Appliance
Supply Branch Branch Branch
Requirement Line Line Line Line
Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in.
15 1/2 IN. (393 mm) Maximum Length 140 in. 67 in. 6 in. 42 in.
MAXIMUM (3556 mm) (1701 mm) (152 mm) (1066 mm)
FIGURE 4-70 Minimum Length 81 in. 4 in. 4 in. 17 in.
(2057 mm) (101 mm) (101 mm) (431 mm)
McDonald Fryer (Nozzle Heights of Less Than 20 in. Maximum 5 3 1 6
(508 mm)) 90° Elbows
When the 245 nozzle is used to protect McDonald’s fryers at Maximum Tees 0 1 1 1
heights less than 20 in. (508 mm) above the top of the fryer, the
Maximum Flow 11 2 1 2
following appliance and distribution piping rules shall apply:
Numbers
1. Each McDonald’s gas or electric fryer shall be protected by
Minimum Flow 5 0 0 1/2
one 245 nozzle. The fryer vat dimensions for one full vat or
Numbers
two split vats shall not exceed 14 in. x 15 in. (355 mm x 381
mm) without the dripboard and 14 in. x 21 in. (355 mm x 533
mm) with the dripboard.
The heat input rating of the fryer shall not exceed 122,000
BTU/HR.
The 245 nozzle shall be located 18 in. to 20 in. (457 mm to
508 mm) above the top of the fryer vat, 2 in. to 2 1/4 in.
(51 mm to 57 mm) to the right or left of the front-to-rear vat
centerline, and 0 to 3 1/4 in. (0 to 82 mm) forward of the
right-to-left vat centerline, and aimed at the vat center point.
See Figure 4-71.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-35

Henny Penny Mono Rail Center Lift System – Models 690, Note: In this application, R-102 agent storage tanks must
691, 692 be pressurized from a dedicated R-102 double-tank nitrogen
Nozzle Type: One 1N nozzle (Upper position) cartridge. The cartridge utilized for this hazard-specific Henny
One 1F nozzle (Lower position) Penny fryer protection cannot be shared with tanks intended
for standard R‑102 protection. Standard protection will require
Nozzle Location:
an expellant gas cartridge installed in another actuation device
1N Nozzle (Upper position): From the Tee Block, position
such as an AUTOMAN regulated release or regulated actuator
nozzle tip 16 in. (406 mm) up from base of fryer surface and 5
assembly.
in. (127 mm) in from right side of appliance back shroud
1F Nozzle (Lower Position): Running down from the Tee Block
to the base of the fryer, position the nozzle tip 2 in. (51 mm) from
back side of fry vat, and 8 in. (203 mm) in from the right side of
appliance back shroud
Nozzle Aiming Point:
1N Nozzle: At center point of fry vat
1F Nozzle: The 1F nozzle is a flat spray nozzle and the spray
must be horizontal to that of the edge of the back lip of the fry vat
System Coverage: Each fryer requires a minimum of 3 gal
(11.4 L) of ANSULEX Low pH agent discharging through the two
one-flow nozzles (1N and 1F)
AIMING POINT
NOTE 1: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE AGENT DISTRIBUTION

HOSE KIT (PART NO. 435982) BE UTILIZED DURING
SYSTEM INSTALLATION.
NOTE 2: VAT DIMENSIONS –
16 IN. (406 mm) WIDTH
20 1/4 IN. (514 mm) LENGTH
28 1/2 IN. (724 mm) DEPTH
MAXIMUM LID HEIGHT ABOVE VAT –
15 IN. (381 mm)
8 IN.
(203 mm)
TEE 7 9/16 IN. 5 IN.

TOP VIEW
BLOCK (192 mm) (127 mm)
16 13/16 IN. 16 IN.

(427 mm) (406 mm)
2 IN.
(51 mm)
007516

(TEE BLOCK LOCATION)
FIGURE 4-72
PAGE 4-36 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

Henny Penny Dual Lift System – Models 580, 581, 582, 590, Note: In this application, R-102 agent storage tanks must
591, 592, 680, 682, 691 be pressurized from a dedicated R-102 double-tank nitrogen
cartridge. The cartridge utilized for this hazard-specific Henny
Nozzle Type: One 1N nozzle (Upper position) Penny fryer protection cannot be shared with tanks intended
One 1F nozzle (Lower position) for standard R‑102 protection. Standard protection will require
Nozzle Location: an expellant gas cartridge installed in another actuation device
1N Nozzle (Upper position): From the Tee Block, position such as an AUTOMAN regulated release or regulated actuator
nozzle tip 16 in. (406 mm) up from base of fryer surface and assembly.
5 in. (127 mm) in from left side of appliance back shroud
1F Nozzle (Lower position): Running down from the Tee Block
to the base of the fryer, position the nozzle tip 2 in. (51 mm) from
back side of fry vat, and 8 in. (203 mm) in from the left side of
appliance back shroud.

AIMING POINT 5 IN.
(127 mm)
HOSE KIT (PART NO. 435982) BE UTILIZED DURING SYSTEM
INSTALLATION.
8 IN.
NOTE 2: VAT DIMENSIONS – (203 mm)
16 IN. (406 mm) WIDTH
20 1/4 IN. (514 mm) LENGTH
28 1/2 IN. (724 mm) DEPTH
MAXIMUM LID HEIGHT ABOVE VAT –

15 IN. (381 mm)
TEE
7 9/16 IN.
BLOCK
(192 mm)
TOP VIEW
16 13/16 IN. 16 IN.

(427 mm) (406 mm)
2 IN.
(51 mm)
007515

(TEE BLOCK LOCATION)
FIGURE 4-73
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-37

Henny Penny Dual Lift System – Model PXE-100 Note: In this application, R-102 agent storage tanks must
be pressurized from a dedicated R-102 double-tank nitrogen
Nozzle Type: One 1N nozzle (Upper position) cartridge. The cartridge utilized for this hazard-specific Henny
One 1F nozzle (Lower position) Penny fryer protection cannot be shared with tanks intended
Nozzle Location: for standard R‑102 protection. Standard protection will require
1N Nozzle (Upper position): From the Tee Block, position an expellant gas cartridge installed in another actuation device
nozzle tip 16.75 in. (425 mm) up from base of fryer surface and such as an AUTOMAN regulated release or regulated actuator
1.75 in. (44 mm) in from right side of appliance back shroud assembly.
1F Nozzle (Lower position): Running down from the Tee Block
to the base of the fryer, position the nozzle tip 2 in. (51 mm) up
from the base of the fryer surface, and 2.25 in. (57 mm) in from
the right side of appliance back shroud


HOSE KIT (PART NO. 435982) BE UTILIZED DURING SYSTEM
INSTALLATION.
NOTE 2: VAT DIMENSIONS –
14.93 IN. (379 mm) WIDTH
20.55 IN. (522 mm) LENGTH
17.42 IN. (442 mm) DEPTH
HEAT OUTPUT – 17kW

TOP VIEW
1.25 IN.
(32 mm)
1.75 IN. (44 mm)

TOP NOZZLE
20.5 IN. 16.75 IN.
(521 mm) (425 mm)
2 IN.
(51 mm)
2.25 IN. (57 mm)

BOTTOM NOZZLE

(TEE BLOCK LOCATION) (NOZZLE LOCATION) FIGURE 4-74
009481
PAGE 4-38 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) NOZZLE CROSS SECTION VIEW

Pitco SPINFRESH Fryer – Models MEII, MGII, SE14, SE14R,
SE14X, SG144S, SG14RS, SEH50, SEH5017, SGH50,
SGH5017, SSH55, SSH55R QUIK-SEAL
ADAPTOR
QUIK-SEAL ADAPTOR
Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 2120 nozzles
CLOSE NIPPLE
• One Agent Distribution Hose and Restraining Cable Kit (Part
No. 435982) must be utilized for each fryer (see Figure 4-78) ELBOW
• The 3/8 in. Quik-Seal mechanical bulkhead fitting (Part No.

77285) must be utilized for the connections through fryer CLOSE NIPPLE 3 IN. ± 0.125 IN.
(76 mm ± 3 mm)
cover. 2120 NOZZLE TO NOZZLE TIP
• Nozzle must be installed with the standard Metal Blow-Off Cap

(Part No. 439861) or the Stainless Steel Blow-Off Cap (Part 6.25 IN. ± 0.125 IN.
No. 439866). (159 mm ± 3 mm)
• Fryer electrical power source must be connected for electri- FIGURE 4-76
009459
cal shutdown upon system actuation through the use of the
ANSUL R-102 Snap Action Switch Kit (Part Nos. 423878- FRYER FLUE
423881).
1.375 IN.
(35 mm) DIA.
2.5 IN. ± 0.5 IN.

(64 mm ± 13 mm)
5.0 IN. ± 0.5 IN.

(127 mm ± 13 mm)
FIGURE 4-77
009460
FIGURE 4-75
009476
6 IN.
6 IN. (152 mm)
(152 mm)
14 IN.
(356 mm)
MEASURE TO THE CENTER

OF FITTINGS
AGENT
DISTRIBUTION HOSE
AND RESTRAINING
CABLE KIT
(PART NO. 435982)
FIGURE 4-78
009477
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-39

BELSHAW Century Fryers – Models C100, C200, C200G,
C300G, C400, C400G, C600, C600G
• Nozzle Type: 3N nozzle
• Nozzle Spacing: 11.5 in. (292 mm) maximum from end of
fryer and 25.5 in. (647 mm) maximum on centers
• Nozzle Height: 35 in. (889 mm) above top of appliance
• Nozzle Position: 2 in. (51 mm) in from inside edge of fry vat
• Nozzle Aiming Point: Along the centerline of fry vat
11.5 IN.
25.5 IN. (292 mm)
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
CL
11.5 IN.
(292 mm)
35"
35 IN.
(889 mm)
2 IN.
TH 006908 (51 mm)
NG
35 IN. LE m)
M
U (4 . 4
(889 mm) XIM FT. CL
MA 14.7
CL
006908a
FIGURE 4-79
BELSHAW Century Fryers
Specifications C100 C200 C200G C300G C400 C400G C600 C600G

Fryer Vat Size
Length: Inches 65 65 65 65 122.25 122 122.25 122
(mm) (1651) (1651) (1651) (1651) (3105) (3099) (3105) (3099)
Width: Inches 12 20 20 31.25 20.25 21.25 31 31.25
(mm) (305) (508) (508) (794) (514) (540) (787) (794)
Depth: Inches 5.25 5.25 9.75 9.75 6.25 11.25 7.12 11.00
(mm) (133) (133) (248) (248) (159) (286) (181) (279)
BTU Rating: K — — 188 200 — 350 — 360
Vat Oil Capacity: Lb 110 188 346 700 478 600 675 1250
(kg) (49.8) (85.2) (156.9) (317.5) (216.8) (272.1) (306.1) (566.9)
PAGE 4-40 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Krispy Kreme Fryers – Models 55M, 65 D/H, 110 D/H, 110M,
Dunkin Donuts Fryer Model DD400CGF 150 D/H, 220M, 270 D/H, 600 D/H, and 1000 D/H
• Nozzle Type: 3N nozzle Nozzle Type: 3N nozzle

Nozzle Spacing: 11.5 in. (292 mm) maximum from end of
• Nozzle Spacing: 1
1.5 in. (292 mm) maximum from end of fryer and on maximum 25.5 in. (647 mm)
fryer and 25.5 in. (647 mm) maximum on centers
centers Nozzle Height: 35 in. (889 mm) above top of appliance
• Nozzle Height: 35 in. (889 mm) above top of appliance Nozzle Position: 2 in. (51 mm) from inside edge of fry vat
• Nozzle Position: 2 in. (51 mm) in from inside edge of fry vat Nozzle Aiming Point: Along centerline of fry vat
• Nozzle Aiming Point: Along the centerline of fry vat Note: Figure 4-81 shows maximum size fryer (Model 1000 D/H).
Smaller size fryers (Models 150 D/H, 270 D/H, and 600 D/H) can
be protected with less nozzles but nozzle spacings, height
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
requirements, and positions, must be maintained as shown in
25.5 IN. 10 IN.
Figure 4-81.
(647 mm) (254 mm) 11.5 IN.
25.5 IN. (292 mm)
25.5 IN. (647 mm)
10 IN. (647 mm) 25.5 IN.
(254 mm) 25.5 IN. (647 mm)
(647 mm) 25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
25.5 IN.
(647 mm)
CL
11.5 IN.
(292 mm)
35 IN.
122 IN.
(889 mm) 007505 TH 006908
(3098 mm) NG
35 IN. LE m)
M
U (4 . 4
(889 mm) XIM FT.
MA 14.7
CL
Fryer Specifications:
• Vat Size:
Length: 122 in. (3098 mm)
Width: 31.3 in. (795 mm)
Depth: 11 in. (279 mm)
• BTU Rating: 360k
• Vat Oil Capacity: 35 IN.
1250 lb (566.9 kg) (889 mm) 35"
35 IN.
(889 mm)
2 IN.
(51 mm)
2 IN.
(51 mm)
CL
007505a
006908a

2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-41

Garland Electric Dual-Side Clamshell Broiler – Model
CXBE12
Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 1N nozzle
Nozzle Height: 12 in. (304.8 mm) to 15 in. (381 mm) above
lower cooking surface
Nozzle Location: 1 in. (26 mm) from side of appliance at
12 in. (304.8 mm) up
1 in. (26 mm) to 3 in. (76 mm) from side of
appliance at 15 in. (381 mm) up
See Figure 4-82
Nozzle Aiming Point: Center of lower cooking surface
NOZZLE CENTERED WITH

LOWER COOKING SURFACE
NOZZLE AIMED TO CENTER OF LOWER

COOKING SURFACE
12 IN. TO 15 IN. (304.8 mm to 381 mm) ABOVE

LOWER COOKING SURFACE
1 IN. (26 mm) FROM SIDE OF APPLIANCE AT 12 IN.

(304.8 mm) UP; 1 IN. TO 3 IN. (26 mm to 76 mm) FROM
SIDE OF APPLIANCE AT 15 IN. (381 mm) UP
TOP COOKING SURFACE: 10.2 IN. x 22.4 IN.

(259 mm x 569 mm)
BOTTOM COOKING SURFACE: 10.8 IN. x 22.2 IN.

(274 mm x 564 mm)
TOTAL LOAD: 16 kW
FIGURE 4-82
PAGE 4-42 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) DUKE Chain Broiler With or Without Catalyst View
DUKE Chain Broiler – Model FBB-High Proximity Exhaust Deflector Size – 6.25 in. (159 mm) x 26.75 in.
DUKE Chain Broiler With or Without Catalyst View: (679 mm):
• Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 290 nozzle • Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 245 nozzles
• Nozzle Height: 15 to 20 in. (381 to 508 mm) above top of • Nozzle Height: 8 in. to 15 in. (203 mm to 381 mm) above top
appliance of appliance.
• Nozzle Location: Centered 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from • Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from front or back edge
front feed edge of appliance. Nozzle must be oriented to of hazard
spray onto impedance plate. First nozzle positioned 17.25 in. (438 mm)
from right side of broiler (facing broiler)
• Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of impedance plate
Second nozzle positioned 15 in. (381 mm)
from first nozzle
290
Nozzle must be oriented to spray onto
NOZZLE impedance plate.
• Nozzle Aiming Point: A
imed at at center of impedance plate
LOW SIDE
OF PLATE Note: If the deflector or flue gas diverter is rotated 180 degrees,
IMPEDANCE
PLATE
the nozzles must also rotate to discharge into the opening.
6 1/2 IN. 15 IN. 17 1/4 IN.

(165 mm) (381 mm) (438 mm)
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
FROM EDGE OF APPLIANCE
THAT IMPEDANCE PLATE IS
ANGLED TOWARD PERFORATED
(SEE SIDE VIEW) GRILL
PRODUCT
OUTPUT CENTER
DUCT
Side View
PRODUCT
INPUT
008100
290 NOZZLE TOP VIEW
245 NOZZLE FLUE GAS

DIVERTER
15-20 IN.
(381-508 mm) 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) 8 IN. (203 mm) to
FROM EDGE OF 15 IN. (381 mm)
APPLIANCE THAT NOZZLE HEIGHT
IMPEDANCE
PLATE IS ANGLED
TOWARD
PRODUCT
INPUT
PRODUCT
OUTPUT
BACK FRONT
008099
SIDE VIEW
007414
FIGURE 4-84
Front View (Feed Side)
FIGURE 4-83
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-43

DUKE Electric Broiler – Model FBB – High Proximity DUKE Electric Broiler – Model FBB – High Proximity
DUKE Electric Broiler with or without Catalyst View DUKE Electric Broiler without Catalyst View
Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 1N nozzles Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 290 nozzle
Nozzle Height: 18 in. (457 mm) Nozzle Height: 15 to 20 in. (381 to 508 mm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from edge of appliance that Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from edge of appliance that
impedance plate is angled toward impedance plate is angled toward
First nozzle positioned 5 in. (127 mm) to left See Figure 4-86
of opening centerline Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
Second nozzle positioned 5 in. (127 mm) to (1) – 290 NOZZLE
right of opening centerline
See Figure 4-85
15 IN.TO 20 IN. (381 mm to 508 mm)
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) NOZZLE HEIGHT
FROM EDGE OF
APPLIANCE THAT
(2) – 1N NOZZLE IMPEDANCE
PLATE IS ANGLED
TOWARD
PRODUCT
18 IN. (457 mm) PRODUCT INPUT
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) NOZZLE HEIGHT OUTPUT
FROM EDGE OF
APPLIANCE THAT
IMPEDANCE
PLATE IS ANGLED BACK FRONT
TOWARD SIDE VIEW 008365
PRODUCT
PRODUCT INPUT
OUTPUT
EXHAUST OPENING
9 IN. (229 mm) x 26.75 IN. (679 mm)
BACK FRONT
SIDE VIEW 008365 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) FROM
EDGE OF APPLIANCE
THAT IMPEDANCE PLATE PERFORATED
IS ANGLED TOWARD GRILL
10 IN. (254 mm) (SEE SIDE VIEW)
CENTERED
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) FROM ON OPENING
EDGE OF APPLIANCE
THAT IMPEDANCE PLATE PERFORATED PRODUCT CENTER
IS ANGLED TOWARD GRILL OUTPUT DUCT
(SEE SIDE VIEW)
PRODUCT CENTER
OUTPUT DUCT
PRODUCT
INPUT
008366
TOP VIEW
PRODUCT
INPUT FIGURE 4-86
008366
TOP VIEW
FIGURE 4-85
PAGE 4-44 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler Model 940, 962 or 960 With Catalytic
DUKE Electric Broiler – Model FBB – Low Proximity Converter Protection
DUKE Electric Broiler with or without Catalyst View Note: Nieco broilers without catalytic converters use standard
chain broiler protection options.
Certain models of the Nieco broiler (Models 940, 962, and 960)
Nozzle Height: 8 in. (203 mm) to 15 in. (381 mm) are equipped with a catalytic converter to comply with new clean
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from edge of appliance that air laws. Because of the converter, it is necessary to protect
impedance plate is angled toward these broilers in a special way. The guidelines for protecting
First nozzle positioned 17.5 in. (444 mm) these broilers are as follows:
from right side of broiler (facing broiler) – The maximum internal broiling area is 29 in. x 23.5 in.
Second nozzle positioned 15 in. (381 mm) (737 mm x 596 mm).
from first nozzle – An R-102 3-gallon system with a maximum of six flow
See Figure 4-87 numbers, must be used for protection of each broiler, includ-
ing plenum and duct.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
– Each individual broiler must be protected with a minimum of
(2) – 245 NOZZLE
two 1N nozzles. The nozzles must be located as shown in
Figure 4-88.
8 IN. (203 mm) TO
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
15 IN. (381 mm) – The broiler must be fitted with two 1 in. (25 mm) high agent
NOZZLE HEIGHT
FROM EDGE OF barriers on the angled surface of the broiler. If these have
APPLIANCE THAT
IMPEDANCE not been completed by the equipment supplier, they must be
PLATE IS ANGLED added in the field.
TOWARD
PRODUCT
30°
PRODUCT INPUT
OUTPUT
(2) 1N NOZZLES
BACK FRONT
SIDE VIEW 008365
14.25 ± 1 IN.
(362 mm ± 25 mm)
15 IN. 17 1/2 IN.
(381 mm) (444 mm)
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) FROM

EDGE OF APPLIANCE
THAT IMPEDANCE PLATE PERFORATED
IS ANGLED TOWARD GRILL
(SEE SIDE VIEW) 12 IN. TO 13 IN.
(305 mm to 330 mm)
PRODUCT CENTER
OUTPUT DUCT
000250
PRODUCT LOCATE NOZZLES 2 13/16 IN. (71 mm) ON

INPUT EACH SIDE OF BROILER CENTER LINE
008368
TOP VIEW
FIGURE 4-87
14.25 ± 1 IN.
(362 mm ± 25 mm)
000774
FIGURE 4-88
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-45

Nieco Broiler – Model 950, 960, 980, 1424 Nieco Broiler – Model 9015 (With or Without Catalytic
• Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 2W nozzle Converter)
• Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See • Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 2W nozzles
Figure 4-89a. • Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See
• Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of Figure 4-90.
appliance. See Figure 4-89a. • Nozzle Location for Large Chamber: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm)
• Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 4-90.
4-89a. • Nozzle Location for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be located
6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance and
Nieco Broiler – Model 950, 960, 980, 1424 (with Catalytic 12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle.
Converter) • Nozzle Aiming Point for Large Chamber: Aimed at center of
• Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 2W nozzles opening. See Figure 4-90.
• Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See • Nozzle Aiming Point for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be aimed
Figure 4-89b. 12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle aiming point.
• Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of
appliance. See Figure 4-89b.
• Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure
4-89b – Side View.
6 1/2 IN.
• Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at point 3 in. (76 mm) each side (165 mm)
of center. See Figure 4-89b – Front View.
CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
6 1/2 IN. 6 1/2 IN.
(165 mm) (165 mm)
SIDE VIEW
(2) 2W NOZZLES
12 IN.
(305 mm)
SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW 20 IN.

(508 mm)
2W NOZZLE 2W NOZZLE
3 IN. 3 IN.
(76 mm) (76 mm)
20 IN. CENTERLINE OF
20 IN.
(508 mm) LARGE OPENING
(508 mm)
FRONT VIEW
FIGURE 4-90
007010
CENTERLINE OF CENTERLINE OF
LARGE OPENING LARGE OPENING
FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW
FIGURE 4-89a FIGURE 4-89b

006486 007034
PAGE 4-46 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
Nieco Broiler – Model 9025 (With or Without Catalytic Nieco Broiler – Model MPB94 and MPB84 – High Proximity
Converter) (With or Without Catalytic Converters)
• Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 2W nozzles • Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 2W nozzle
• Nozzle Height: 20 1/2 in. (520 mm) above top of appliance. • Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of converter. See
See Figure 4-91. Figure 4-92.
• Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of • Nozzle Location: Centered 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from any
appliance. See Figure 4-91. edge of the appliance. See Figure 4-92.
• Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each opening. See • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure
Figure 4-91. 4-92.
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) TYP.
TOP VIEW
ANY SIDE
6 1/2 IN.
(165 mm)
SIDE VIEW
007322
(2) 2W NOZZLES
SIDE VIEWS
2W NOZZLE
6 1/2 IN.
18-20 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
(457-520 mm) TYP. ANY 20 IN.
SIDE (508 mm)
CENTERLINE CENTERLINE
OF OPENING OF OPENING
FRONT VIEW
FIGURE 4-91
004355
007323
FIGURE 4-92
006487
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-47

Nieco Broiler – Model MPB94 – Low Proximity (With or
Without Catalytic Converter) Nieco Broiler – Model MPB84 – Low Proximity (With
Catalytic Converter)
Nozzle Height: 8 in. to 15 in. (203 mm to 381 mm) measured
from top of converter Nozzle Height: 8 in. to 15 in. (203 mm to 381 mm) measured
from top of converter
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from front or back edge of
hazard. Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from front or back edge of
hazard.
First nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (190 mm) to
the right from center of hazard. First nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (190 mm) to
the right from center of hazard.
Second nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (190 mm) to
the left from center of hazard. Second nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (190 mm) to
the left from center of hazard.
See Figure 4-93.
See Figure 4-94.
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at opening on respective center
lines Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at opening on respective center
lines
BACK FRONT
AIM POINT BACK FRONT
245 NOZZLE AIM POINT
245 NOZZLE
7 1/2 IN.
(190 mm) 7 1/2 IN.
CL (191 mm)
CL
7 1/2 IN.
(190 mm) 245 NOZZLE 7 1/2 IN.
(191 mm) 245 NOZZLE
6 1/2 IN.
(165 mm) AIM POINT 6 1/2 IN.
(165 mm) AIM POINT
008097
008097
CL CL
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
245 NOZZLE
245 NOZZLE
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)

6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
PRODUCT PRODUCT
PRODUCT OUTPUT INPUT
PRODUCT
OUTPUT INPUT
FRONT
FRONT BACK
BACK
SIDE VIEW 008098
SIDE VIEW 008098
FIGURE 4-94
FIGURE 4-93
PAGE 4-48 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

Nieco Broiler – Model MPB84 and MPB94 – High Proximity Nieco Broiler – Model MPB84 and MPB94 – Low Proximity
(With Perforated Cap OR with Catalytic Converter and (With Perforated Cap OR with Catalytic Converter and
Chimney) Chimney)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 1N nozzles Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 245 nozzles
Nozzle Height: 18 in. (457 mm) to 20 in. (508 mm) Nozzle Height: 8 in. (203 mm) to 15 in. (381 mm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from front or back edge of Nozzle Location: 6
.5 (165 mm) from front or back edge of
hazard hazard
First nozzle positioned 5 in. (127 mm) to left First nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (190 mm) to the
of opening centerline right of hazard centerline
Second nozzle positioned 5 in. (127 mm) to Second nozzle positioned 7.5 in. (190 mm) to
right of opening centerline the left of hazard centerline
See Figure 4-95 See Figure 4-96
Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening
(2) – 1N NOZZLE (2) – 245 NOZZLE

WITH OR WITHOUT WITH OR WITHOUT
CHIMNEY CHIMNEY
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) 18 IN. (457 mm) TO 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) 8 IN. (203 mm) TO
FROM FRONT 20 IN. (508 mm) FROM FRONT 15 IN. (381 mm)
OR BACK EDGE NOZZLE HEIGHT OR BACK EDGE NOZZLE HEIGHT
PRODUCT PRODUCT PRODUCT

PRODUCT
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT
OUTPUT
BACK FRONT BACK FRONT

008369 SIDE VIEW 008369
SIDE VIEW
(2) – 1N NOZZLE (2) – 245 NOZZLE
AIM AIM
POINT POINT
5 IN. (127 mm) 7 1/2 IN. (190 mm)
5 IN. (127 mm) 7 1/2 IN. (190 mm)
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) AIM

AIM FROM FRONT OR
FROM FRONT OR POINT POINT
BACK EDGE BACK EDGE
BACK FRONT BACK FRONT

008370 008370
TOP VIEW TOP VIEW
FIGURE 4-95
FIGURE 4-96
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-49

Nieco Broiler – Model JF94E Electric Broiler – High Nieco Broiler – Model JF94E Electric Broiler – Low
Proximity (With Catalyst) Proximity (With Catalyst)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 230 nozzles Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 245 nozzles
Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) Nozzle Height: 8 in. (203 mm) to 15 in. (381 mm)
Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) from front or back edge of Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) from front or back edge of
hazard hazard
Nozzles positioned 15 in. (381 mm) apart Nozzles positioned 15 in. (381 mm) apart
See Figure 4-97 See Figure 4-98
Nozzle Aiming Point: Center of catalyst Nozzle Aiming Point: Center of catalyst
(2) - 230 NOZZLE (2) - 245 NOZZLE
20 IN. (508 mm) 8 IN. (203 mm) -

6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) NOZZLE HEIGHT 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) 15 IN. (381 mm)
FROM EDGE NOZZLE HEIGHT
FROM EDGE
PRODUCT PRODUCT PRODUCT

OUTPUT PRODUCT
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT
BACK FRONT
BACK FRONT
008434 008430
SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW
(2) - 230 NOZZLE

(2) - 245 NOZZLE
AIM CENTER AIM CENTER

BACK FRONT
BACK FRONT
8 IN.
(203 mm)
CL 8 IN.
(203 mm)
15 IN. 15 IN. 15 IN. 15 IN.

(381 mm) (381 mm) (381 mm) (381 mm)
8 IN.
(203 mm)
CL 8 IN.
(203 mm)
6 1/2 IN. (165 mm) 6 1/2 IN. (165 mm)
FROM EDGE FROM EDGE
AIM CENTER AIM CENTER
008429 008431
CL
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
FIGURE 4-97
FIGURE 4-98
PAGE 4-50 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

Nieco Jet Flow Automatic Chain Broilers – Models JF62, Nieco Jet Flow Automatic Chain Broilers – Models JF64G,
JF63, JF92, JF93, JF143 (With or Without Catalyst) JF84G, JF94G – High Proximity (With or Without Catalyst)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 245 nozzle Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 230 nozzles
Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) to 25 in. (635 mm) Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm)
Nozzle Location: Centered above the catalyst to 5 in. (127 mm) Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from front or back edge of
forward of catalyst front edge hazard
See Figure 4-99a Nozzles positioned 15 in. (381 mm) apart
Nozzle Aiming Point: Center of catalyst See Figure 4-99b
ALLOWABLE NOZZLE Nozzle Aiming Point: Center of catalyst front to back; 6 in.
LOCATION IN GRID
CENTER LINE (152 mm) in from each side of catalyst
CATALYST/EXHAUST 15 IN. (381 mm)
OPENING
SPACING CENTERED
AIM AT CENTER AIMED 6 IN. OVER CATALYST AIMED 6 IN.
(152 mm) (152 mm)
FROM SIDE OF FROM SIDE OF
25 IN. 5 IN. CATALYST CATALYST
(635 mm) 20 IN.
(508 mm) (127 mm)
EXHAUST OPENING:
23.0 IN. (584 mm) WIDE x
14.2 IN. (360 mm) LONG
BACK FRONT
BROILER CHAMBER:
008910
28.5 IN. (724 mm) WIDE x
20.0 IN. (508 mm) LONG
CENTER LINE
AIM POINT
CENTER LINE
008911
BACK FRONT
ALLOWABLE NOZZLE
LOCATION LINE
AIMED TO CENTER 20 IN. (508 mm)
OF CATALYST NOZZLE HEIGHT
FIGURE 4-99a
6.5 IN. (165 mm)
FROM EDGE
OF APPLIANCE
FIGURE 4-99b
009482
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-50.1

Nieco Jet Flow Automatic Chain Broilers – Models JF64G, Nieco Jet Flow Automatic Chain Broilers – Models JF64G,
JF84G, JF94G – Low Proximity, Nozzles Rear-Mounted JF84G, JF94G – Low Proximity, Nozzles Front-Mounted
Facing Forward (With or Without Catalyst) Facing Rearward (With or Without Catalyst)
Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 245 nozzles Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 245 nozzles
Nozzle Height: 8 in. (203 mm) to 15 in. (381 mm) Nozzle Height: 8 in. (203 mm) to 15 in. (381 mm)
Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from back edge of hazard Nozzle Location: 6.5 in. (165 mm) from front edge of hazard
Nozzles positioned 15 in. (381 mm) apart Nozzles positioned 15 in. (381 mm) apart
See Figure 4-99c See Figure 4-99d
Nozzle Aiming Point: 4
in. (102 mm) from back edge of cata- Nozzle Aiming Point: C
enter of catalyst front to back;
lyst; 6 in. (152 mm) in from each side of 6 in. (152 mm) in from each side of
catalyst catalyst
15 IN. (381 mm) 15 IN. (381 mm)
SPACING CENTERED SPACING CENTERED
AIMED 6 IN. OVER CATALYST AIMED 6 IN. AIMED 6 IN. OVER CATALYST AIMED 6 IN.
(152 mm) (152 mm) (152 mm) (152 mm)
FROM SIDE OF FROM SIDE OF FROM SIDE OF FROM SIDE OF
CATALYST CATALYST CATALYST CATALYST
AIMED TO CENTER
AIMED 4 IN. (102 mm) 8 IN. TO 15 IN OF CATALYST
(203 mm to 381 mm) 6.5 IN. (165 mm)
FROM BACK
OF CATALYST NOZZLE HEIGHT FROM FRONT 8 IN. TO 15 IN
EDGE OF (203 mm to 381 mm)
6.5 IN. (165 mm) APPLIANCE NOZZLE HEIGHT
FROM EDGE
OF APPLIANCE
FIGURE 4-99c FIGURE 4-99d

009483 009484
PAGE 4-50.2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-51

Bakers Pride Broiler – Models CH6, CH8, CH10, XX6, XX8, Magikitch’n Gas Radiant Char-Broiler with Smoker Box
XX10 (With Wood Smoker Box and Chip Holders) – Models FM-RMB-660, FM-RMB-648, FM-RMB-636 (With
Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 3N nozzles Wood Smoker Box and Chip Holders)
Nozzle Height: 25 in. (635 mm) to 40 in. (1016 mm) above the Nozzle Quantity/Type: Three 3N nozzles
hazard surface Nozzle Height: 25 in. (635 mm) to 40 in. (1016 mm) above the
Nozzle Location: Each nozzle is to protect half of the cooking broiler surface
area and located within 1 in. (25 mm) of the Nozzle Location: All three nozzles are to be centered front to
center of the respective cooking area, aimed back above the broiling surface. The middle
at the center of that hazard area nozzle is to be centered left to right above the
See Figure 4-100 broiling surface. The remaining two nozzles
are to be located 9 in. (229 mm) inside the
Note: Smoker Box and Chip Holders cannot exceed logs 4 in. broiler sides.
(101 mm) in diameter and a maximum allowable wood depth of
4 in. (101 mm). See Figure 4-101
3N NOZZLES Note: Smoker Box and Chip Holders cannot exceed logs 4 in.
(101 mm) in diameter and a maximum allowable wood depth of
4 in. (101 mm).
CENTER LINE
OF RESECTIVE
COOKING AREA 9 IN.
+/- 1 IN. (25 mm) NOZZLE HEIGHT
IN ANY DIRECTION (229 mm)
25 IN. - 40 IN.
(635 mm - 1016 mm)
9 IN.
(229 mm)
CENTERED
CENTER OF
3N BROILER
008494 CENTER OF
3N
BROILER
3N
1/2 OF 1/2 OF
COOKING COOKING 25 TO 40 IN.
AREA AREA (635 to 1016 mm)
1 IN. (25 mm)
MAXIMUM 1 IN. (25 mm)
MAXIMUM
FRONT
COOKING
AREA
FIGURE 4-101
CENTER OF
RESPECTIVE
COOKING AREA
008495
FIGURE 4-100
PAGE 4-52 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

Marshall Air – Model 2001BK Multi-Chamber Broiler Marshall Air Electric Broiler – Model FR14B AutoBroil
• Nozzle Quantity/Type: Two 1W nozzles Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 260 Nozzle
• Nozzle Location: Front nozzle tip must be located 14 in. Nozzle Height: 15 – 20 in. (381 – 508 mm) above the
(355 mm) directly above the appliance, aligned with the front top of the broiler
face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim point is Nozzle Location: The nozzle must be centered above the
4 in. (101 mm) forward of the front edge of the converter on front edge of the broiler
the centerline. Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at the center of the exhaust
The rear nozzle tip is a mirror image of the front. The rear opening of the broiler. See Figure
nozzle is located 14 in. (355 mm) vertically above the appli- 4-103.
ance, aligned with the “rear” face and centerline of the cata-
lytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. (101 mm) behind the 24.25 IN.
14.50 IN.
(615 mm)
“rear” edge of the converter on the centerline. See Figure (368 mm)
4-102. 15 – 20 IN.
(381 – 508 mm) 24 IN.
(609 mm)
• System Limitation: Maximum of five flows for a 3.0 gallon 34.69 IN.
system: Remaining flow points available may be used to (881 mm)
protect other hazards.

CENTERED ON CONVERTER
48 IN.
CONVERTER TWO 1W NOZZLES (1219 mm)
003418a FIGURE 4-103

FRONT VIEW 006737
NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH FRONT OF CONVERTER Grease Grabber-80™ Two Stage Filtration System
NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH BACK
FRONT OF CONVERTER, OF CONVERTER, AIMED
The Grease Grabber-80 Two Stage Filtration System consists of
AIMED 4 IN. (101 mm) BACK 4 IN. (101 mm) FORWARD two components: The primary filter (The Grease-X Tractor) and
1W
the secondary filter (The Grease Grabber-80).
1W
NOZZLE NOZZLE The protection required for this application is the same as the
14 IN. 14 IN. standard plenum/filter protection: One 1N nozzle protecting 10
4 IN.
(355 mm)
(101 mm)
(355 mm) (3.0 m) linear feet of plenum length by 4 ft (1.2 m) of plenum
chamber depth (width), positioned 2 in. to 4 in. (51 mm to 102 mm)
from peak of secondary filter. See Figure 4-104.
4 FT. (1.2 m)
MAXIMUM
SECONDARY
FILTER
1N
003418B
NOZZLE
SIDE VIEW
FIGURE 4-102
PRIMARY
FILTER
2-4 IN.
(51-102 mm)
NOTE: TWO NOZZLES MUST BE UTILIZED FOR V-BANK FILTER

ARRANGEMENT.
FIGURE 4-104
006526
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-53
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE • For appliance hazard surfaces with listed protection exceed-
Overlapping Coverage – Option 1 ing the standard hazard zone of 28 in. (711 mm) in depth, the
For each group of protected appliances under a common hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the
hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from right hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front edge
to left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of 6 in. of the zone. See Appliance Chart, Table 4-1.
(152 mm) inside the outside edge of the cooking hazard of each • For appliance hazard surfaces that exceed the listed protec-
end appliance, and the inside overlapping nozzles must be tion sizes, multiple zones must be utilized. Align entire hazard
located between the two end nozzles at a maximum spacing of surface area within the multiple zones.
12 in. (304 mm). • All hood, duct, individual appliance, piping, and flow limitations
are as specified in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge
Hazard Zone and Maintenance Manual (Part No. 418087).
The hazard zone is defined as a theoretical, flat and level, rect-
• All appliance protection currently listed in the R-102 Design
angular surface, that includes all of the cooking hazards of the
Manual (Part No. 418087) is also approved protection. Zone
protected appliances under a common hood(s). The purpose of protection can be considered optional protection.
the hazard zone is to provide a means of locating the appliances
and the overlapping nozzles, as well as aiming the overlapping
TABLE 4-1
nozzles. The hazard zone measures 28 in. (711 mm) deep by
Overlapping Nozzle Coverage (Zone Protection)
the length of the cooking hazard(s). The centerline of the hazard
zone must bisect the 28 in. (711 mm) depth (from front to back) Appliance Type Maximum Cooking Hazard
and run from right-to-left for the full width of the hazard zone. Fryer 34 in. (863 mm) Deep x 5.8 ft2 (0.5 m2)
Griddle 30 in. (762 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection is defined as protec- Range 28 in. (711 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length
tion of cooking appliances by nozzles spaced uniformly at Wok, Maximum 30 in. (762 mm) Diameter x 8 in.
uniform elevations under a common hood(s). Overlapping (203 mm) Deep
protection of appliances is continuous for the full length of the Wok, Minimum 11 in. (279 mm) Diameter x 3 in.
hood or divided when group(s) of protected appliances are (76 mm) Deep
separated by counters or appliances not requiring protection. Braising Pan/Tilt 34 in. (863 mm) Deep x Unlimited
Skillet* Length
Full hood continuous protection is defined as overlapping
nozzle appliance protection that covers the appliance line-up Lava Rock 32 in. (812 mm) Deep x Unlimited
located under the total hood length. All appliances requiring Char-Broiler Length
protection are the appliances under the hood that can be an igni- Charcoal Broiler 32 in. (813 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length
tion source of grease in the hood, grease removal device or the (4 in. (102 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth)
duct. Mesquite Wood 32 in. (812 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length
Broiler (12 in. (304 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth)
Group protection is defined as overlapping nozzle appliance
protection that protects individual hazard zones located under a Gas Radiant 36 in. (914 mm) Deep x Unlimited
Char-Broiler Length
common hood. These “groups” of appliances may be separated
by appliances not requiring protection, such as steam equipment Electric Char-Broiler 34 in. (863 mm) Deep x 20 in. (508 mm)
or work tables, or by dedicated appliance protection, such as * See Figure 4-105 for nozzle location
salamander broilers.
See Figure 4-108 (full hood continuous protection) and Figure
4-109 (multiple group protection).
0-6 IN. (0-152 mm)
COVER MUST NOT
Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection INTERFERE WITH
EDGE OF
Appliance protection using dedicated nozzle coverage is defined DISCHARGE
PATTERN 40-45 IN.
as protection of cooking appliances with enclosed cooking (1016-1143 mm)
hazards, such as upright broilers, which cannot be protected
with overlapping nozzles and therefore must be protected with
nozzles dedicated to the appliance.
ZONE
General Design Limitations
006927
• The 245 nozzle is the only approved nozzle for overlapping
(zone) protection.
• Nozzle must be located 0 in. to 6 in. (0 mm to 152 mm) forward
ZONE CENTER LINE
of zone centerline, aimed back at the zone centerline. FIGURE 4-105
• Nozzles must be spaced a maximum of 6 in. (152 mm) from
each end of hazard and then a maximum of 12 in. (304 mm)
on center for the remaining overlapping nozzles until the
complete hazard is covered.
PAGE 4-54 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) 4. The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 0 in. to
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations 6 in. (0 mm to 152 mm) forward of the centerline or aimline
of the selected hazard zone. See Figure 4-107.
1. All overlapping appliance nozzles must be the 245 nozzle
and must be located under a common hood at the same 245 NOZZLE – NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED STRAIGHT
height above the hazard zone, in a straight line from right DOWN OR BACK AT CENTERLINE OF
HAZARD ZONE
to left and aimed at the centerline of the hazard zone. The
overlapping nozzle is used for both continuous overlapping
and multiple group overlapping protection.
2. The hazard zone must be positioned (located) so that all
appliance hazard surfaces are within the zone. For appli- 45 IN.
ance hazard surfaces with listed protection exceeding the 6 IN. (1143 m)
(152 mm)
standard hazard zone size of 28 in. (711 mm) in depth (see
Table 1), the hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the 40 IN.
back edge of the hazard zone, with the front edge overhang- (1016 mm)
ing the front of the zone.
3. The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 40 in. to
45 in. (1016 mm to 1143 mm) above the top surface of the
protected appliances. See Figure 4-107. FRONT BACK OF ZONE
OF ZONE
Exception No. 1: Nozzle dimensions for wok protection are CENTERLINE OF
measured to bottom of wok. Exception No. 2: When using 28 IN. HAZARD ZONE
(711 mm)
overlapping appliance nozzles in areas where there is a ZONE
back shelf, the nozzle cannot be positioned in the shaded
FIGURE 4-107
area as shown in Figure 4-106. 006915
Also, back shelf must not extend more than 11 in. (279
mm) over the hazard zone and cannot be less than 20 in.
(508 mm) above the hazard zone. See Figure 4-106.
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE(S)
CANNOT BE POSITIONED
45
44 IN THIS SHADED AREA
43
42
41
40
6 5 4 3 2 1
CENTER LINE OF
HAZARD ZONE
BACK
SHELF
11 IN. (279 mm)

MAXIMUM
20 IN.
(508 mm)
MINIMUM
28 IN. (711 mm)
FIGURE 4-106
006914
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-55
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) 2. When obstructions are located adjacent to appliance(s)
Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations protected by overlapping nozzles, the overlapping appliance
– Group Protection nozzle spacing must start with the appliance(s) adjacent to
the obstruction. See Figure 4-110.
1. For each group of protected appliances under a common
12 IN. 12 IN. 12 IN. 12 IN.
hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from 6 IN. (304 mm) (304 mm) (304 mm) (304 mm)
right to left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum (152 mm)
MAX. MAX. MAX. MAX. MAX.
6 IN.
(152 mm)
of 6 in. (152 mm) inside the outside edge of the cooking MAX.
hazard of each end appliance, and the inside overlapping
nozzles must be located between the two end nozzles at a
maximum spacing of 12 in. (304 mm). See Figures 4-108 OUTSIDE
and 4-109. EDGE OF
COOKING
HAZARD
12 IN. (304 mm) MAXIMUM

SPACING(S) BETWEEN
OVERLAPPING NOZZLES
6 IN. 6 IN. HAZARD AREA

OBSTRUCTION
(152 mm) (152 mm)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
FIGURE 4-110
001713
FROM FROM
EDGE OF EDGE OF
COOKING COOKING 3. When an appliance requires dedicated protection with a
HAZARD HAZARD protected area intended for overlapping appliance nozzle
protection, the group protection option will be required for
appliances on either side of the appliances using dedicated
protection. Group protection using overlapping appliance
nozzles must begin with the protected appliance(s) adjacent
to the dedicated appliance protected. An overlapping appli-
FULL HOOD CONTINUOUS APPLIANCE PROTECTION
ance nozzle(s) must be positioned within 6 in. (152 mm) of
the edge(s) of the appliance hazard surface area(s) adja-
FIGURE 4-108
001710
cent to the dedicated nozzle protection. See Figure 4-111.
EDGE OF COOKING
12 IN. (304 mm) 6 IN. (152 mm) HAZARD
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
6 IN. 12 IN. 12 IN. 12 IN.

(152 mm) (304 mm) (304 mm) (304 mm) 6 IN.
6 IN. 6 IN. (152 mm)
MAX. MAX. MAX. MAX.
(152 mm) 12 IN. (152 mm) MAX.
MAXIMUM (304 mm) MAXIMUM
EDGE 6 IN. (152 mm) 6 IN. (152 mm) EDGE
FROM MAXIMUM FROM
EDGE OF EDGE OF
OF MAXIMUM MAXIMUM OF
COOKING COOKING
COOKING COOKING
HAZARD HAZARD
HAZARD EDGE OF HAZARD
COOKING
HAZARD
GROUP APPLIANCE PROTECTION

DEDICATED NOZZLE
FIGURE 4-109 APPLIANCE
001720
FIGURE 4-111
001756
PAGE 4-56 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued)

Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations
– Group Protection (Continued)
4. On protected appliances, all hazard surfaces located in a
group must be within 40-45 in. (1016-1143 mm) from the
nozzle(s). Once that dimension is exceeded, a new group
must be started. See Figure 4-112.
Note: The supply pipe feeding nozzle groups is to be at the
same elevation. Adjust height for each group only by varying
lengths of nozzle drops.
6 IN. (152 mm) 6 IN. (152 mm)

MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
NOZZLES
NOZZLES
40 IN.
45 IN. (1016 mm)
(1143 mm) 40 IN.
(1016 mm) 45 IN.
(1143 mm)
GROUP “A” GROUP “B”
FIGURE 4-112
006917
Detection Requirements For Overlapping Appliance

Protection
When utilizing overlapping appliance protection, fusible link
detectors must be installed on a maximum of 2 ft (0.6 m) centers,
starting with detectors located in (under) the duct opening(s).
Starting from the detector under the duct opening, add detectors
on 2 ft (0.6 m) maximum spacing until the complete length of the
plenum area is covered, from one end to the other. The location
of the last detector on each end of the plenum must not exceed
2 ft (0.6 m) from end of plenum.
Note: Standard detector coverage, as specified in “Design
Section,” is acceptable when utilizing dedicated nozzle
coverages.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-57

Overlapping Coverage – Option 2 General Design Limitations
For each group of protected appliances under a common • If overlapping appliance protection is mixed with dedi-
hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from right cated appliance protection on the same pipe system, THE
to left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of 11.5 OVERLAPPING APPLIANCE PROTECTION PIPING
in. (292 mm) inside the outside edge of the cooking hazard of REQUIREMENTS MUST BE FOLLOWED.
each end appliance, and the inside overlapping nozzles must be • Overlapping protection requires the use of 3.0 gal (11.4 L)
located between the two end nozzles at a maximum spacing of tank(s) and a maximum of six flows per tank.
25.5 in. (647 mm).
• In installations using tanks only intended for overlapping
Hazard Zone protection, a single Double Tank nitrogen expellant gas
The hazard zone is defined as a theoretical, flat and level, rect- cartridge can be utilized with up to three 3.0 gal (11.4 L) tanks.
angular surface, that includes all of the cooking hazards of the • In installations using both overlapping protection and conven-
protected appliances under a common hood(s). The purpose of tional non-overlapping protection (ex. hood/duct or dedicated
the hazard zone is to provide a means of locating the appliances appliance protection), a single Double Tank nitrogen expellant
and the overlapping nozzles, as well as aiming the overlapping gas cartridge can be utilized with up to three 3.0 gal (11.4 L)
nozzles. The hazard zone measures 28 in. (711 mm) deep by tanks, as long as none of the 3.0 gal (11.4 L) tanks exceed a
the length of the cooking hazard(s). The centerline of the hazard total flow output of more than six flows.
zone must bisect the 28 in. (711 mm) depth (from front to back)
and run from right-to-left for the full width of the hazard zone. • If more than six flows will be used in a conventional non-over-
lapping tank, it cannot share the same cartridge as tanks
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection intended for overlapping protection. In this case, an additional
Regulated Actuator Assembly with another expellant gas
Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection is defined as protec-
cartridge will be required.
tion of cooking appliances by nozzles spaced uniformly at
uniform elevations under a common hood(s). Overlapping • The 245 nozzle must be used for “end of zone” protection.
protection of appliances is continuous for the full length of the • The 260 nozzle must be used for zone protection.
hood or divided when group(s) of protected appliances are
separated by counters or appliances not requiring protection.
• Refer to overlapping system piping requirements listed in
Full hood continuous protection is defined as overlapping
Table 4-2.
nozzle appliance protection that covers the appliance line-up
located under the total hood length. All appliances requiring • Nozzle must be located 0 in. to 12 in. (0 mm to 304 mm)
protection are the appliances under the hood that can be an forward of zone centerline, aimed back at the zone centerline.
ignition source of grease in the hood, grease removal device or • Nozzles must be spaced a maximum of 11.5 in. (292 mm)
the duct. from each end of hazard and then a maximum of 25.5 in. (647
Group protection is defined as overlapping nozzle appliance mm) on center for the remaining overlapping nozzles until the
protection that protects individual hazard zones located under a complete hazard is covered.
common hood. These “groups” of appliances may be separated • For appliance hazard surfaces with listed protection exceed-
by appliances not requiring protection, such as steam equipment ing the standard hazard zone of 28 in. (711 mm) in depth, the
or work tables, or by dedicated appliance protection, such as hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the
salamander broilers. hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front edge
See Figure 4-116 (full hood continuous protection) and Figure of the zone. See Appliance Chart, Table 4-1.
4-117 (multiple group protection). • For appliance hazard surfaces that exceed the listed protec-
tion sizes, multiple zones must be utilized. Align entire hazard
Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection surface area within the multiple zones.
Appliance protection using dedicated nozzle coverage is defined • All hood, duct, and individual appliance protection are as spec-
as protection of cooking appliances with enclosed cooking ified in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Mainten
hazards, such as upright broilers, which cannot be protected ance Manual (Part No. 418087).
with overlapping nozzles and therefore must be protected with
nozzles dedicated to the appliance. • All appliance protection currently listed in the R-102 Design
Manual (Part No. 418087) is also approved protection. Zone
protection can be considered optional protection.
PAGE 4-58 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations
TABLE 1 1. All overlapping appliance nozzles must be the 245 nozzle
Overlapping Nozzle Coverage (Zone Protection) for “end of zone” protection and the 260 nozzle for zone
protection, and must be located under a common hood at
Appliance Type Maximum Cooking Hazard
the same height above the hazard zone, in a straight line
Fryer 34 in. (863 mm) Deep x 5.8 ft2 (0.5 m2) from right to left and aimed at the centerline of the hazard
Griddle 30 in. (762 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length zone. The overlapping nozzle is used for both continuous
Range 30 in. (762 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length overlapping and multiple group overlapping protection.
Wok, Maximum 30 in. (762 mm) Diameter x 8 in. 2. The hazard zone must be positioned (located) so that all
(203 mm) Deep appliance hazard surfaces are within the zone. For appli-
Wok, Minimum 11 in. (279 mm) Diameter x 3 in. ance hazard surfaces smaller than the standard hazard
(76 mm) Deep zone size, the hazard surface can be located anywhere
Braising Pan/Tilt 34 in. (863 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length within the standard hazard zone. For appliance hazard
Skillet* surfaces with listed protection exceeding the standard
Lava Rock 26 in. (660 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length hazard zone size of 28 in. (711 mm) in depth (see Table
Char-Broiler (see Note 1) 4-1), the hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back
edge of the hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging
Charcoal Broiler 30 in. (762 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length
(4 in. (101 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth) the front of the zone.
Mesquite Wood 30 in. (762 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length 3. The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 40 in. to
Broiler (6 in. (152 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth) 45 in. (1016 mm to 1143 mm) above the top surface of the
Gas Radiant 36 in. (914 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length protected appliances. See Figure 4-115.
Char-Broiler Exception No. 1: Nozzle dimensions for wok protection are
Electric Char-Broiler 34 in. (863 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length measured to bottom of wok. Exception No. 2: When using
* See Figure 4-113 for nozzle location overlapping appliance nozzles in areas where there is a
Note 1: Always try to place Lava Rock Char-Broiler(s) near the center of the back shelf, the nozzle cannot be positioned in the shaded
zone. When the Lava Rock Char-Broiler is the first or last appliance in the zone, area as shown in Figure 4-114.
the outside edge of the broiler must not be more than 6 in. (152 mm) outside the
end nozzle. Also, back shelf must not extend more than 11 in. (279
mm) over the hazard zone and cannot be less than 18 in.
(458 mm) above the hazard zone. See Figure 4-114.
0-12 IN. OVERLAPPING NOZZLE(S)
COVER MUST NOT (0-304 mm) CANNOT BE POSITIONED
45
INTERFERE WITH 44 IN THIS SHADED AREA
EDGE OF 43
DISCHARGE 42
PATTERN 41
40-45 IN. 40
(1016-1143 mm) 12 10 8 6 4 2
CENTER LINE OF
HAZARD ZONE
ZONE
BACK
SHELF
11 IN. (279 mm)

MAXIMUM
18 IN.
ZONE CENTER LINE
(458 mm)
FIGURE 4-113 MINIMUM
006927
28 IN. (711 mm)

FIGURE 4-114
006914
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-59
OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations
4. The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 0 in. to – Group Protection
12 in. (0 mm to 304 mm) forward of the centerline or aimline 1. For each group of protected appliances under a common
of the selected hazard zone. See Figure 4-115. hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from right
to left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of
245 OR 260 NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED STRAIGHT 11.5 in. (292 mm) inside the outside edge of the cooking
DOWN OR BACK AT CENTERLINE OF HAZARD ZONE
hazard of each end appliance, and the inside overlapping
nozzles must be located between the two end nozzles at a
maximum spacing of 25.5 in. (647 mm). See Figures 4-116
and 4-117.
45 IN. 25.5 IN. (647 mm) MAXIMUM

12 IN. (1143 mm) SPACING(S) BETWEEN
(304 mm) OVERLAPPING NOZZLES
40 IN.
(1016 mm)
11.5 IN. 11.5 IN.
(292 mm) (292 mm)
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
FROM FROM
EDGE OF EDGE OF
COOKING COOKING
BACK OF ZONE HAZARD
FRONT HAZARD
OF ZONE
CENTERLINE OF
28 IN. HAZARD ZONE
(711 mm)
ZONE
FIGURE 4-115
007537
FULL HOOD CONTINUOUS APPLIANCE PROTECTION

TABLE 4-2
FIGURE 4-116
Overlapping System Piping Limitations 007538
Max.
Total 3/8 in. Max. Max.
System Flow Pipe No. of Elevation Cartridge
Size Numbers Length Elbows Rise Size
25.5 IN. (647 mm) 11.5 IN. (292 mm)
3 Gallon 6 75 ft 25 10 ft LT-30-R MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
(11.4 L) (22.9 m) (3.0 m)
6 Gallon 12 75 ft 25 10 ft Double 245 245
11.5 IN. 11.5 IN.
(22.7 L) (22.9 m) (3.0 m) Tank/ (292 mm) 25.5 IN. (292 mm)
245 260 245
Manifolded LT-A- MAXIMUM (647 mm) MAXIMUM
101-30* FROM
EDGE OF
MAXIMUM FROM
EDGE OF
9 Gallon 18 75 ft 25 10 ft Double COOKING
HAZARD
COOKING
EDGE OF HAZARD
(34.1 L) (22.9 m) (3.0 m) Tank/ COOKING
LT-A- HAZARD
101-30*
50 ft (15.2 m) maximum pipe from first to last nozzle. GROUP APPLIANCE PROTECTION
Note: O
n group appliance protection, start and end of EACH zone
50 ft (15.2 m) maximum pipe after the split on a split system. group must be protected with a 245 nozzle.
*Use with regulated actuator only. FIGURE 4-117

001720
PAGE 4-60 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations 4. On protected appliances, all hazard surfaces located in a
– Group Protection (Continued) group must be within 40-45 in. (1016-1143 mm) from the
2. When obstructions are located adjacent to appliance(s) nozzle(s). Once that dimension is exceeded, a new group
protected by overlapping nozzles, the overlapping appliance must be started. See Figure 4-120.
nozzle spacing must start with the appliance(s) adjacent to Note: The supply pipe feeding nozzle groups is to be at the
the obstruction. See Figure 4-118. same elevation. Adjust height for each group only by varying
lengths of nozzle drops.
25.5 IN. 25.5 IN. 25.5 IN. 25.5 IN.
11.5 IN. 11.5 IN. (292 mm)
(647 mm) (647 mm) (647 mm) (647 mm)
(292 mm) 11.5 IN. MAXIMUM
MAX. MAX. MAX. MAX. MAX. (292 mm)
MAX.
245 260 260 260 245
END OF
ZONE
OUTSIDE NOZZLES
EDGE OF NOZZLES
COOKING 40 IN.
HAZARD 45 IN. (1016 mm)
(1143 mm) 40 IN.
END OF 45 IN.
(1016 mm)
ZONE (1143 mm)
HAZARD AREA
OBSTRUCTION
Note: On continuous appliance protection, start and end with 245
nozzles and 260 nozzle(s) in the middle.
FIGURE 4-118
001713 GROUP “A” GROUP “B”
3. When an appliance requires dedicated protection with a Note: O

group must be protected with a 245 nozzle.
protected area intended for overlapping appliance nozzle FIGURE 4-120
protection, the group protection option will be required for 007539
appliances on either side of the appliances using dedicated

protection. Group protection using overlapping appliance Detection Requirements For Overlapping Appliance
nozzles must begin with the protected appliance(s) adjacent Protection
to the dedicated appliance protected. An overlapping appli- When utilizing overlapping appliance protection, fusible link
ance nozzle(s) must be positioned within 11.5 in. (292 mm) detectors must be installed on a maximum of 2 ft (0.6 m) centers,
of the edge(s) of the appliance hazard surface area(s) adja- starting with detectors located in (under) the duct opening(s).
cent to the dedicated nozzle protection. See Figure 4-119.
Starting from the detector under the duct opening, add detectors
on 2 ft (0.6 m) maximum spacing until the complete length of the
plenum area is covered, from one end to the other. The location
of the last detector on each end of the plenum must not exceed
EDGE OF COOKING 2 ft (0.6 m) from end of plenum.
HAZARD
Note: Standard detector placement can also be utilized when
using overlapping protection. However, the overlapping detector
25.5 IN. 25.5 IN. 25.5 IN.
11.5 IN.
(647 mm) (647 mm) (647 mm) 11.5 IN.
option cannot be used when utilizing standard R‑102 protection.
(292 mm)
MAX. MAX. MAX. MAX. (292 mm) Refer to Pages 4-71 – 4-73 for detector placement.
MAX.
EDGE 11.5 IN. 11.5 IN. (292 mm) EDGE
OF (292 mm) MAX. MAXIMUM OF
COOKING COOKING
HAZARD HAZARD
DEDICATED NOZZLE
APPLIANCE
Note: O
group must be protected with a 245 nozzle.
FIGURE 4-119
001756
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-61
TANK AND CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS For higher total flow numbers (23 to 110), multiple cartridges
Once the hazard analysis is completed and the total nozzle flow and regulated actuators are required as shown in the System
numbers are established, the quantity and size of agent tanks Selection Guide in “Appendix” Section
and cartridges needed to supply the nozzles with the proper
volumes of agent at the proper flow rates can be determined. ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS
For cartridges used in the regulated release mechanism, flow This section contains the guidelines for installing the actuation
capacities, tank quantities and sizes, and regulated release and expellant gas lines between the regulated release mech-
cartridge options are given in the table below. anism regulator, each regulated actuator regulator, and each
agent tank. These limitations should be considered when select-
Total Quantity and Regulated Release ing the component mounting locations.
Flow Size of Cartridge Options
Numbers* Tank(s) Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide The actuation gas line is the length of pipe and/or hose that is
run from either the AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly or
1 – 5 (1) 1.5 Gallon LT-20-R 101-10 the Remote Release Assembly that directs high pressure from
6 – 11 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT-30-R 101-20 the cartridge in the release to actuate one or more additional
11 – 16 (1) 1.5 Gallon Double 101-30 Regulated Actuator Assemblies. The actuation gas line can
(1) 3.0 Gallon consist of 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, stain-
16 – 22 (2) 3.0 Gallon Double 101-30** less steel, or galvanized steel pipe and fittings, and/or factory
supplied stainless steel braided actuation hose.
16 – 22 (2) 3.0 Gallon Double –
(Manifold) The expellant gas line is the length of pipe that is run from the
22 – 33 (3) 3.0 Gallon Double – regulator in either the AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly
or a Regulated Actuator Assembly that directs regulated pres-
When one or more regulated actuators are used, the following
sure to the agent storage tanks to pressurize the tank and
tank and cartridge combinations apply for each regulated actu-
discharge the agent. The expellant gas line shall consist of 1/4
ator:
in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, stainless steel, or
Regulated Actuator Regulated Actuator galvanized steel pipe and fittings.
Tank(s) Cartridge
(1) 1.5 Gallon LT-20-R or 101-10 Actuation Gas Line – 6 to 8* Tanks Maximum
(1) 3.0 Gallon LT-30-R or 101-20 * 8 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators.
(1) 1.5 Gallon and LT-A-101-30 or 101-30** or 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva-
(1) 3.0 Gallon double tank nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
(2) 3.0 Gallon LT-A-101-30 or 101-30** or
double tank 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated
(2) 3.0 Gallon (Manifold) LT-A-101-30 or Double release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected
(3) 3.0 Gallon LT-A-101-30 or Double within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line
* For exceptions to maximum flow numbers, see Distribution Piping Requirements for 1.5
from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actua-
gallon and 3.0 gallon systems in this Section. tor assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft (6.0 m) when using
** The 101-30 cartridge can not be used when two 3.0 gallon tanks are manifolded together. an LT-20-R, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-10 or a
101‑20 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 4-121.

EXPELLANT GAS LINES
NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION
GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R,
LT-30-R, 101-10 OR 101-20 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 20 FT (6.0 m);
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS 9
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
AUTOMAN
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 4-121
000775
PAGE 4-62 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the 101
(Continued) remote mechanical release to each R-102 regulated actua-
Actuation Gas Line – 6 to 8* Tanks Maximum (Continued) tor assembly. The total length of the actuation gas line from
the remote mechanical release to the regulated actuator
3. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated
assemblies must not exceed 100 ft (30.4 m).
release assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total
combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line 3. A combined total of 20 elbows and 9 tees may be used
must not exceed 30 ft (9.1 m) when using a “double-tank” in these lines. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow. See
nitrogen cartridge or a LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge or a Figure 4-123.
101-30 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 4-122. 4. Use only a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge in the 101
4. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, remote mechanical release.
eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 5. A safety vent relief valve (Part No. 15677) is required in the
90° elbow. actuation gas line to relieve residual pressure after actua-
tion.
Actuation Gas Line – 10 to 15* Tanks Maximum
* 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators.
Actuation Gas Line – Using 1/4 in. Stainless Steel Hose
1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva- * 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of three tank regulated actuators.
nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
1. Maximum total length of hose cannot exceed 17.5 ft (5.3 m).
Note: Stainless steel hose and fittings can also be used.
See Component Section for detailed information. Note: A combination of 1/4 in. stainless steel braided hose
and 1/4 in. NPT pipe can be used as long as the total
ACTUATOR AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A
“DOUBLE TANK” CARTRIDGE OR A 101-30 CARTRIDGE combined actuation gas line length does not exceed 17.5 ft
OR A LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE (5.3 m). Stainless steel braided hose cannot be used for
MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH – 30 FT (9.1 m);
MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS – 9 expellant gas lines. See Figure 4-123 for additional details.
2. Maximum of five regulated actuators allowed
3. Actuated with remote release (Part No. 433485) or Regulated
Release Assembly (Part No. 429853)
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED REGULATED ACTUATOR

ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT
ASSEMBLY GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED
AUTOMAN IN COMBINED TOTALS
REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 4-122
000262
20 ELBOWS
SAFETY 9 TEES MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
EXPELLANT 1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE –
RELIEF VALVE
GAS LINE 100 FT (30.4 m) MAXIMUM
REGULATED ACTUATOR MAXIMUM OF 5 REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS

WITH TANK AGENT TANK REGULATED (PART NO. 433485) 5 MAXIMUM
ACTUATORS
1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE OPTIONS
SAFETY 42 IN. (1066 mm) 1/4 IN. STAINLESS
RELIEF VALVE MAX. HOSE STEEL HOSE CHECK VALVE
LENGTH (TYP.)
MAXIMUM OF
5 REMOTE
RELEASE
MECHANISMS
(PART NO.
433485) OR
ONE REGULATED
RELEASE (PART
NO. 429853)
REGULATED ACTUATOR
WITH TANK MAXIMUM OF 5
REGULATED ACTUATORS
NOTE: W
HEN MULTIPLE RELEASE ASSEMBLIES ARE UTILIZED, A 1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE FIGURE 4-123
(PART NO. 25627) WILL BE REQUIRED AFTER EACH REGULATED RELEASE. 000301
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-63
ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS 3. If two tanks are connected to the regulated release
(Continued) assembly in a multiple-tank system arrangement, the total
Expellant Gas Line combined length of the actuation and expellant gas lines
must not exceed 30 ft (9.1 m) when using a “double-tank”
1. The expellant gas line is installed from the regulated release nitrogen cartridge, an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge, or a
mechanism in double, three, and multiple-tank systems, 101-30 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 4-122.
and from the regulated actuator assembly in multiple-tank
4. If three 3.0 gallon tanks are connected to the regulator in
systems. The expellant gas line is the piping and/or hose
either a regulated release or regulated actuator assembly,
between the regulator and the tank-enclosure/tank-bracket only factory supplied expellant gas hose assemblies will
assembly. The total length of the expellant gas line from be utilized. Refer to Distribution Piping Requirements – 9.0
the regulated release mechanism or each regulated actu- Gallon System, page 4-70 for additional design requirements.
ator assembly must not exceed 30 ft (9.1 m) when using
a “double-tank” cartridge, an LT-A-101-30 Cartridge, or a DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS
101-30 Cartridge. See Figures 4-124 and 4-125.
Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been
determined, it is then necessary to determine the piping config-
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
MAXIMUM LENGTH – 30 FT (9.1 m); urations between the tank adaptor and each discharge nozzle.
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS – 9 This section contains the guidelines and limitations for designing
the distribution piping so that the liquid agent will discharge from
the nozzles at a proper flow rate. These limitations should also
be referred to when selecting the mounting location for the regu-
lated release mechanism and agent tank.
General Piping Requirements

1. All R-102 system piping is straight line. Therefore, the need
for critical lengths and balancing is minimized.
2. Two 45° elbows count as one 90° elbow.
AUTOMAN REGULATED
RELEASE ASSEMBLY
3. Each branch line includes the tee or elbow leading to it, and
all fittings within the branch line itself.
4. The minimum piping length of Schedule 40, 3/8 in. pipe from
the tank outlet to any nozzle protecting a range, fryer, or wok
FIGURE 4-124 must be 6 ft (1.9 m).
000776
EXPELLANT GAS LINE

5. Pipe lengths are measured from center of fitting to center of
MAXIMUM LENGTH – 30 FT (9.1 m); fitting. See Figure 4-126.
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS – 9
CENTER TO CENTER
FIGURE 4-126
000778
6. All distribution piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40 black iron,

chrome-plated, or stainless steel. Do not use hot dipped
galvanized pipe on the distribution piping.
7. All threaded connections located in and above the protected
area must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied
to male threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over
REGULATED ACTUATOR the end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage
ASSEMBLY
of the agent distribution.
FIGURE 4-125 8. Before installing blow-off caps on nozzles, apply a small
amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the
000777
2. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, opening in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the
eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one exterior of the blow-off cap. This will help keep cooking grease
90° elbow. from building up on the cap.
9. Tees used in the distribution piping can be used as thru tees,
side outlet tees, or bull tees.
PAGE 4-64 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued)

Supply and Branch Line Identification SUPPLY LINE
The R-102 distribution piping network is broken down into The Supply Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from
four specific pipe runs: the Supply Line, the Duct Branch Line, the agent tank outlet to the last branch line (whether a duct,
the Plenum Branch Line, and the Appliance Branch Line. See appliance, or plenum branch line). This includes all supply line
Figure 4-127. fittings except for the tees or elbows leading to the branch lines.
DUCT BRANCH See Figures 4-127 and 4-128.
LINE
SUPPLY
LINE
PLENUM APPLIANCE
BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE
NOTE: THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING ONLY.

THIS IS NOT AN ACTUAL INSTALLATION.
FIGURE 4-127 END OF
000779
SUPPLY LINE
NOTE: THESE ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS CAN BE DESIGNED.
END OF
SUPPLY LINE
END OF
SUPPLY LINE
END OF
SUPPLY LINE
SUPPLY (NOZZLES FOR

LINE TEE PLENUM
PROTECTION)
END OF
SUPPLY LINE
(NOZZLES FOR
SUPPLY PLENUM
LINE TEE PROTECTION)
BRANCH LINE CANNOT
BRANCH LINE CANNOT
START AHEAD OF A
START AHEAD OF A
SUPPLY LINE TEE
SUPPLY LINE TEE
FIGURE 4-128
000780
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-65

Supply and Branch Line Identification (Continued) PLENUM BRANCH LINE
NOTICE The Plenum Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which
runs from the supply line to the plenum nozzle(s). This includes
Branch lines cannot start ahead of a supply all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start
line tee. the branch line. See Figures 4-128 and 4-130.
DUCT BRANCH LINE

The Duct Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which
runs from the supply line to the duct nozzle(s). This includes all
PLENUM BRANCH LINE
branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the (TEE INCLUDED)
branch line. See Figures 4-128 and 4-129.
PLENUM BRANCH LINE
(TEE INCLUDED)
DUCT BRANCH LINE
(ELBOW INCLUDED)
DUCT BRANCH LINE

(TEE INCLUDED)
FIGURE 4-130
000782
APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE

DUCT BRANCH LINE
(TEES INCLUDED)
The Appliance Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe
which runs from the supply line to the appliance nozzle(s). This
includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used
to start the branch line. See Figures 4-128 and 4-131.
APPLIANCE BRANCH LINES

(TEES INCLUDED)
FIGURE 4-129
000781
FIGURE 4-131
000783
PAGE 4-66 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) START OF LAST

BRANCH LINE
Distribution Piping Requirements – 1.5 Gallon System START OF FIRST
BRANCH LINE
DUCT, PLENUM, AND APPLIANCE PROTECTION
1. This option allows for duct protection, plenum protection,
appliance protection, or any combination. However, only one SUPPLY
LINE TEE TOTAL LENGTH
duct nozzle may be used, either a 1W or a 2W, nozzle. MUST NOT
EXCEED 8 FT
2. All distribution piping, supply and branch, must be 3/8 in. (2.4 m)
Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel.
3. Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of five flow
numbers.*
4. The pipe length between the start of the first branch line and START OF LAST
the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft (2.4 m). BRANCH LINE
When the supply line is split, the combined length of both START OF FIRST
BRANCH LINE
legs of the supply line (start of first branch line to start of last FIGURE 4-132
branch line) must not exceed 8 ft (2.4 m). See Figure 4-132. 000784
5. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 22

1W NOZZLE
ft (6.7 m). See Figure 4-133.
6. The requirements of the following table must not be
exceeded:
1N NOZZLE
1N NOZZLE
COMBINED LENGTH MUST

(BRANCH LINES IN BOLD)
NOT EXCEED 22 FT (6.7 m)

FIGURE 4-133
000785
1.5 GALLON SYSTEM

Supply Duct Plenum Appliance
Requirements Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
Maximum Length 40 ft 6 ft 4 ft 10 ft
(12.1 m) (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (3.0 m)
Maximum Tees 1 1 2 3
Maximum Flow Numbers 5* 2 2 3
* Exceptions:
1. Six flow numbers are allowed when a duct branch line is the last branch line on the piping network and no 1N nozzles are used to protect woks or griddles.
2. Six flow numbers are allowed when six 1N nozzles are used and none of the nozzles are used to protect woks, griddles, ranges, and salamanders.
Note: Only five flow numbers are allowed if a 1N nozzle is used for wok, griddle, range, or salamander protection.
3. Six flow numbers are allowed when only two 3N nozzles are used.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-67

Distribution Piping Requirements – 3.0 Gallon System
1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch SUPPLY
TEE
line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed
24 ft (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined
total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the
first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not
exceed 24 ft (7.3 m). See Figure 4-134.
000266
COMBINED LENGTH OF
BOTH LEGS OF SUPPLY
2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft LINE MUST NOT 3 BRANCH LINES
(10.9 m). See Figure 4-134. EXCEED 24 FT (7.3 m)
3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in.
supply line.
1N NOZZLE
4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. 2W NOZZLE

exceeded:
1N NOZZLE
230 NOZZLE
245 NOZZLE 1/2N NOZZLE
(BRANCH LINE IN BOLD)

COMBINED LENGTH MUST 000502
NOT EXCEED 36 FT (10.9 m)
FIGURE 4-134
3.0 GALLON SYSTEM

Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line
(12.1 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.6 m)
Maximum Rise 6 ft 4 ft 2 ft 2 ft
(1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 m) (0.6 m)
Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6
Elbows
Maximum Flow 11* 4 2 4
Numbers

* Exceptions:
1. Twelve flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for duct and plenum protection only.
2. Twelve flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two-flow appliance nozzles.
3. Twelve flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three-flow appliance nozzles.
Special Instructions:
1. Twelve flow numbers are allowed when four Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 4-66 on Page 4-32. The discharge piping must be
as shown in Figure 4-67 on Page 4-32.
2. For certain McDonald’s applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one 2W duct nozzle, one 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle,
one 1N plenum nozzle, and four two-flow appliance nozzles. Contact the Applications Engineering Department for additional information.
PAGE 4-68 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

LENGTH OF PIPING MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT.
Distribution Piping Requirements – 6.0 Gallon Manifolded (7.3 m) FROM START OF FIRST BRANCH LINE
System TO START OF LAST BRANCH LINE
As an option to piping two 3.0 gallon tanks separately, two 3.0

gallon tanks can be manifolded together to share a common
agent distribution line. Only 3.0 gallon tanks connected to the
same regulator can be manifolded. The following requirements
must be met when manifolding:
START OF LAST
1. All piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40. BRANCH LINE
2. See Figure 4-136 for tank connections.

3. The length of supply line piping between the start of the first
branch line and the start of the last branch line must not
exceed 24 ft (7.3 m). See Figure 4-135. When the supply
line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply
line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the 2W
NOZZLES
last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft (7.3 m).
1N
NOZZLE
4. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed

36 ft (10.9 m). See Figure 4-135.
5. A maximum of 22 flow numbers are allowed. 1N
NOZZLE
6. The requirements of the following table must not be 1N
NOZZLE
exceeded.
1N
NOZZLE
2 FLOW APPLIANCE NOZZLE

(BRANCH LINES IN BOLD)
COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT (10.9 m)
FIGURE 4-135
000267
6.0 GALLON SYSTEM

(9.7 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.6 m)
(1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 m) (0.6 m)
Maximum 90° 8 4 4 6
Elbows
Maximum Flow 22 4 2 4
Numbers
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-69

Distribution Piping Requirements – 6.0 Gallon Manifolded Distribution Piping Requirements – With Independent Pipe
System (Continued) Runs
This configuration consists of two 3 gallon tanks. Both tanks are Independent pipe runs can also be used with the regulated
connected to a common manifold tee and are pressurized from release assembly and the tank/enclosure assembly or tank
a single double tank (Part No. 73022) nitrogen cartridge in the mounting brackets. See Figure 4-137. When manifolding is not
regulated release assembly. See Figure 4-136. Note: A tank used, each of the two 3 gallon tanks utilize the piping limitations
mounting bracket can be utilized instead of the tank/enclosure of a single tank system.
assembly.
3/8 IN.
BRANCH
3/8 IN. 3/8 IN.
SUPPLY SUPPLY
USE HOSE/ SEE
GROMMET NOTE
PACKAGE NO. 1
(PART NO. 3/8 IN BRANCH HOSE/
418511) GROMMET
IN-LINE BURST DISC PACKAGE
ASSEMBLY – SEE NOTE NO. 4 (PART NO.
418511)
REMOVE
BURST DISC –
SEE NOTE NO. 3
3.0 3.0
GALLON GALLON 3.0 GALLON 3.0 GALLON
TANK TANK TANK TANK
DOUBLE TANK
NITROGEN
DOUBLE TANK
CARTRIDGE OR
NITROGEN
(LT-A-101-30
CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE –
OR LT-A-101-30
008127 REGULATED
3.0 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE CARTRIDGE
ACTUATOR ONLY)
ASSEMBLY OR 3.0 GALLON REGULATED (LT-A-101-30
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY OR CARTRIDGE –
REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED
TANK/ENCLOSURE ACTUATOR ONLY)
TANK/ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 4-137
NOTE 1: THE PIPE CONNECTION FROM TANK CENTER TO TANK 000786
CENTER CANNOT EXCEED 8 1/2 IN. (215 mm). ALSO, OEM
RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY CAN BE UTILIZED WHEN Note: If an expellant gas hose is to be used for a second tank
MANIFOLDING 3.0 GALLON TANK.
NOTE 2: ONLY 3 GALLON TANKS CAN BE MANIFOLDED.
in an adjacent tank enclosure or tank bracket assembly, the
NOTE 3: THE BURST DISC THAT IS PART OF THE TANK ADAPTOR/
second tank will need to be installed on the left side of the
BURST DISC ASSEMBLY MUST BE REMOVED AND AUTOMAN Regulated Release, with the outlets a maximum of
MODIFIED. SEPARATE THE ALUMINUM DISC MATERIAL
FROM THE PLASTIC GASKET. DISCARD THE ALUMINUM
8.5 in. (215 mm) from center to center, similar to the manifolded
DISC MATERIAL AND REINSTALL THE PLASTIC GASKET system in Figure 4-136. Otherwise, the second tank will require
BACK INTO THE TANK ADAPTOR/BURST DISC ASSEMBLY.
1/4 in. NPT pipe instead of expellant gas hose.
NOTE 4: THE IN-LINE BURST DISC ASSEMBLY (PART NO. 416970)
IS TO BE MOUNTED AS CLOSE TO THE TANK OUTLET AS
POSSIBLE. AFTER SYSTEM DISCHARGE, THE ASSEMBLY
MUST BE DISASSEMBLED AND A NEW BURST DISC
INSTALLED.
FIGURE 4-136
PAGE 4-70 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

Distribution Piping Requirements – 9.0 Gallon System
This optional configuration consists only of three 3-gallon tanks,
all pressurized from a single double-tank nitrogen cartridge with
expellant gas hoses connected as shown in Figure 4-138. Tanks
No. 1 and No. 2 must be connected directly to the regulator with
separate expellant gas hoses and Tank No. 3 must be connected
to Tank No. 2 with a third expellant gas hose as shown in Figure
4-136. Each tank must be connected to an independent distribu-
tion piping network as shown in Figure 4-138. Distribution piping
requirements for each network must be as follows:
1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch
line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed
24 ft (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined
total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the
first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not
exceed 24 ft (7.3 m). See Figure 4-134. 3.0 3.0 3.0
GALLON GALLON GALLON
2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft TANK TANK TANK
(10.9 m). See Figure 4-138. NO. 3 NO. 2 NO. 1
3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in.
supply line.
TWO TANK ENCLOSURE 3 GALLON REGULATED DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN
4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. ASSEMBLY (PART NO. RELEASE ASSEMBLY, CARTRIDGE OR
430324) (INCLUDES OR 3 GALLON LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE
5. When using this 9.0 gallon system configuration, no mani- HOSES AND GROMMETS) REGULATED (REGULATED ACTUATOR
folding of distribution piping is allowed. ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ONLY)
6. When an AUTOMAN Regulated Release is utilized in this NOTE: WHEN THREE 3.0 GALLON TANKS ARE CONNECTED TO ONE
AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY, NO ADDITIONAL
configuration, additional regulator actuators cannot be used. REGULATED ACTUATOR(S) ASSEMBLIES CAN BE USED.
7. Only 3-gallon tanks can be utilized in this configuration. FIGURE 4-138

008126
exceeded for each 3-gallon tank:
9.0 GALLON SYSTEM

(12.1 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.6 m)
(1.8 m) (1.2 m) (0.6 m) (0.6 m)
Maximum 90° 9 4 4 6
Elbows
Maximum Flow 11* 4 2 4
Numbers
* Exceptions:
1. Twelve flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for duct and plenum protection ONLY.
2. Twelve flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two-flow appliance nozzles.
3. Twelve flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three-flow appliance nozzles.
Special Instructions:
1. When four Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 4-66 on Page 4-32, the discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 4-67 on
Page 4-32.
2. For certain McDonald’s applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one 2W duct nozzle, one 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle,
one 1N plenum nozzle, and four two-flow appliance nozzles. Contact the Applications Engineering Department for additional information.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-71
DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Once the fire suppression system design has been determined,
a detection system design must be completed. This section
contains guidelines and limitations for detection system instal-
lation.
Detector Identification
The two types of detectors are distinguished from each other by
their location in the detection system. 20 FT (6.0 m)
MAXIMUM
1. The Terminal Detector is the last in a series of detectors,
or the only detector used in a single-detector system. This
detector is thus named because it is at the point at which the
wire rope ends, or “terminates.”
2. A Series Detector is any detector located in-line between the
regulated release mechanism and the terminal detector.
Detector/Pulley Elbow/Conduit Offset Design Limitations

FIGURE 4-139
1. Conduit runs, pulley elbows, and number of detectors per 000271
system must be within the approved system guidelines. The
following requirements must not be exceeded: NOTICE
Maximum Maximum Maximum
When gas appliances are used and the flue
Number of Number of Length of
gases from the burner are exhausted into the
Detectors Elbows 1/2 in. Conduit
duct, the detector must be kept out of the air
per System per System per System
stream of these exhaust gases. These gases
Scissors Style 15 20 150 ft (45.7 m) can be very hot and could actuate the system
Detector unnecessarily.
(Without Duct openings that are long and narrow or
Offset Conduit large enough to require multiple duct nozzles
Scissors Style 15 16 150 ft (45.7 m) may require additional detectors.
Detector (With
Offset Conduit
ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR
2. If the hazard requires more than 15 detectors, up to five
If an electrostatic precipitator is located at or near the base of
101 Remote Releases (Part No. 433485) can be used for
the exhaust duct, it is necessary to locate a detector below the
system actuation. Each 101 remote release allows the use
precipitator, at the base of the duct, and also locate one in the
of a maximum of 15 “scissor” style detectors (14 series and
duct, just above the precipitator. See Figure 4-140.
1 terminal) for a total of 75 detectors if needed.
When installing the detector bracket and system conduit, make
Detector Placement Requirements certain they do not interfere with the operation of the precipitator.
EXHAUST DUCTS Note: On secondary filtration units utilizing multiple filter stages/
media, contact Technical Services for instructions.
Each exhaust duct must have at least one detector installed
in the duct entrance, located in the airstream of the cooking
vapors, or at a maximum of 20 ft (6.0 m) into the duct opening.
See Figure 4-139
FIGURE 4-140
000268
PAGE 4-72 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (Continued)
Detector Placement Requirements (Continued) NOTICE

COOKING APPLIANCES The conduit offset can be used at the top or
If the cooking appliance is located under an exhaust duct where bottom of the regulated release to change
a detector has been mounted, it is normally not necessary to direction of the conduit. The conduit offset
utilize another detector for that cooking appliance, provided the cannot be used with pulley tees. All other
detector is not more than 12 in. (304 mm) into the duct and the changes in direction must be made by using
appliance has no larger cooking surface than 48 in. x 48 in. ANSUL approved pulley elbows (Part No.
(1219 mm x 1219 mm). See Figure 4-141. 423254 or 415670). See Figure 4-142.
Note: If two appliances are located under a duct opening where

a detector has been mounted and both appliances together
do not exceed a cooking surface of 48 in. x 48 in. (1219 mm x
1219 mm) and the detector is located above both the protected
appliances, it is not necessary to utilize an additional detector
provided the duct detector is not more than 12 in. (304 mm) into
the duct opening.
APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE

REQUIRES COVERED BY REQUIRES
SEPARATE DETECTOR SEPARATE
DETECTOR UNDER DUCT DETECTOR
FIGURE 4-142
000270
Fusible Link Selection

FIGURE 4-141
000269
When possible, temperature readings should be taken at each
Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface not detector location to determine correct fusible link temperature
exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. (1219 x 1219 mm) can be protected by rating. Temperature can be recorded using either a maximum
a minimum of one detector. Cooking appliances with a continu- registering thermometer (Part No. 15240) temperature tape or
ous cooking surface exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. (1219 x 1219 mm) any other accurate thermometer.
must be protected by at least one detector per 48 in. x 48 in.
(1219 x 1219 mm) cooking area. Detectors used for cooking
appliances must be located above the protected appliance
toward the exhaust duct side of the appliance. The detector
should be located in the air stream of the appliance to enhance
TEMPERATURE RATING
system response time. STAMPED ON FUSIBLE
LINK BODY
Note: For overlapping detector coverage, see Page 4-60 for
design requirements.
Detection Line Requirements 000170

000171
SL STYLE A-PC STYLE
CONDUIT
FIGURE 4-143
Rigid conduit or 1/2 inch EMT thin-wall conduit may be used.
Standard steel conduit fittings (compression type are recom- Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detec-
mended) must be employed to properly install the detection tor(s) according to the temperature condition. Two styles are
system. All conduit or pipe must be firmly supported. When available. See Figure 4-143. See Component Section for
using pipe, make certain that all ends are carefully reamed, detailed temperature ratings.
deburred and blown clear of chips and scale before assembly.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-73
DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (Continued) TEE CLOSE TO AUTOMAN (EXAMPLE)

Electric Thermal Detector PULLEY TEE
When electric thermal detection is used, the detection circuit 12 IN.

must be supervised in accordance with NFPA 17A, Standard for (304 mm)
Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems. Electric thermal detectors
must be used in conjunction with either the AUTOPULSE 542R
Control Panel (Part No. 433607) or the AUTOPULSE Z-10
Control Panel (Part No. 430525), and the 24VDC Regulated GAS VALVE OR
AUTOMAN
GAS VALVE OR
Release Assembly. MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL
149 FT (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS MAXIMUM
Note: Consider the rate of temperature increase in the location PER EACH SIDE OF TEE
chosen for the detector when using electric thermal detection.
TEE CLOSE TO GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE)
A transient rush of warm air up to 40 °F (4 °C) per minute may
expand the shell, but not enough to trigger the AUTOPULSE 12 IN. 12 IN.
control panel. Temperature increases over 40 °F (4 °C) per (304 mm) (304 mm)
minute however, may initiate an alarm condition in the control
PULLEY TEE
panel.
GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR
MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL
After determining the maximum ambient temperature at the
AUTOMAN
thermal detector location, select the correct thermal detector
149 FT (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS BETWEEN
according to the temperature condition chart in the “System AUTOMAN AND TEE
Components” section.
TEE HALFWAY BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE)
MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS 75 FT (22.8 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS
A remote manual pull station allows the R-102 system to be

manually operated at some point distant from the regulated 75 FT (22.8 m) AND 75 FT (22.8 m) AND
release assembly. The pull station should be installed at a height 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 10 PULLEY ELBOWS
of 42-48 in. (1067-1219 mm), in accordance with the require- PULLEY TEE
ments of the American Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Authority
having Jurisdiction. and located in the path of egress. The pull
AUTOMAN
GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR
MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL
station is the only source of manual actuation of the regulated
FIGURE 4-144
release assembly. 004907
The total length of the cable used for each manual pull station
within a system must not exceed 150 ft (45.7 m). Manual Pull Station – Part No. 435960 or 434618
Parts that may be used for installation of a metal stamped
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per
remote manual pull station are:
pull station is 20.
Description Part No.
One pulley tee is allowed per cable system.
Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly* 435960
The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a pull Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 434618
station is 150 ft (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows Pulley Elbow 423250
used per side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the Pulley Elbow 415670
AUTOMAN, the 150 ft (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but Pulley Tee 427929
as pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the *Assembly includes parts listed below:
tee, they must be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) 1/16 in. Stainless Steel Cable 50 ft (15.2 m) 15821
allowed on each side. Oval Press-To-Crimp Sleeves 4596
Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN Glass Break Rod (1) 4834
and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for
use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 4-144
for three different examples. (Note: Both must be gas valves or
both must be pull stations. Mixing is not allowed.)
PAGE 4-74 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS

An ANSUL or ANSUL approved mechanical gas shut-off valve A UL Listed electrically-operated gas shut-off valve can be
system can be attached to the R-102 system. The system works attached to the R-102 system to provide an electrical means of
both mechanically and pneumatically by use of an air cylinder shutting off the gas line at a predetermined point. If an electric
located inside the regulated release assembly. Upon actuation gas shut-off valve is used in the system it must be attached
of the fire suppression system, a pneumatically-operated air with both an electric (snap-action) switch and a manual reset
cylinder assembly will mechanically close the gas shut-off valve. relay. For more information on the types of electric (snap-action)
The total length of the cable for each mechanical gas valve must switches, refer to the Electrical Switch, Field Installation section.
not exceed 150 ft (45.7 m). The maximum number of pulley The manual reset relay is reviewed in this section.
elbows that may be used is 20 for each valve. All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED
One pulley tee is allowed per cable system. ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having
The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a gas valve jurisdiction.
is 150 ft (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per The following is a brief explanation of how the R-102 system
side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, operates with an Electric Gas Shut-off Valve attached:
the 150 ft (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley
With the regulated release cocked in the ready condition, the
elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they
normally closed contacts in the snap-action switch allow current
must be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed
to flow to the manual reset relay. With the relay coil energized,
on each side.
normally open contacts in the reset relay close, allowing the
Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN solenoid in the gas valve to be energized.
and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for
use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 4-144 for Once the R-102 system is activated, the normally closed
three different examples. contacts in the snap-action switch will open, de-energizing the
Parts that may be used for installation of a Mechanical Gas reset relay. This will, in turn, open the contacts in the relay which
Shut-off Valve are: will cause the gas valve to become de-energized and close.
Description Part No. The system must be re-armed and the “push to reset” button on
Gas Valve/Actuator 3/4 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55598 the reset relay must be operated to reopen the gas valve.
Gas Valve/Actuator 1 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55601 It is important to note that a power failure or an electrical power
Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/4 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55604 interruption will cause the gas valve to close even though the
Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/2 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55607 system was not fired.
Gas Valve/Actuator 2 in. Assembly (ANSUL)* 55610 In either case, whether in a fired condition or when a power
Gas Valve/Actuator 2 1/2 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25937 failure has occurred, the manual reset relay and electric gas
Gas Valve/Actuator 3 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25938 shut-off valve must be reset to resume a normal operating condi-
Pulley Elbow 423250 tion. For resetting, refer to the “Recharge and Resetting
Pulley Elbow 415670 Procedures” section in this manual.
Pulley Tee 427929
1/16 in. Stainless Steel Cable 15821 or
50 ft (15.2 m) or 500 ft (152.4 m) roll 79653
Oval Press-To-Crimp Sleeve 4596
Stop Sleeve (2) 26317
* Assembly includes parts listed below:
Air Cylinder Assembly 15733

Air Cylinder 15521
Tubing Assembly 15529
Copper Tubing, 1/8 in. 15525
Male Elbow 15523
Male Connector 15522
Machine Screw (2) 15421
Hex Nut (2) 15527
Lockwasher (2) 4141
Visual Inspection Seal (2) 197
All valves above are UL listed and approved. They may be
mounted in any position. Pipe threads are type NPT. Ambient
operating temperature range of all valves is 32 °F to 120 °F
(0 °C to 49 °C). The valves are not weatherproof and must
be located indoors in areas approved by the “authority having
jurisdiction.”
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 4-75
ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS

Approvals Note: Electrical connections shall not be made in the
ANSUL gas valves listed in this section are UL listed and AUTOMAN.
approved for 110 VAC. If more information is required, refer to The electric (snap-action) switches for the R-102 system are
the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, specially designed to fit the regulated release assembly. The
Inc. under “Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5” or switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms,
consult Tyco Fire Protection Products, Marinette, Wisconsin contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off
54143-2542. devices, and other electrical devices that are designed to shut
off or turn on when the fire suppression system is actuated.
If other gas valves are used, they shall be “UL listed electrical-
(See Figures 5-122 through 5-124 in Installation Section for
ly-operated safety valves for natural or LP gas as required, of
reference).
appropriate pressure and temperature rating, 110 VAC/60 Hz.”
The information on temperature and type of gas that the valves Contractors shall supply “UL listed, enclosed industrial control
are suitable for may be found in the Gas and Oil Equipment List equipment or magnetic switch having a rating matching that of
of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under “Electrically Operated the cooking appliance, coil 110 VAC/60 Hz or 24 VAC/60 Hz.”
Valves Guide No. 440 A5.” All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED
The electrically operated gas valve must be of the type that ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having
needs to be energized to remain open. jurisdiction.
Note: For electrical wiring diagrams, see “Installation Instructions” Electric (Snap-Action) Switches that may be field installed are:
Section, Pages 5-40 through 5-42. Part No. Description
Parts that may be used for installation of a 110 VAC Gas Shut- 423878 One Switch Kit
off Valve are: 423879 Two Switch Kit
Description Part No. 423880 Three Switch Kit
423881 Four Switch Kit
Electric Solenoid Valve, 3/4 in. NPT* 13707
436770 Two Switch Kit (no wire leads)
Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 in. NPT* 13708
Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 1/4 in. NPT* 550360 Each switch has a set of single-pole, double throw contacts
Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 1/2 in. NPT* 13709 rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277
Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 in. NPT* 13710 VAC.
Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 1/2 in. NPT* 550363 Note: A relay must be supplied by others if the equipment load
Electric Solenoid Valve, 3 in. NPT* 17643 exceeds the rated capacity of the switch.
Manual Reset Relay (110 VAC) 426151
Electrical wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance
*Valves are normally closed when de-energized.
with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) or the requirements of
the authority having jurisdiction.
ALARM INITIATING SWITCH REQUIREMENTS
If a fire alarm system is provided, the fire extinguishing system
The Alarm Initiating Switch can be field mounted within the
shall be connected to the alarm system in accordance with the
AUTOMAN release. The switch must be used to close a super-
requirements of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, so that the
vised alarm circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when
actuation of the extinguishing system will sound the fire alarm as
the AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire
well as provide the extinguishing function of the system.
alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen
area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting compo- If supervision of the electrical detection, electrical actuation or
nents along with a mounting instruction sheet. See Page 5-39 electrical power supply circuit is provided, it shall give prompt
for wiring information. audible or visual indication of trouble and shall be distinctive
The switch is rated 50 mA, 28VDC. from alarms or indicators indicating operation or hazardous
conditions as specified in NFPA 17A.
428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit
PAGE 4-76 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
NOTES:
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 5 – INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-1
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The installation information listed in this section deals with the Remove the 7/8 in. (22 mm) knockout on the left side
limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those of the AUTOMAN release box and remove the 1 in. (25
individuals responsible for the installation of the R-102 system mm) knockout on the right side of the tank-enclosure
must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an box. Install grommets in each (use ANSUL hose/grommet
R-102 training program. package (Part No. 418511)). Remove 1/4 in. plug from
Before attempting any installation, the entire system design back side of R-102 regulator and install fixed end of
must have been determined including: Nozzle Placement, secondary expellant gas hose (included in hose/grommet
Tank Quantity, Actuation and Expellant Gas Piping, Distribution package in 1/4 in. regulator outlet and wrench tighten.
Piping, and Detection System Requirements and an installation If not already done, mount both boxes to a rigid surface
sketch should be completed. using appropriate fasteners.

Fill tanks per instructions listed in Steps 3 and 4 on
INSTALLING RELEASE ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS Page 5-3.
For successful system performance, the regulated release assem- Next, route hose through grommets and wrench tighten
bly, regulated actuator assembly(ies), and tank-enclosure(s) or into 1/4 in. inlet of the adaptor on the tank in the tank/
tank-bracket assembly(ies) used must be located in areas where enclosure assembly. Also install hose to tank adaptor in
the air temperature will not fall below 32 °F (0 °C) or exceed regulated release and wrench tighten. See Figure 4-135
130 °F (54 °C). The R-102 system is limited to interior applica- in “System Design” for details of hose routing.
tions only. Also, the components must be arranged to conform to
the actuation and expellant gas line, and the distribution piping REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY/REGULATED
guidelines noted in “System Design.” ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY/DOUBLE TANK ENCLOSURE
1.
16 1/2 IN.
CAUTION (419 mm)
Use only an AUTOMAN Regulated Release assembly or 13 13/16 IN.

(351 mm)
OEM Release/Bracket Assembly. The regulator in this 1 3/8 IN.
(35 mm)
assembly is specifically designed to allow a regulated flow
of expellant gas into the agent tank(s). Absence of this
regulator could cause the tank(s) to rupture or create an
improper system discharge.
23 1/2 IN.

Mount the regulated release assembly, OEM Release (597 mm)
Assembly, and each regulated actuator assembly required 19 7/16 IN.
by completing the following steps: See Figures 5-1, 5-2, and (494 mm)
5-3.
a. Select a rigid surface for mounting the enclosure. The
mounting locations must allow the regulated release
assembly and the regulated actuator assembly(ies) to
be within the limitation of the actuation and expellant gas 7 1/2 IN.
(191 mm)
line lengths and must be able to support the weight of
the assembly(ies). When the OEM Release Assembly is
mounted inside a cabinet, clearances shall be provided FIGURE 5-1
000287
for unrestricted movement of the release assembly
components within the closed cabinet.
b. Detach cover from the enclosure. Remove agent tank
from enclosure and the expellant gas line hose from the
tank/adaptor assembly.
c.
Secure enclosure box to selected mounting location
using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of
fasteners depending on the mounting surface.
d. When mounting a 6 gallon manifolded system (or a 6
gallon individual piped system) it is critical that each
mounting box is located as shown in Figure 5-3. There
must be a 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) space between each box.
Less than 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) will cause interference with
the covers, and more than 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) will cause a
gap between the two hose grommets which will expose
the hose to possible tampering or damage.
SECTION 5 – INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 5-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued)

3 GALLON TANK BRACKET
OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY 3 1/2 IN.
6 IN. 0.38 IN. 5.37 IN. (89 mm)
7 IN. (10 mm) (136 mm)
(152 mm) 1.25 IN.
(178 mm)
1.00 IN. (32 mm)
(25 mm)
9 3/4 IN.
(248 mm)
8 5/8 IN.
15.00 IN. (219 mm)
18.5 IN. (381 mm)
(470 mm)
000787
7 13/16 IN.
000499
(198 mm)
2.50 IN.
(64 mm)
0.62 IN. 5.75 IN. 0.63 IN.

(16 mm) (146 mm) 009478
(16 mm)
SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE/REMOTE RELEASE
FIGURE 5-2
9 IN.
(229 mm)
MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS
6 5/16 IN.
(160 mm) 13 13/16 IN.
LOCATION OF (351 mm)
GROMMETS
23 1/2 IN.
(597 mm)
19 7/16 IN. 19 7/16 IN.
(494 mm) (494 mm)
0.28 IN. (7 mm) 7 1/2 IN.

5/16 IN. HOLE (TYP)
(8 mm) (191 mm)
000290
FIGURE 5-3
000788 FIGURE 5-4
CAUTION
Do not install cartridge at this time. Failure to comply may
result in accidental system actuation.
2.
Mount each tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly by
completing the following steps:
a. Select a rigid, vertical surface for mounting the enclosure
or bracket. (Keep in mind that the 3 gallon tank is taller
than the bracket. (See Figure 5-4) Allow sufficient space
for convenient piping and removal).
b.
Remove tank from enclosure or bracket, and secure
enclosure or bracket to the mounting location using the
four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners
depending on the mounting surface.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-3
MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued)

STAINLESS STEEL TANKS
3. Fill each agent tank by completing the following steps: 1/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (57 mm ± 3 mm)
2
FROM THE TOP OF THE COLLAR
a.
Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from tank fill FOR THE 3.0 GALLON TANK
opening. Visually inspect tank adaptor to determine OR
bursting disc is in place and that silver side is away from 1 3/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (45 mm ± 3 mm)
tank. See Figure 5-5. FOR THE 1.5 GALLON TANK
000292
FIGURE 5-6
c.
Reinstall adaptor/tube assembly to tank by tightening
until metal to metal contact is achieved between bottom
of adaptor and tank collar.
4. Place each tank into its enclosure or bracket.
FIGURE 5-5
000291
! CAUTION
b.
Safety glasses should be worn during transfer opera-

tions of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant.
Avoid contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact,
flush immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation
persists, contact a physician. Do not take internally.
If taken internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with
water or milk and contact a physician immediately.
Place plastic funnel in fill opening and fill tank with 1.5
(5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low
pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 5-6 for detailed
filling tolerances. Note: Use a funnel with a screen to
stop any foreign material from entering the tank. See
Figure 5-6.
CAUTION
During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F
to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD
AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result
in agent entering gas hoses and regulator potentially
causing system malfunction.
PAGE 5-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING Pipe Hanger Recommended Guidelines

Before the following procedures can be completed, the piping 1. Space hangers as follows:
design must already be determined; and the actuation and Maximum Recommended
expellant gas lines from the regulated release, each regulated Pipe Size Distance Between Hangers
actuator, and each tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly
should already be installed. 3/8 in. 5 ft (1.5 m)
These installation instructions are identical for single, double, 2.
Hangers should be placed between elbows when the
and multiple-tank systems except for the quantity of tanks and distance is greater than 2 ft (0.6 m).
hazard areas to be covered.
Piping Installation
General Piping Requirements 1. Starting at the tank, pipe directly from the union located on
1.
Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless the tank adaptor. A reducing fitting may be necessary to
steel pipe and fittings. conform to the distribution piping.
2.
Based on the piping sketch developed in the “System
NOTICE Design” section of this manual, install the supply line and
position the tees at points where branch lines must be
Do not use hot-dipped galvanized iron
installed. See Figure 5-7.
pipe or fittings in the agent distribution
piping. 3. Run all branch lines to the hazard area and connect each
nozzle. (Make certain all piping is securely bracketed.)
2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all

ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and
scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
3. The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in or
above the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with
pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second
male thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clock-
wise around the threads, away from the pipe opening.
NOTICE FIGURE 5-7

000302
Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe
opening as the pipe and nozzles could 4. Make certain all threaded connections are properly tight-
become plugged. ened. Threaded connections located in the protected
area(s) and above the hood must be sealed with Teflon
Thread sealant or compound must not be pipe tape, as a minimum. Apply pipe tape to male threads
used as it could plug the nozzles. only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end of the
thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the agent
distribution.
4. Distribution piping may be run independently or two agent
Pipe tape minimizes friction between bearing surfaces of
tanks may be manifolded together and run to the prede-
the threads when threading pipe to fittings. The resulting
termined hazard area. Only agent tanks expelled from the
heat may expand the pipe threads before the joint is prop-
same cartridge may be manifolded.
erly made. When the pipe threads cool and contract in
NOTICE
the fitting, the joint may become loosened causing cooking
grease to migrate into the distribution piping, and/or leakage
Closely follow the piping requirements at the fitting during a pressure test or agent discharge.
for each size system, as detailed in the N
ote: When required to provide pressure testing of pipe
“System Design” section, when installing or a system discharge test, it is recommended that all pipe
distribution piping. connections utilize Teflon pipe tape.
5. Install the correct nozzle(s) for each hazard area as previ-
5.
Branchline tees can be used to create more than one ously designed. Some nozzles are required to be properly
branch and can be installed as a thru tee, side outlet tee or oriented before they are positioned for aiming.
bull tee.

2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-5
INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Continued) CRITICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.
Design and installation must be performed by qualified
Piping Installation (Continued)
personnel.
6. Aim the nozzles to a pre-determined aim point in accor-
2. The Agent Distribution Hose shall not be concealed within
dance with the instructions in the “System Design” section.
or run through any wall, floor, or partition, and shall not have
Using the Nozzle Aiming Device will aid in the aiming
any direct exposure to excessive heat or radiant flame from
process. The device clamps to the nozzle and emits a small
the cooking appliances.
laser light that reflects on the surface where it is aiming. If
the nozzle is used with a Swivel Adapter, the nozzle with the 3. Strong cleaning solutions or chemical substances must not
Aiming Device can be rotated to the exact aiming point and come in contact with the Agent Distribution Hose. These
then tightened to hold that angle. may include acids, solvents, fluxes with zinc chloride, or
other chlorinated chemicals. In case of contact, rinse down
7. Before installing blow-off caps on nozzles, apply a small
the Agent Distribution Hose with water and dry thoroughly.
amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the
opening in the nozzle tip. Also apply a small amount to coat 4.
Contact with foreign objects, sharp edges, wiring, or
the exterior of the blow-off cap. DO NOT FORCE SILICONE substances must be avoided.
GREASE INTO NOZZLE TIP OPENING OR FILL CAP 5. Bending and flexing of Agent Distribution Hose on move-
WITH GREASE. able appliances (i.e. those factory equipped with casters)
should be limited to pulling and pushing the appliances in
NOTICE or out for cleaning or maintenance. The hose shall never
be installed or bent tighter than a 3 in. (76 mm) radius (6 in.
When using old style metal blow-off cap
(152 mm) diameter) loop.
with spring clips, make certain the spring
clip rotates freely on the metal cap and 6. The Agent Distribution Hose must not be kinked, twisted,
coat the outside of the cap, including the or have sharp bends when installed or when equipment is
clip, with Dow Corning No. 111 silicone pulled away from the wall.
grease. 7. Make sure that all fittings are tightened properly.
8. Adequate means must be provided to limit the movement
8. Make certain a blow-off cap is in place over each nozzle of castered appliances. A 36 in. (914 mm) long Restraining
tip. These blow-off caps are designed to keep grease from Cable supplied with the agent distribution hose is required
building-up on the nozzle orifice and inhibiting the agent to be used for all castered appliances using the Agent
flow. See Figure 5-8. Distribution Hose. (Refer to Restraining Cable Installation
Instructions.)
9.
The Restraining Cable requires periodic maintenance to
ensure proper operation.
10. The Restraining Cable must be attached to the wall and
appliance anytime the distribution hose is connected to the
appliance.
000303 000304 000305
11.
Do not over-extend the Agent Distribution Hose when
FIGURE 5-8
moving equipment (for cleaning, maintenance, etc.).
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTALLATION

INSTALLING THE AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTRUCTIONS
(FOR CASTERED/MOVEABLE EQUIPMENT)
Before proceeding, CAREFULLY read all instructions, including
Agent Distribution Hose can be used in the supply line or appli- all CRITICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
ance branch line to allow a castered cooking appliance with
castered supports with nozzles attached directly to the appliance, General Requirements
to be moved out of its normal operating position for service or
1. The Agent Distribution Hose (which is part of the Discharge
cleaning.
Hose and Restraining Cable Kit), is 0.5 in. (13 mm) diameter
x 60 in. (1524 mm) long and is provided with two male NPT
CAUTION swivels for ease of installation.
The following instructions must be followed in their entirety. 2. Maximum of six Agent Distribution Hoses can be used in
Failure to do so may result in the R-102 Fire Suppression each agent distribution piping network.
System not functioning properly due to incorrect installation. 3. Agent Distribution Hose can only be used for castered appli-
ances or appliances setting on castered supports.
PAGE 5-6 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTALLATION appliance in its normal operating position, check the hose
INSTRUCTIONS (Continued) bend to make certain the bend is not less than a 3 in.
(76 mm) bend radius (6 in. (152 mm) diameter).
General Requirements (Continued)
4. Maximum of two Agent Distribution Hoses are allowed in the OVERHEAD VIEW
supply line. However, the Agent Distribution Hose can only
be used at the castered appliance. W
APPLIANCE
A
5. Maximum of two Agent Distribution Hoses are allowed in L
the branch line. An acceptable installation scenario would L
PIPE (NOT
be providing separate protection of two (side-by-side) appli- SUPPLIED IN KIT)
ances, each with its own Agent Distribution Hose and tether,
supplied from the same appliance branch.
6. The Agent Distribution Hose is to only be used in the distri-
bution piping of a single 1 1/2 or 3 gal (5.7 or 11.4 L) tank or
FLEX
two manifolded 3 gal (11.4 L) R-102 extinguishing systems HOSE
or larger systems using combinations thereof. However, the
Agent Distribution Hose is never to be used to manifold two
3 gal (11.4 L) tanks. TETHER
6-8 IN (152-203 mm) OFFSET
CENTER TO CENTER PIPE (SUPPLIED ONLY WITH
Installation Requirements HENNY PENNY FRYER NOZZLE KIT
(PART NO. 434455))
1. Agent Distribution Hose must be connected to 3/8 in. NPT FIGURE 5-9
black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel fittings. The 007828
connection from hose to fitting requires a 1/2 in. x 3/8 in.

reducing coupling (Part No. 436228). All Agent Distribution Restraining Cable Installation
Hose connections must be sealed with pipe tape. When Important: A Restraining Cable shall always be permanently
applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread on attached to the appliance and wall directly behind the appliance
the swivel ends of the hose. Wrap the tape (two turns when the Agent Distribution Hose is installed. Removal of this
maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the cable shall only occur when the Agent Distribution Hose is not
hose end fitting opening. installed to the appliance.
2. All connections of distribution piping to Agent Distribution See Figure 5-10 for mounting the Restraining Cable to the wall.
Hose for castered appliances, with distribution nozzles See Figure 5-11 for mounting the Restraining Cable to the back
installed/affixed to the appliance, must be located behind of an appliance.
the cooking equipment in an area protected from obstruc-
RESTRAINING CABLE – WALL-MOUNTED OPTION
tions and possible wear or damage.
3. 3/8 in. schedule 40 pipe will need to be run from the hose SHEET METAL
connection to the distribution nozzle(s) installed/affixed WALL COVERED
STUD WALLS
to the appliance. Pipe must be installed and adequately
secured at a height at or below the cooking surface of the WALL
MOUNT
appliance. (See Figure 5-14.) BRACKET
SCREW
4. All existing distribution pipe and fitting limitations must be EYE BOLT
observed and followed. Each flex distribution hose used 4 SELF TAPPING
is to be considered as an equivalent length of 3/8 in. pipe SHEET METAL
SCREWS
when calculating the acceptable length of allowable distribu-
tion pipe. Each hose is 5 ft (1.5 m) long. FIGURE 5-10
008088
5. All hose-to-pipe connection fittings are to be oriented in a RESTRAINING CABLE – APPLIANCE-MOUNTED OPTION
vertical down position.
6. The hose connections must be positioned below an eleva-
BACK OF
tion where the hose could be exposed to the radiant or APPLIANCE
convected heat generated by normal cooking operations
(such as the horizontal plane of appliance’s cooking
surface), or to heat from appliance exhaust. As a minimum
NUT NYLON
height, the hose connection shall be no lower than 30 in. LOCK NUT
EYE
(762 mm) from the floor. The distribution piping shall be BOLT
supported and secured per local plumbing practices. WASHER
WASHER
7. Hose ends are to be offset 6 to 8 in. (152 to 203 mm) center
to center of fittings (See Figure 5-9) to maximize hose life FIGURE 5-11
008089
expectancy and facilitate appliance movement. With the
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-7
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS (Continued) RESTRAINING CABLE
INSTALLATION PACKAGE
A – RESTRAINING CABLE
Restraining Cable Installation (Continued)
RESTRAINING CABLE – HENNY PENNY-MOUNTED OPTION B – STAPLE F – 5/16 IN NYLON
BRACKET LOCK NUT
G – 5/16 IN
BACK OF X 5/16 IN
APPLIANCE C – 3/4 IN. X #8 WASHERS
SCREWS (4) (2)
B – STAPLE BRACKET H – SCREW

EYE BOLT
D – EYE BOLT
PHILIPS
SCREW I – SNAP
EYE HOOK
I – SNAP E – 5/16 IN HEX NUT
NUT HOOK
WASHER
A – RESTRAINING
FIGURE 5-12 CABLE
008090 I – SNAP HOOK
1. The Restraining Cable must be connected from the appli- D – EYE BOLT
ance to the wall or some other structurally sound object

capable of restraining the castered appliance from being EYE BOLT FASTENING
able to be pulled or pushed out to a point that will result in HARDWARE
strain or stress to the Agent Distribution Hose. FIGURE 5-13
007829
2. The Restraining Cable should be installed in line with the
Agent Distribution Hose.
Final Installation Guidelines and Checkout Procedures
3.
For sheet metal covered walls, the Restraining Cable
After the Agent Distribution Hose and the Restraining Cable is
Assembly includes four 3/4 in. x #8 self tapping sheet
properly installed, carefully push the appliance back to its normal
metal screws, and a Restraining Cable Bracket. Securely
operating position. Check that the hose does not have sharp
attach the Restraining Cable Bracket to the sheet metal
bends, and is not kinked, twisted, or caught on anything behind
covered wall using the 3/4 in. x #8 self tapping metal screws
the appliance.
provided.
1. Verify the Restraining Cable limits the travel of the appli-
4.
For mounting to wall studs, the Restraining Cable Assembly
ance and prevents the application of any pull force or
includes one screw eye lag bolt, 5/16 in. x 2.5 in. (64 mm) long.
bending stress on the Agent Distribution Hose or hose-to-
5.
Locate a structural area (frame) on the rear side of the pipe connections.
equipment that is in line with the wall attachment. Note: It
2. Make certain there are no sharp bends and kinks in the
may be necessary to contact the appliance manufacturer for
hose when pulling out the cooking equipment.
a suitable location. Drill a 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) diameter hole.
Use caution when drilling hole, so that internal components 3. The Agent Distribution Hose should always be in a vertical
are not damaged. natural loop, never having any bends greater than a 3 in.
(76 mm) radius (6 in. (152 mm) diameter), hose twists, or
6. The Restraining Cable Assembly also includes a 5/16 in.
sharp bends. (See Figure 5-14.) If any of these conditions
threaded eye-bolt, 5/16 in. hex head nut, 5/16 in nylon lock
exist, the hose and/or hose connections will require installa-
nut, and two 5/16 in. flat washers. Thread the included hex
tion modifications.
nut onto the eye-bolt. Slide one washer onto the eye-bolt
threads next to the nut. Then, slide the eye-bolt through
the drilled hole and place a washer and nylon locknut onto
the eye-bolt on the inside frame of the equipment. Tighten
securely.
7. Attach one of the snap hooks (included in the Restraining
Cable package) on the end of the Restraining Cable to the
wall bracket and the other snap hook to the eye-bolt (See
Figure 5-13). After snap-hooking the assembly, seal the
Restraining Cable Loops to the wall bracketry and appliance
connection hardware with Lead Wire Seal (Part No. 197).
N
ote: For the Henny Penny Pressure Fryers that utilize the
ANSUL Henny Penny Fryer Nozzle Kit, Part No. 434455,
the 5/16 in. philips screw supplied in the Henny Penny
Fryer Nozzle Kit, the 5/16 in. eye nut, and 5/16 in. washer
included in the Restraining Cable Assembly Kit, must be
used. (See Figure 5-12).
PAGE 5-8 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
AGENT DISTRIBUTION HOSE INSTALLATION INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE
INSTRUCTIONS (Continued) Before installing any actuation or expellant gas line, the design
must be determined; and the regulated release assembly, each
Final Installation Guidelines and Checkout Procedures
regulated actuator assembly and each tank-bracket assembly
(Continued)
should be securely mounted.
SIDE VIEW
General Piping Requirements
ACCEPTABLE HOSE ORIENTATION
AGENT
1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galva-
DISTRIBUTION nized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings.
3/8 IN
PIPING
W
2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all
A ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and
L
L scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt.
3. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe
tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male
thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise
MAXIMUM around the threads, away from the pipe opening.
HEIGHT
NOTICE
OF HOSE
CONNECTION IS
MIN. TO BE BELOW
30 IN THE APPLIANCE
(762 COOKING
Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe
mm) SURFACE opening, as this could cause possible
blockage of the gas pressure.
Thread sealant or compound must not
be used.
UNACCEPTABLE HOSE ORIENTATION 4.

When connecting actuation or expellant gas line piping,
SHARP BENDS TWISTING FATIGUE install a 1/4 in. union near the tank inlet for easy disassem-
bly later.
Note: Expellant gas line cannot use stainless steel braided
hose.
Actuation Gas Line

FIGURE 5-14 Install actuation gas line from the regulated release mechanism
007830 high pressure side outlet (side opposite regulated outlet) through
4.
Return the appliance to its normal operating position in the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the
accordance with NFPA 96. Means shall be provided to following steps:
verify that the appliance returns to its original designed 1.
Remove the 1/8 in. plug from high pressure side outlet.
positioning. Failure to do so may result in undue stress and Install the appropriate fitting for additional equipment attach-
fatigue of the hose and hose connections. ment as required. A 1/4 x 1/8 in. reducing fitting is required
to connect the 1/4 in. actuation line. See Figure 5-15.
2. Run piping or hose up through the regulated release assem-
bly enclosure knockout to the inlet on top of each regulated
actuator assembly used within the system.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-9
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE

(Continued)
Actuation Gas Line (Continued)

4.
If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated
3. The total combined length of the actuation gas line from the
release assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total
regulated release assembly to all regulated actuator assem-
combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line
blies must not exceed 20 ft (6 m) when using an LT-20-R
must not exceed 30 ft (9.1 m). See Figure 5-17.
nitrogen cartridge, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, a 101-10
CO2 cartridge, or a 101-20 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 5-16. 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one
Note: When using stainless steel actuation line, a maximum
90° elbow.
of 17.5 ft (5.3 m) of hose may be used.
Typical Arrangements for a One Device Connection to Cartridge Receiver
000293
Typical Arrangements for a Two Device Connection to Cartridge Receiver
000294
Typical Arrangements for a Three Device Connection to Cartridge Receiver
000295
Typical Arrangements for Regulator Connections

TO TANK IN TO REGULATED ACTUATOR
BRACKET OR ASSEMBLY(IES)
ENCLOSURE
(PIPE OR HOSE)
000296
TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED

RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY
SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANKS
NOTE:
WHEN PIPE IS USED, ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 (STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK
IRON, HOT-TIPPED GALVANIZED, CHROME-PLATED, OR STAINLESS STEEL.
FIGURE 5-15
PAGE 5-10 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS

LINE (Continued)
Actuation Gas Line (Continued)
ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R,

LT-30-R, 101-20 OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM LENGTH – 20 FT (6.0 m),
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES
NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS
LINE LENGTH TOTALS
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
AUTOMAN REGULATED
RELEASE ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 5-16
000775
ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH

A “DOUBLE-TANK” OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE
MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH – 30 FT (9.1 m),
MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS – 9
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT
GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED
IN COMBINED TOTALS
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
AUTOMAN REGULATED
RELEASE ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 5-17
000298
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-11
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE 4.

If an actuation gas line is connected to the regulated
(Continued) release assembly along with an expellant gas line, the total
combined length of the gas lines must not exceed 30 ft
Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Release Assembly (9.1 m) when using a “double-tank” nitrogen cartridge or a
Install expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly 101-30 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 5-17.
regulator in the enclosure by completing the following steps: 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines,
1. The regulated release assembly is shipped with a facto- eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one
ry-installed regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets, 90° elbow.
one at the back and one at the bottom. The bottom outlet
connects the expellant gas hose to the agent tank which Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Actuator
is mounted inside the enclosure. The back outlet is sealed Assembly
with a 1/4 in. plug. Install expellant gas piping from the regulated actuator assembly
2.
Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank mounted regulator through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by
inside the enclosure. completing the following steps:

TWO TANK, THREE TANK, AND MULTIPLE TANK 1. The regulated actuator is shipped with a factory-installed
SYSTEMS: regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets 135° from
each other. One outlet is sealed by a 1/4 in. plug and the
If the expellant gas piping is required because an additional other contains the expellant gas hose for the agent tank
tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly is being installed, which will be mounted within the enclosure. Connect expel-
the plug installed in the back outlet must be removed. (See lant gas hose to the agent tank that is mounted inside the
Figure 5-6 for proper connections to the regulator.) enclosure.
3. Pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator back 2. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the regulator side outlet
outlet through one of the knockouts provided in the enclo- and pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regula-
sure. tor through the knockout provided in the enclosure to a
The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly. A maximum of
release assembly must not exceed 30 ft (9.1 m) when one tank-enclosure or tank-bracket assembly is allowed per
using a “double-tank” nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2 regulated actuator assembly.
cartridge. See Figure 5-18.
The maximum length of the expellant gas line from the
regulated actuator to the tank-bracket assembly must not
EXPELLANT GAS LINE exceed 30 ft (9.1 m). See Figure 5-19.
MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS – 9 3. A total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90°
elbows and one tee. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow.
EXPELLANT GAS LINE
REGULATED RELEASE
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 5-18
000776
REGULATED
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 5-19
000777
PAGE 5-12 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS Actuation Gas Line – 15* Tanks Maximum – Using 1/4 in.
LINE (Continued) Stainless Steel Hose
Note: Not for use with expellent gas line.
Actuation Gas Line From Remote Release(s) to Regulated
Actuators 1. Maximum hose length cannot exceed 17.5 ft (5.3 m). See
Figure 5-21.
Install actuation gas piping from the remote release(s) to the
regulated actuators by completing the following: 2. Maximum of five regulated actuators allowed.
1. Pipe the 1/4 in. actuation gas line from the 1/4 in. outlet in 3.
Actuated with Remote Release (Part No. 433485) or
the remote release receiver, through the knockout provided Regulated Release Assembly (Part No. 429853).
in the top of the release enclosure, to each regulated actu-
ator assembly.

The maximum length of the actuation gas line from the
remote release to all regulated actuators must not exceed
100 ft (30.4). See Figure 5-20.
2. A maximum of nine tees and twenty elbows are allowed in
the actuation piping. Two 45° elbows equal one 90° elbow.
See Figure 5-20.
3. A safety relief valve (Part No. 15677) must be installed in
the actuation piping. See Figure 5-20.
SAFETY RELIEF 9 TEES 20 ELBOWS

VALVE MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE – 100 FT (30.4 m) MAXIMUM

CHECK
EXPELLANT VALVE
GAS LINE
REMOTE RELEASE
MECHANISMS
REGULATED (5 MAXIMUM)
ACTUATOR AGENT TANK AND BRACKET OR
WITH TANK (TYP.) AGENT TANK IN ENCLOSURE (TYP.)
FIGURE 5-20
000301
1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE OPTIONS

42 IN. (1066 mm)
SAFETY MAX. HOSE 1/4 IN. STAINLESS
RELIEF VALVE LENGTH (TYP.) STEEL HOSE CHECK VALVE
MAXIMUM OF
5 REMOTE
RELEASE
MECHANISMS
(PART NO.
433485) OR
ONE
REGULATED
RELEASE (PART
REGULATED ACTUATOR NO. 429853)
WITH TANK MAXIMUM OF 5
REGULATED ACTUATORS
NOTE: WHEN MULTIPLE RELEASE ASSEMBLIES ARE UTILIZED, A 1/4 IN. CHECK VALVE (PART NO. 25627)
WILL BE REQUIRED AFTER EACH REGULATED RELEASE.
NOTE: *15 TANKS MAXIMUM REFLECTS THE UTILIZATION OF THREE TANK REGULATED ACTUATORS. FIGURE 5-21
000301
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-13
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM “Scissor” Style Linkage Installation

Before the following procedures can be completed, the detection 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two
design must already be completed. These installation instruc- 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector
tions are identical for single, double, and multiple-tank systems bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the
except for the number of hazard areas to be covered. terminal detector bracket. See Figure 5-22.
NOTICE
Inform customer that fusible links should
not be exposed to ammonia-based chemical
cleaners or steam. COMPRESSION
FITTING NUT
NOTICE
1/2 IN. STEEL
COMPRESSION FITTING
No attempt is to be made to disassemble, FIGURE 5-22

000306
repair, or clean a Model SL or Model A-PC
NOTICE
fusible link. The complete assembly must
be replaced if there is any sign of potential
malfunction. Do not use zinc die cast compression connec-
tors on the detection conduit lines as these
1. Based on the requirements listed in the “System Design” will not withstand the normally high tempera-
section, mount the detectors in their predetermined loca- tures experienced in the plenum area.
tions.
2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release mechanism 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening,
trip hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as
for mounting the detectors. shown in Figure 5-23.
Note: Before assembling the conduit and fittings, make

certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of
chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of
oil and dirt.
When changing the direction of conduit, use only ANSUL
pulley elbows, except, at the top of the regulated release, it
is acceptable to use the Conduit Offset Assembly.
Note: If stainless steel scissor linkage is used in the system 002463
while using conduit offset assembly, the following limitations

must be observed:
• Maximum number of elbows – 16
• Maximum number of detectors – 15
• Maximum length of 1/2 in. EMT Conduit – 150 ft (45.7 m)
Part No. 435546 and 435547 are the “scissor” style series
and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assem-
blies use a detector linkage assembly which does not
002464
require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage
FIGURE 5-23
assembly while it is being fed through the detection system.
PAGE 5-14 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)
“Scissor” Style Linkage Installation (Continued)

3. Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through
the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing
the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set
screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 5-24.
FIGURE 5-26
000311
2-3 IN.
(51-76
mm)
LOCKING
CLAMP
FIGURE 5-27
000312
FIGURE 5-24
000309 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during instal-
4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope lation of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other
through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope,
the terminal detector. leaving an adequate length of spare wire rope between the
locking clamp and the weighted device.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If wire rope requires splicing, make certain
splice is at least 12 in. (305 mm) away from When attaching the weighted device to the
any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in.
interference. (76 mm) of wire rope for each detector linkage
for proper installation.
5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as

shown in Figure 5-25 or as shown in Figure 5-26 if the termi- Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be
nal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, approximately 18 in. (457 mm) of excess wire rope between
and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (51 to 76 the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be
mm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 5-27. Use utilized when the linkage is put in place.
the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve 7.
Install detector scissor assembly as shown in Figure
Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the 5-28. Note that the AUTOMAN release or remote release
stop sleeve. assembly is located on the left side of the detector bracket.
Slightly crimp the two assembly “boot-hooks” over the
cable with pliers so the cable is captured under each hook
but the whole assembly can move from side to side. Center
the assembly in the detector bracket.
FIGURE 5-25
000310
AUTOMAN RELEASE OR
REMOTE RELEASE ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 5-28
000503
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-15
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) 10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 441042 or Part No. 441041)
on left side of the release mechanism, with the movable
“Scissor” Style Linkage Installation (Continued) flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge
8. Hook the fusible link on the AUTOMAN release or remote receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever
release assembly side of the hook assembly, then pull the portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the
fusible link to the opposite side and complete the hookup release mechanism. See Figure 5-32.
as shown in Figures 5-29 and 5-30. The top of the hook
assembly must be inside the bracket stiffeners. The hook
assembly with the ANSUL fusible link in place must be
located toward the terminal detector side of the bracket.
COCKING PIN
COCKING LEVER
FIGURE 5-29
000504
FIGURE 5-32
009461
11.
Using long handle cocking lever (Part No. 441041) or
wrench on short handle cocking lever (Part No. 441042),
pull down to raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented
surface moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the
up position. See Figure 5-33.
FIGURE 5-30
000324
9. Install the linkage and the correct ANSUL approved fusible

link in the remainder of the detector brackets. Make certain
all detector linkages are positioned against either the front
or back upper lip of the formed detector bracket. See Figure
5-31.
FIGURE 5-33
000320
FIGURE 5-31
004429
PAGE 5-16 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull
all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking
“Scissor” Style Linkage Installation (Continued) clamp.
12. Remove cocking lever and fully insert Lock Pin (Part No. 16. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position and inspect the base
438031) through the hole in the trip lever on the left side of of the wire rope locking clamp to make certain that there is
the release. (The release mechanism cannot be actuated, a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in.
nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock pin is (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer
removed.) See Figure 5-34. locking clamp assembly and the cable lever assembly. See
Figure 5-36. (If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or
3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on
locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.)
CAUTION
Make certain the hook assembly with the ANSUL fusible
link in place is located toward the terminal detector side of
each bracket. Failure to do so may restrict travel of detec-
tion line, causing system to malfunction.
LOCKING
CLAMP
LOCK PIN
PROPERLY
INSTALLED
1/4 IN. MINIMUM
(6.4 mm)
3/8 in. MAXIMUM
(9.5 mm)
FIGURE 5-34
009462 CABLE
LEVER
13.
Make certain tension lever is in the “UP” position. See ASSEMBLY
Figure 5-35.

FIGURE 5-36
000323
CAUTION
Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu-
ation could cause system discharge.
17. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and

Placing in Service Section, Page 6-3 – 6-4, of this manual.
FIGURE 5-35
000322 18. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope
14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately
link, is in the detector bracket, located fully toward the termi- 2 in. (51 mm) of wire rope below the locking clamp.
nal detector side.
NOTICE
Due to the close adjustment between the trip
hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only
the particular fusible link(s) selected for instal-
lation in each detector, including terminal
detector, to ensure correct adjustment when
performing Steps 15 and 16.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-17
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION

REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION
PULLEY
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ELBOW
To install a remote manual pull station complete the following

steps:
WIRE ROPE
1.
Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure
OVAL SLEEVE
cover is detached and lock pin is properly inserted within the
regulated release mechanism. CABLE
LEVER
NOTICE RELEASE
MECHANISM
Failure to follow these instructions may REMOTE

lead to system actuation. MANUAL PULL
STATION BREAK ROD
2.
Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated
release assembly and that the regulated release assembly
is in the cocked position. JUNCTION BOX RING HANDLE
(SUPPLIED BY OTHERS)

If regulated release assembly does not have lock pin
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the “Semi-Annual FIGURE 5-37
009463
Maintenance,” Page 8-1, in “Maintenance Examination”
section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the
following installation steps. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION – OPTION 1
(ONE WIRE ROPE CONNECTED TO CABLE LEVER ASSEMBLY)
3. Select a convenient location in the path of egress for mount-
PULLEY
ing the pull station(s) to the wall. The pull station should PULLEY TEE ELBOW
6 IN. (153 mm) MINIMUM
be installed at a height of 42 in. to 48 in. (1067 mm to FROM CRIMP SLEEVE NO PULLEY ELBOWS
ALLOWED WHERE TWO WIRE
1219 mm) in accordance with the authority having jurisdic- TO PULLEY TEE
ROPES ARE PRESENT
tion and the American Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. 2 IN. (51 mm) MINIMUM
FROM CRIMP SLEEVE USE TWO
A maximum of two manual pull stations can be connected TO COMPRESSION OVAL SLEEVES
FITTING (PART NO.
to each AUTOMAN release. 4596)
RELEASE
INSTALLATION FOR REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION MECHANISM
UTILIZING EMT CONDUIT ONLY
1. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull
station within a system must not exceed 150 ft (45.7 m).
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used JUNCTION BOX REMOTE
(SUPPLIED BY OTHERS)) MANUAL PULL STATION
per each manual pull station is 20.
2. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (102 mm) junction FIGURE 5-38
009464
box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted,
with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION – OPTION 2
(TWO WIRE ROPES CONNECTED TO CABLE LEVER ASSEMBLY)
cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right
side up and readable.
3. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), PULLEY TEE PULLEY
and pulley elbows from each pull station junction box to OVAL ELBOW
SLEEVE
regulated release assembly as necessary. See Figure 5-37.
See Figures 5-38 thru 5-40 for optional methods of installing
RELEASE
wire rope when utilizing a pulley tee. MECHANISM
CABLE
LEVER
JUNCTION BOX REMOTE

(SUPPLIED BY OTHERS) MANUAL PULL STATION
FIGURE 5-39
009465
PAGE 5-18 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL

STATION (Continued)
NOTICE
INSTALLATION FOR REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION
UTILIZING EMT CONDUIT ONLY (Continued) Make certain that wire rope rides on top
and in center of pulley sheave. If the 50
REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION APPLICATION – OPTION 3 ft (15.2 m) wire rope has been spliced
to accommodate a longer run, do not
allow the spliced ends to be within 6 in.
(153 mm) of any pulley elbow or conduit
adaptor.
OPTIONAL:
PULLEY TEE CAN 5. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction
BE LOCATED IN box is used).
THIS POSITION
6.
Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope
through cable lever guide holes and back through the oval
crimp sleeve. See Figure 5-37.
CABLE
LEVER
7. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve. (Use the
OVAL
National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve
SLEEVE RELEASE Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop
MECHANISM sleeve.) See Figure 5-37.
Note: When utilizing flexible conduit for remote manual pull
station or mechanical gas valve installation, refer to “Installation
of Remote Manual Pull Station or Mechanical Gas Valve Utilizing
Flexible Conduit” instructions on pages 5-22 through 5-34.
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
NOTICE
FIGURE 5-40
009466
Mechanical gas valves are designed for
indoor installation only.
MINIMUM OF To install each Mechanical Gas Shut-off Valve complete the

6 IN. (153 mm)
following steps. (All gas valve installation and testing shall be
2 - OVAL SLEEVES
(PART NO. 4596) TO AIR
made in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.)
CYLINDER
MINIMUM OF NO ELBOWS ALLOWED FOR GAS Note: Mechanical gas valve air cylinder(s) can be installed
6 IN. (153 mm) WHERE TWO WIRE VALVES OR in regulated release assemblies and also regulated actuator
ROPES ARE PRESENT RELEASE
CABLE assemblies. Installation in either is the same.
SPLICED WIRE CONTINUOUS WIRE LEVER
ROPE ROPE 1.
FOR PULL
STATIONS
cover is detached and lock pin is properly inserted in the
PULLEY TEE (PART
NO. 427929) ONLY regulated release mechanism.
TO EITHER GAS VALVES OR PULL
STATIONS. MIXING IS NOT ALLOWED.
NOTICE
TWO WIRE ROPES CONNECTED BETWEEN A PULLEY
ELBOW AND A PULLEY TEE
Failure to follow these instructions may
FIGURE 5-41 lead to system actuation.
008393
4. Feed wire rope from the AUTOMAN release through conduit

2.
and pulley elbows and pulley tee, if provided, to the pull
release assembly and that the regulated release mecha-
station junction box. Follow the instructions for assembling
nism is in the cocked position.
the pull station and block assembly and attaching the wire
rope to the pull station pull knob (see Figures 5-70 through
If regulated release mechanism does not have lock pin
5-85). inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the “Semi-Annual
Mainten
ance,” Page 8-1, in “Maintenance Examination”
following installation steps.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-19
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued)

Note: Two air cylinders are necessary only if the old style
3. Remove plug from cartridge receiver. See Figure 5-42. pulley tee (Part No. 15342) is utilized. If new style pulley
tee (Part No. 427929) is utilized, only one air cylinder is
CARTRIDGE RECEIVER required. Individual wire ropes can be run from each gas
valve to a single air cylinder. See Figure 5-45.
5.
To install second mechanical gas valve shut-off system,
locate second air cylinder and bracket assembly adjacent to
first assembly and over the two remaining 7/32 in. (6 mm)
PLUG
holes provided on right side of the enclosure. Assemble
second cylinder with screws, lockwashers, and nuts as
required. Wrench tighten. See Figure 5-45.
SYSTEMS USING PULLEY TEE (PART NO. 15342)
FIGURE 5-42 WIRE ROPE STOP
000339 SLEEVES
4. Locate air cylinder and bracket assembly over the two 7/32
in. (5.6 mm) holes on right side of the enclosure. Assemble AIR CYLINDER
RODS
with screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Wrench tighten. See
Figure 5-43. Air cylinder(s) can also be mounted in the
inverted position, allowing for direct exit out the knockout(s)
in the bottom of the enclosure. See Figure 5-44.
FOR MOUNTING ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
STOP SLEEVE
WIRE ROPE
MOUNTING
BRACKETS
MOUNTING BRACKET
000342
AIR CYLINDER
1/8 IN. COPPER
ROD
TUBING AND FITTINGS
SYSTEMS USING PULLEY TEE (PART NO. 427929)

NOTE: N
O ELBOWS ARE ALLOWED BETWEEN
AUTOMAN RELEASE AND PULLEY TEE
STOP
SLEEVES (2)
1/8 IN. COPPER

TUBING AND FITTINGS
FIGURE 5-43
000340
TOP KNOCKOUTS
MECHANICAL
GAS VALVE
AIR CYLINDER
004655

FIGURE 5-45
000342
BOTTOM R-102 REGULATED

KNOCKOUTS RELEASE
FIGURE 5-44
000341
PAGE 5-20 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVES

6. Install the necessary 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings for
each air cylinder to the accessories piping arrangement on
the regulated release mechanism. See Figures 5-43 and
5-45.
NOTICE
Do not kink 1/8 in. copper tubing or form CORRECT WAY:
a bend too close to a fitting. Secure each VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE
fitting without over tightening. Over tight- BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE
ening could result in pressure leakage or BODY.
line separation at actuation.
000343
! WARNING
7.
CORRECT WAY:
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE
WRONG WAY:
certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting BEING INSERTED PREVENTS
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. WRENCH APPLIED
the gas valve. Failure to comply may result in serious AT THIS POINT
STRAINS VALVE
personal injury or death. Gas valve installation shall be BODY.
performed by qualified individuals in accordance with local
jurisdiction requirements.
Install mechanical gas valve to its selected location in gas

line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined
appliances being protected upon actuation of the system.
Mechanical gas valves may be mounted in any convenient 000344
horizontal or vertical position. See Figure 5-46.
a. Use new pipe, properly reamed and cleaned of metal
chips. ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
b. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow

shown on gas valve. To avoid cracking the gas valve
casting, do not overtighten pipe connections. If pipe
tape, paste, spray, or similar lubricant is used, extra care
should be taken to avoid overtightening. Apply lubricant
to male threads only.
CORRECT WAY:
c. Wrench tighten pipe to gas valve. DO NOT USE GAS VISE GRIP APPLIED NEXT
VALVE AS A LEVER WHEN INSTALLING OR VALVE TO PIPE BEING INSERTED
PREVENTS EXCESS
DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. See Figure 5-46. STRAIN ON VALVE BODY.
d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve.
e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance
000345
with the authority having jurisdiction.
CORRECT WAY:
f. The total length of wire rope allowed for each valve must
WRENCH APPLIED NEXT
not exceed 150 ft (45.7 m). TO PIPE BEING
INSERTED. PREVENTS
g. The maximum number of pulley elbows allowed for each EXCESS STRAIN ON WRONG WAY:
VALVE BODY.
gas valve is 20. WRENCH APPLIED AT
THIS POINT STRAINS
VALVE BODY.
000346
FIGURE 5-46
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-21
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE

8. Install 1/2 in. conduit, and pulley elbow(s) from the mechan-
ical gas valve to regulated release assembly enclosure as TRIGGER
necessary.
9. Beginning at the regulated release assembly, thread the
end of the wire rope through hole provided in air cylinder
rod. See Figure 5-43.
10.
Feed end of wire rope through conduit and each pulley
elbow.
Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of
pulley sheave. If the 50 ft (15.2 m) wire rope has been
spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the
000349
spliced ends to be within 12 in. (305 mm) of any pulley
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION
elbow or conduit adaptor.
11. Remove side cover on gas valve and thread end of wire FIGURE 5-48
rope through hole in cocking lever. Slide stop sleeve (Part 14. Raise air cylinder rod “UP” to its maximum extended posi-
No. 26317) on to wire rope and crimp. (Use the National tion. See Figure 5-43.
Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock
15. Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack.
No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) Make
certain crimp is on top of trigger, with wire rope curled under
lever. See Figure 5-47.
NOTICE
DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL
GAS VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Valve
WIRE ROPE
System must have gas valve cocked and
air cylinder rod extended “UP” to its
STOP SLEEVE maximum extension before completing
next step.
TRIGGER
16. Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder rod, make certain all
slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See
Figure 5-43.
17. Cut off any excess wire rope approximately 3/4 in. (19 mm)
from end of stop sleeve.
FIGURE 5-47
000347 18.
Note: If utilizing a pulley tee to operate either a single
12. With the end of wire rope already threaded through hole in mechanical gas valve from two AUTOMAN releases or
air cylinder rod, slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) onto wire two mechanical gas valves from one air cylinder in an
rope and leave loose. Do not crimp stop sleeve at this time. AUTOMAN release, see Figures 5-49 and 5-50 for instal-
See Figure 5-43. lation instructions. Maximum length of wire rope to each
AUTOMAN release must not exceed 150 ft (45.7 m) and
13.
Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 5-48. maximum number of elbows must not exceed 20.
Note: A valve cocking tool is available. Order Part No.
416018. TWO AIR CYLINDERS – ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE
ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE TO AIR CYLINDER IN TO AIR CYLINDER IN
“AUTOMAN” “AUTOMAN”
RELEASE NO. 1 RELEASE NO. 2
TRIGGER
6 IN. (153 mm) MINIMUM NO PULLEY ELBOWS
FROM CRIMP SLEEVE ALLOWED WHERE TWO
TO PULLEY TEE WIRE ROPES ARE PRESENT
2 IN. (51 mm) MINIMUM USE TWO OVAL

FROM CRIMP SLEEVE SLEEVES (PART
TO COMPRESSION NO. 4596)
FITTING
000348
FIGURE 5-49
COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION 001091
PAGE 5-22 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) Note: When installing flexible conduit, make sure to feed wire
ONE AIR CYLINDER – TWO MECHANICAL GAS VALVES rope through conduit directly from the spool. DO NOT pre-cut
wire rope. Feeding pre-cut rope through flexible conduit will
cause excessive kinks in the rope, making it difficult to install.
TO AIR CYLINDER IN
MINIMUM OF 6 IN. AUTOMAN • The maximum distance from an AUTOMAN release to a
(153 mm) RELEASE
mechanical gas valve is 75 ft (22.8 m) with a maximum of
TWO OVAL SLEEVES
(PART NO. 4596) 4-90° bends in the flexible conduit and 4 pulley elbows.
MINIMUM OF 6 IN.
(153 mm)
NO ELBOWS ALLOWED
WHERE TWO WIRE ROPES
• Any portion of the flexible conduit system can be substituted
ARE PRESENT with EMT conduit provided the proper connections are used
SPLICED WIRE ROPE
CONTINUOUS to join the two types of conduit.
WIRE ROPE
PULLEY TEE • All bends in the flexible conduit system must have a minimum
(PART NO. 427929) ONLY bend diameter of 6 in. (153 mm).
• When the flexible conduit is used to make 90° bends between
NOTE: EITHER BOTH MUST BE
GAS VALVES OR BOTH MUST
an AUTOMAN release and a mechanical gas valve, the bends
BE PULL STATIONS. MIXING IS must start at the gas valve. No pulley elbows can be used
NOT ALLOWED.
between the bends. If more than 360° of bends are needed,
then pulley elbows can be used.
• When the flexible conduit is used to make 90° bends between
an AUTOMAN release and a pull station, the bends must start
FIGURE 5-50 at the AUTOMAN release. No pulley elbows can be used
008394
between the bends. If more than 360° of bends are needed,
NOTICE then pulley elbows can be used.
• When not utilizing a conduit offset 2-45° bends in the flexible
When connecting two mechanical gas valves
conduit are allowed between the strain relief fitting on top of
to one air cylinder, make certain both gas
the AUTOMAN release, and the location where the flexible
valves properly operate (close) when the air
conduit is supported.
cylinder rod is in the down (operated) position.
• When installing flexible conduit, conduit should be secured at
intervals not to exceed 5 ft (1.5 m) and before and after each
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR bend. Flexible conduit CANNOT slide in the clamp(s) used for
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT mounting. Make certain mounting clamp(s) do not pinch the
conduit. The following style clamp (‘P’ clip) (Part No. 436150)
Flexible conduit allows for quicker installations and the conve- is a suitable type for use on flexible conduit. See Figure 5-51.
nience of being able to route the cable over, under and around
obstacles.
Flexible conduit can be used as a substitute for standard EMT
conduit or can be used with EMT conduit.
NOTICE
FIGURE 5-51
008141
Flexible conduit can be used only with NEW
Remote Pull Station (Part No. 434618) and
mechanical gas valve installations. Flexible TABLE 1
conduit is intended for indoor use ONLY. Mechanical
Manual Pull Gas Valve Detection
90° Cable Bends 4 4 N/A
These instructions address the components and installation of
Bend Diameter – in. (mm) 6 (153) 6 (153) N/A
both the pull station (Part No. 434618) and the flexible conduit.
Mechanical Corner Pulley 15 4 N/A
Conduit Secured Max. ft (m) 5 (1.5) 5 (1.5) N/A
Design Requirements
Conduit Max. Length ft (m) 140 (42.6) 75 (22.8) N/A
• Flexible conduit cannot be utilized in detection systems. Conduit Offset / 2-45° Bends 1 0 N/A
• Flexible conduit inserts (Part No. 434347) can ONLY be used (Only between strain relief
with the flexible conduit system. fitting and support location)
• The maximum distance from an AUTOMAN release to a pull Pulley Tees 1 0 N/A
station is 140 ft (42.6 m) with a maximum of 360° (for example, Splices 2 0 N/A
3-90° and 2-45° bends, 2-90° and 4-45° bends, etc.) bends in
the flexible conduit, one pulley tee (refer to pages 5-31 through
5-33 for detailed splicing instructions), two splices, and 15
pulley elbows.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-23
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR

MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(Continued)
Installation Instructions
Note: Do not add any type of lubricants inside or on the flexible
conduit. Make certain stainless steel wire rope is clean and
debris-free.
The flexible conduit should be routed along the same path that
EMT conduit would normally be run. Stainless steel wire rope
should be routed through the flexible conduit as it is in EMT
conduit.
DO NOT cut the wire rope to length before feeding it into the
flexible conduit. The wire rope should be fed directly from its
spool through the flexible conduit. This method will help avoid FIGURE 5-53
possible kinking of the wire rope which can make it difficult to feed. 007986
3.
Unscrew the nut from the EMT conduit connector and
! CAUTION remove the compression ring. Discard ring. See Figure
5-54.
Flexible conduit must not be located within 6 in. (153 mm) of
the hood or in areas exceeding 130 °F (54 °C). Also, do not
route flexible conduit in areas where conduit can be crushed,
pinched, or broken.
NUT
Flexible conduit can be used to connect an AUTOMAN release

to a remote pull station or mechanical gas valves.
DISCARD
Before starting the system installation, take a few minutes to RING
plan the layout of the system. This will minimize the amount of
components needed to complete the installation. Once the path
of the flexible conduit has been determined, verify that the layout
does not exceed the design requirements.
Connecting the Flexible Conduit to the AUTOMAN Release,

Electrical Junction Box, or MECHANICAL Gas Valve FIGURE 5-54
007987
1. Layout the flexible conduit and secure it in place. Note: If 4.

Thread the stainless steel wire rope through the EMT
inner liner is crimped, turn a drywall screw into the end to conduit connector and flexible conduit insert. Make certain
open it. See Figure 5-52. thread in flexible conduit insert is facing out toward end of
connector. See Figure 5-55.
IF SLIGHTLY CRIMPED,
TURN IN DRYWALL
SCREW TO OPEN
FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT
INSERT
THREADS
MUST FACE
OUT
FIGURE 5-52
007985
FIGURE 5-55
2.
Starting at the AUTOMAN release, connect the conduit 007988
connector using the supplied nut. Use only ANSUL conduit

fittings (Part No. 55813). See Figure 5-53.
PAGE 5-24 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR 8.

Thread the wire rope through the flexible conduit. See
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT Figure 5-59. (If a splice is required in the flexible conduit,
(Continued) proceed to “Splicing Installation Instructions.”
Connecting the Flexible Conduit to the AUTOMAN
Release, Electrical Junction Box, or Mechanical Gas Valve
(Continued)
5. Tighten the nut to the connector body, locking the flexible
conduit insert in place. See Figure 5-56.
TIGHTEN
CONNECTOR
NUT TO LOCK
IN FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT
INSERT
FIGURE 5-59
007992
9.
Slide the flexible conduit into the strain relief until it is
approximately 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) from the bottom of the flex-
ible conduit insert. See Figure 5-60.
FIGURE 5-56
007989
6. Loosen the nut on the strain relief and thread the wire rope
STOP FLEXIBLE
through a strain relief. See Figure 5-57. CONDUIT
APPROXIMATELY
1/16 IN. (1.6 mm)
FROM THE BOTTOM
OF INTERNAL
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
INSERT
LOOSEN
NUT
FIGURE 5-60
007993
10. Tighten the strain relief nut onto the strain relief. See Figure
5-61.
FIGURE 5-57
007990
7. Tighten the body of the strain relief to the conduit connector.

See Figure 5-58.
TIGHTEN NUT
ON STRAIN
RELIEF
TIGHTEN
STRAIN RELIEF
INTO CONDUIT
CONNECTOR
FIGURE 5-61
007994
FIGURE 5-58
007991
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-25

MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 4. Loosen the nut on the strain relief and thread the wire rope
(Continued) through the strain relief. See Figure 5-65.
Connecting Flexible Conduit to Pulley Elbows, Pulley
Tees, or Union Fittings LOOSEN NUT OF
STRAIN RELIEF
1.
Unscrew the nut from pulley elbow, pulley tee, or EMT
conduit connector and remove the compression ring.
Discard ring. See Figure 5-62.
DISCARD
RING
FIGURE 5-65
007998
5. Tighten the body of the strain relief to the conduit connector.

See Figure 5-66.
FIGURE 5-62
007995
TIGHTEN STRAIN
2.
Thread the stainless steel wire rope through the EMT RELIEF INTO CONDUIT
CONNECTOR
conduit connector and flexible conduit insert. Make certain
thread in flexible conduit insert is facing out toward end of
connector. See Figure 5-63.
THREADS FACING
AWAY FROM BODY
OF FITTING
FIGURE 5-66
007999
6.
Push the wire rope into the flexible conduit. See Figure
5-67.
FIGURE 5-63
007996
3. Tighten the nut to the connector conduit body, locking the

FLEXIBLE
flexible conduit insert in place. See Figure 5-64. CONDUIT
FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT
INSERT
LOCKED
IN PLACE
FIGURE 5-67
008000
FIGURE 5-64
007997
PAGE 5-26 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

(Continued)
Connecting Flexible Conduit to Pulley Elbows, Pulley

Tees, or Union Fittings (Continued)
7.
Slide the flexible conduit into the strain relief until it is
approximately 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) from the bottom of the flex-
ible conduit insert. See Figure 5-68.
SLIDE FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

APPROXIMATELY 1/16 IN.
(1.6 mm) FROM BOTTOM OF
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSERT
FIGURE 5-70
008003
2. Thread the wire rope through the small end of the block into
the bearing area to be used. See Figure 5-71.
FIGURE 5-68
008001
8. Tighten the strain relief nut onto the strain relief. See Figure
5-69.
TIGHTEN STRAIN
RELIEF NUT
SMALL END
OF BLOCK
FIGURE 5-71
008004
3. Pull slack, make a loop and insert the rope through the
larger opening in the bearing area. See Figure 5-72.
PUSH WIRE
ROPE THROUGH
LARGER
OPENING
FIGURE 5-69
008002
9.
Complete the same procedures on the other end of the
conduit fitting as described in Steps 1 through Step 8 above.
Assembling the Block

Note: For installations that do not require the tee block,
refer to page 5-34 for instructions.
1. The flexible conduit and wire rope should be connected to
FIGURE 5-72
the electrical box as described in “Connecting the Flexible 008005
Conduit to the AUTOMAN Release, Electrical Box, or
Mechanical Gas Valve.” See Figure 5-70.
Note: For 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) deep electrical box, the bearing
should be installed in the block’s shallow box location.
For 2 1/8 in. (54 mm) deep electrical box, the bearing should
be installed in the block’s deep box location.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-27
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR 7. Insert the supplied bolt into the bearing and tighten securely.
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT Take care not to strip the thread. See Figure 5-76.
(Continued)
Assembling the Block (Continued)

4. Pull wire rope out of the large end of the block. See Figure
5-73.
FIGURE 5-76
008009
Connecting the Block and the Faceplate

1. The block can be inserted into the faceplate at 90° intervals.
FIGURE 5-73 See Figure 5-77.
008006
5. Place the bearing against the wire rope. Make certain wire CAN BE INSERTED
AT 90° INTERVALS
rope is in the bearing groove. See Figure 5-74.
BEARING
GROOVE
FIGURE 5-77
008010
2. Thread the wire rope through the faceplate. Insert the block
FIGURE 5-74 by depressing the tabs and pushing the block into the face-
008007
plate until it snaps in place. See Figure 5-78.
6. Align the bearing against the wire rope so that the bearing
center and the hole in the block line up. See Figure 5-75.
PUSH
BLOCK INTO
FACEPLATE
FIGURE 5-78
FIGURE 5-75 008011
008008
PAGE 5-28 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 6. Insert the break rod into the two holes toward the top of the
(Continued) pull knob. See Figure 5-82.
Connecting the Block and the Faceplate (Continued)
3. Place the faceplate over the top of the electrical box and insert
the two screws to secure the faceplate. See Figure 5-79.
FIGURE 5-82
008015
7. Pull the excess slack back to the AUTOMAN release. This

FIGURE 5-79
008012 will pull the pull knob assembly in place. See Figure 5-83.
4. Thread the wire rope through the pull knob. See Figure 5-80.
FIGURE 5-83
008016
FIGURE 5-80 8. Hold the pull knob assembly against the faceplate. Rotate
008013
the pull knob assembly counterclockwise until the break rod
5. Thread the wire rope through stop sleeve and leave approxi- and pull knob snap in place. See Figure 5-84.
mately 1/4-3/8 in. (6.4-9.5 mm) extended past sleeve. Crimp N
ote: Take care in snapping in the ends of the break rod
stop sleeve twice using Crimping tool, National Telephone into the pull station side shields while rotating the entire
Supply Co. Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C-887). assembly.
Verify stop sleeve is secure on wire rope. See Figure 5-81.
LEAVE 1/4-3/8 IN.

(6-9 mm)
ROTATE
COUNTER-
CLOCKWISE
FIGURE 5-84
FIGURE 5-81 008017
008014
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-29
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR Installing Flexible Conduit Through a Conduit Offset
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 1.
Starting at the AUTOMAN release, connect the conduit
(Continued) connector using the supplied nut. Use only ANSUL conduit
fittings (Part No. 55813). See Figure 5-86.
Connecting the Block and the Faceplate (Continued)
9. Snap the pull tab onto the pull knob so it is legible. See
Figure 5-85.
FIGURE 5-86
007986
2.
Install Conduit Offset (Part No. 435961) into conduit
FIGURE 5-85 connector and tighten nut. See Figure 5-87.
008018
10. Refer to R-102 or PIRANHA installation manual to complete

system installation.
11.
Test Remote Manual Pull Station and Mechanical Gas
Valves in accordance with the “Testing and Placing
in Service – Testing Manual Pull Station and Testing
Mechanical Gas Valves” section of this manual.
FIGURE 5-87
008039
3. Install compression union to opposite end of conduit offset.

Tighten securely. See Figure 5-88.
FIGURE 5-88
008040
PAGE 5-30 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 7. Remove strain relief nut and install strain relief body into
(Continued) compression union. See Figure 5-92.
Installing Flexible Conduit Through a Conduit Offset
(Continued)
4. Install the conduit required to get above the ceiling. See
Figure 5-89.
FIGURE 5-92
008044
8. Install union nut over strain relief body and tighten nut. See
Figure 5-93.
FIGURE 5-89
008041
5. Install compression union to top of conduit riser. See Figure

5-90.
FIGURE 5-93
008045
9. Install strain relief nut onto strain relief body. Do not tighten
FIGURE 5-90 nut at this time. See Figure 5-94.
008042
6. Remove union nut and ring. Discard ring. Do not reinstall

nut at this time. See Figure 5-91.
FIGURE 5-94
008046
FIGURE 5-91
008043
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-31
INSTALLATION OF REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION OR Flexible Conduit Splicing (Allowed on Pull Station
MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT Installations Only)
(Continued) Note: Wire rope cannot be spliced together, only the flexible
conduit.
Installing Flexible Conduit Through a Conduit Offset
(Continued) Flexible conduit can be spliced together using EMT compression
fitting union (Part No. 79827).
10.
Push flexible conduit completely through conduit offset.
Flexible conduit should stop flush or +/– 1/2 in. (13 mm) 1. Remove rings from both ends of compression union. See
from bottom conduit fitting in AUTOMAN release. See Figure 5-97.
Figure 5-95.
FIGURE 5-97
008061
2. Install strain relief nut, strain relief, compression union nut,

FIGURE 5-95 flexible conduit insert and compression union over the flexi-
008047
ble conduit with wire rope installed. See Figure 5-98.
11.
Tighten nut on strain relief on top of conduit riser. See
Figure 5-96.
FIGURE 5-98
008049
3.
Tighten compression union nut onto union body, locking
flexible conduit insert in place. See Figure 5-99.
FIGURE 5-96
008048
12.
Complete the remainder of the flexible conduit and wire
rope installation to the pull station or the gas valve.
FIGURE 5-99
008050
PAGE 5-32 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

MECHANICAL GAS VALVE UTILIZING FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 7. Install strain relief nut, strain relief, and compression union
(Continued) nut on remaining section of flexible conduit and install flexi-
Flexible Conduit Splicing (Allowed on Pull Station ble conduit insert on wire rope. See Figure 5-103.
Installations Only) (Continued)
4. Install strain relief body into compression union and tighten.
See Figure 5-100.
FIGURE 5-103
008054
FIGURE 5-100
008051 8.
Push wire rope completely through remaining section of
5. Push flexible conduit into strain relief until it is approximately flexible conduit. See Figure 5-104.
1/16 in. (1.6 mm) from the bottom of the flexible conduit
insert, then tighten strain relief nut onto strain relief body.
See Figure 5-101.
FIGURE 5-104
FIGURE 5-101 008055
008052
9. Tighten compression union nut onto union body, securing
6.
Starting on the opposite end of the compression union, flexible conduit insert in place. See Figure 5-105.
remove the nut. See Figure 5-102.
FIGURE 5-102
008053
FIGURE 5-105
008056
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-33

(Continued)
Flexible Conduit Splicing (Allowed on Pull Station

Installations Only) (Continued)
10.
Tighten strain relief into compression union. See Figure
5-106.
FIGURE 5-108
007884
REMOVAL OF PULL KNOB

Insert a small screwdriver into slot at bottom of pull knob. Push
slightly on the screwdriver and turn pull knob clockwise, then
pull knob can be removed without breaking the glass rod. See
FIGURE 5-106 Figure 5-109.
008057
11. Push flexible conduit into strain relief until it is approximately

1/16 in. (1.6 mm) from the bottom of the flexible conduit
insert, then tighten strain relief nut onto strain relief body.
See Figure 5-107.
FIGURE 5-109
008059
REMOVAL OF PULL CAP

Using a small screwdriver or other blunt object, push on the back-
side of the pull cap. This will free the cap from the pull knob. See
FIGURE 5-107 Figure 5-110.
008058
12.
Complete the remainder of the flexible conduit and wire
rope installation to the pull station or the gas valve.
Component Removal Instructions
REMOVAL OF BLOCK
Using thumbs on the clips on each side of the block, press firmly in
the direction of the center of the block, at the same time pressing
in a slightly downward direction. As the clips on the side of the
block release from the pull station cover, the block will release
and be free to be removed from the backside of the cover. See
Figure 5-108.
FIGURE 5-110
008060
PAGE 5-34 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

(Continued)
Pull Station Installation without Pulley Block Assembly

Note 1: When using this installation option, the distance
from the back of the faceplate and the connection to the 1/2
in. EMT conduit compression fitting must not exceed 6 in.
(152 mm).
Note 2: To provide for a straight run of wire rope from the pull
station, an octagonal junction box with a center knockout in the
back of the junction box will be needed. See Figure 5-111. If a
pre-fabricated box or enclosure is to be used, it must allow the
pull station face plate to be firmly attached to the box or enclo-
sure, with a hole or knockout suitable for a 1/2 in. EMT threaded
conduit compression connector to be installed directly in line
with the center of the pull station pull knob.
FIGURE 5-111
008415
1. Attach a 1/2 in. EMT conduit compression fitting (Part No.

55813) to the back center knock out of the junction box.
If something other than a junction box is to be utilized, a
method of securing the flexible conduit or EMT conduit
directly in line with the center of the pull station pull knob
must be used. This will ensure that in the event of manual
operation the wire rope, exiting the back of the pull station
faceplate, will be pulled straight out without binding or result-
ing in undue additional pull force due to friction loss.
2. Remove the block assembly from the pull station face plate.
Thread the wire rope from either flexible conduit or 1/2 in.
EMT conduit attached to the back of the junction box or
fabricated enclosure through the back side of the pull station
faceplate and through the pull knob.
3.
Thread the wire rope through the stop sleeve (Part No.
26317) and leave approximately 1/4 in. to 3/8 in. (6.4 mm to
9.5 mm) extending past the sleeve.
4. Crimp the stop sleeve twice using the crimping tool National
Telephone Supply Co. Nicopress Sleeve Toll (Stock No,
51-C-887). Verify the sleeve is secure on the wire rope.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-35
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES

CORRECT WAY:
NOTICE VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE

BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY.
Electric gas valves are designed for indoor
installation only.
The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of

procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut-off Valves.
1.
001092
cover is detached and lock pin is properly inserted within the
regulated release mechanism.
CORRECT WAY:
NOTICE WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE

BEING INSERTED PREVENTS
WRONG WAY:
WRENCH APPLIED AT
EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY.
THIS POINT STRAINS
Failure to follow these instructions may lead VALVE BODY.
to system actuation.
2.
release assembly and that the regulated release mecha-
nism is in the cocked position. 001093

If regulated release mechanism does not have lock pin FIGURE 5-112
inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the “Semi-Annual
! WARNING
Maintenance,” Page 8-1, in “Maintenance Examination” 6.
following installation steps. Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain
3. main power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect
! WARNING main power may cause serious personal injury or death if
contact is made with energized wires
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make
certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting
the gas valve. Failure to comply may result in serious
NOTICE
personal injury or death. Gas valve installation shall be
performed by qualified individuals in accordance with local All electrical wiring/connections shall
jurisdiction requirements. be performed by qualified individuals in
accordance with local jurisdiction require-
Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas ments.
line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined
appliances being protected upon actuation of the system. Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with
Refer to manufacturer’s instructions (if provided). See any contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer
Figure 5-112. to manufacturer’s instructions and proper figure listed for
a. Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal chips. assistance.
b. Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal 7. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor-
pipe line with no more than a five degree (5°) lean either dance with authority having jurisdiction.
way. 8. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release
c. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure.
shown on gas valve. If snap-action switches have not been attached, go to
“Electric Switch” section and install them at this time by
d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve.
completing Steps 3 through 8.
e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance 9. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric (snap-ac-
with authority having jurisdiction. tion) switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual
4. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from each electric gas reset relay.
valve to manual reset relay enclosure. 10. Connect wiring from each electric (snap-action) switch
5. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve. to manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer’s
Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape instructions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance.
or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance 11. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor-
with authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures 5-122 — dance with authority having jurisdiction.
5-125 at the end of this section for typical wiring diagrams. 12. Properly return electrical power to the system.
PAGE 5-36 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES

The procedure for field installing an electric (snap-action) switch
is as follows:
! CAUTION
Unused wire leads will become “hot” when the system is TRIP LEVER PIN
operated. Failure to adequately cover exposed wire end(s) will
cause electric shock if touched.
! CAUTION TRIP LEVER PIN

Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain main
power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect main
power could cause personal injury or death if contact is made
with energized wires.
NOTICE FIGURE 5-113

001621
Except for the Alarm Initiating Switch, all
electrical wiring connections are to be made 3. Install one or two of the electrical (snap-action) switches into
outside the AUTOMAN release enclosure in the switch cover for the upper tab of the switch mounting
suitable enclosures in accordance with local bracket. See Figure 5-114.
jurisdiction requirements. Note: When applicable, always place the low voltage alarm
initiating switch(es) on the upper tab of the switch mounting
1.
Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure bracket. Never place low voltage alarm initiating switch(es)
cover is detached with lock pin properly inserted within the on the lower tab of the switch mounting bracket.
regulated release mechanism.
NOTICE
Failure to follow these instructions may lead
to system actuation.
2.
release assembly and that the regulated release mech-
anism is in the cocked position. If regulated release
mechanism does not have lock pin inserted or cartridge
removed, refer to “Semi-Annual Maintenance,” Page 8-1, in FIGURE 5-114
“Maintenance Examination” section, and complete Steps 2 009128
and 3 before completing the following installation steps. 4. Slide switch cover onto the upper tab of the switch mounting
If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole- bracket, ensuring that the tab slides into the channels on the
noid, it will also have two factory installed switches. back side of the switch cover, until the screw holes line up.
See Figure 5-115.
FIGURE 5-115
009129
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-37
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES (Continued) 8. Slide switch cover onto the lower tab of the switch mounting
5. Install two switch mounting screws and nuts, ensuring that bracket, ensuring that the tab slides into the channels on the
the screws pass through the holes in the cover, though back side of the switch cover, until the screw holes line up.
the mounting holes in each of the switches, and through See Figure 5-118.
the holes in the mounting bracket tab. See Figure 5-116.
Tighten screws securely.
Note: To meet UL requirements, the screws and nuts must
be installed. The switch cover is not intended to secure the
switches to the bracket.
FIGURE 5-118
009131
9. Install two switch mounting screws and nuts, ensuring that

the screws pass through the holes in the cover, though the
mounting holes in each of the switches, and through the
holes in the mounting bracket tab. Tighten screws securely.
FIGURE 5-116
009130 Note: To meet UL requirements, the screws and nuts must
6. Wire the upper switch(es) according to the switch wiring be installed. The switch cover is not intended to secure the
diagram provided with each release mechanism. See switches to the bracket.
Figure 5-117. 10.
Wire the lower switches according to the switch wiring
diagram provided with each release mechanism. See
Figure 5-117.
Note: All wiring to be performed by a certified individual(s).
11. Restore power to release assembly.
12. Before proceeding with Step 13, test electric (snap-action)
switches:
a.
Remove lock pin. With the AUTOMAN release in the
cocked or ready position, press the lever of each switch up.
If the switch is working properly there should be an audible
click. See Figure 5-119.
FIGURE 5-117
009145
7. If necessary, install one or two of the snap-action switches

into the switch cover for the lower tab of the switch mount- FIGURE 5-119
009133
ing bracket. These switches will be oriented opposite of the
upper switch(es) so that the levers will appear on the top b. With the AUTOMAN release in the fired position, press
side of the switch when mounted to the lower tab of the the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible
switch mounting bracket. click.
Note: Never place low voltage alarm initiating switch(es) on

When installing multiple switches, make certain all
the lower tab of the switch mounting bracket. switches transfer when the release operates. If they do
not, readjust their position.
PAGE 5-38 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES (Continued)

c. If an audible click is heard in the fired position adjust-
ments can be made by removing the snap action switch
and bending the lever slightly.
d. After adjustments repeat steps a and b. Then, recock
AUTOMAN release and install lock pin.
NOTICE
All electrical wiring/connections shall
be performed by qualified individuals in
accordance with local jurisdiction require-
ments
13. The switch may now be connected to compatible compo-

nents that are predetermined to shut off or turn on. Refer
to component manufacturer’s instructions for proper wiring
connections to compatible components.
NOTICE
Except for the Alarm Initiating Switch, all
electrical wiring connections are to be made
outside the AUTOMAN release enclosure in
suitable enclosures in accordance with local
jurisdiction requirements.
14. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor-
dance with authority having jurisdiction.
NOTICE
Do not connect power source to any relay,
contactor, or contractor supplied devices until
all other electrical connections are made.
Refer to proper section or manufacturer
supplied instructions for recommended instal-
lation procedures for these devices.
15. Turn off power source and connect power line to any relay,
contactor, or contractor supplied devices where used.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-39
INSTALLING ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 4. Install two switch mounting screws and nuts, ensuring that
The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit (Part No. 428311) consists of: the screws pass through the holes in the cover, though the
mounting holes in each of the switches, and through the
• Alarm Initiating Switch Assembly – Rated 50 mA 28VDC (or holes in the mounting bracket tab. Tighten screws securely.
0.1A, 125VAC)
Note: To meet UL requirements the screws and nuts must
• Switch Cover be installed. The switch cover is not intended to secure the
• Mounting Screw with Nut (4) switches to the bracket.
• Self-Tapping Screws (2) See NFPA 72, “National Fire Alarm Code,” Initiating Devices
section, for the correct method of wiring connection to the
• Trip Lever Pin
fire alarm panel.
• Hex Nut for Trip Lever Pin
• Instruction Sheet NOTICE
The Alarm Initiating Switch is installed in the AUTOMAN Release All connections to fire alarm control panels
on the upper tab of the switch mounting bracket. must be made by trained and qualified person-
1. Install round trip lever pin with hex nut provided. nel in accordance with fire alarm control panel
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Install the alarm initiating switch into the switch cover for
the upper tab of the switch mounting bracket. To install the
alarm initiating switch in the switch cover, slide the switch
into the large opening of the switch cover, oriented with the END-OF-LINE RESISTOR
OR NEXT DEVICE
FIRE ALARM
switch lever on the bottom side of the switch. See Figure CONTROL PANEL
5-120.
ALARM
CIRCUIT
004891
ALARM ALARM INITIATING
INITIATING SWITCH
SWITCH
SWITCH
COVER
SWITCH
MOUNTING
BRACKET
FIGURE 5-120
009137
INCORRECT
NOTICE
The alarm initiating switch must always
be installed on the upper tab of the switch
mounting bracket.
004905
3. Slide switch cover onto the upper tab of the switch mounting IN OUT IN OUT
bracket, ensuring that the tab slides into the channels on the CORRECT – SEPARATE INCOMING AND OUTGOING CONDUCTORS
back side of the switch cover, until the screw holes line up.
FIGURE 5-121
Note: With the exception of the Alarm Initiating Switch, all elec-
trical connections must be made in an approved electrical box
which also meets NEC article 314.40 (D) Grounding Provisions.
PAGE 5-40 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS

Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Gas Shut-off Valve
INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
POWER SOURCE MANUAL RESET

RELAY
ELECTRIC
SNAP-ACTION
SWITCH
ELECTRIC GAS VALVE
JUNCTION BOXES
(NOT SUPPLIED BY TYCO)
000273
WIRING SCHEMATIC
WIRING SCHEMATIC – RELAY PART NO. 426151

UPPER SWITCH LOWER SWITCH
BLACK BROWN
ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH RED RED
(SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH AUTOMAN
RELEASE IN THE COCKED POSITION) BROWN BLACK
RESET POWER
INDICATOR
TO TO
GND 4 3
A B SCREW 5
L2 NEUTRAL
110 VAC/60HZ
4 L1 HOT
RELAY COIL
6 3
9
3 2
4
7 1
1
MANUAL RESET RELAY

(PART NO. 426151)
ELECTRIC RATING
1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC GAS VALVE
1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC SEE NOTE 3 002462
13 Amp, 28 VDC
NOTE:
1. ______________ DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION.
2. __ __ __ __ __ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION.
3. CONTRACTORS: “UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING
THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ.”
4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP-ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY
FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC.
FIGURE 5-122
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-41
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)

Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load

RELAY
ELECTRIC
SNAP-ACTION
SWITCH
CONTACTOR
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
JUNCTION BOX
POWER ON-OFF
SWITCH
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
000276
WIRING SCHEMATIC

BLACK BROWN
RED RED
BROWN BLACK
ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH
RELEASE IN THE COCKED POSITION)
RESET POWER TO TO
INDICATOR 4 3
GND
RED
A B SCREW 5
4 L2 NEUTRAL
RELAY COIL
110 VAC/60HZ
6 3 L1 HOT
9
3 2
4
7 1
1 CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
POWER ON-OFF SWITCH

MANUAL RESET RELAY (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
(PART NO. 426151)
ELECTRIC RATING TO POWER SUPPLY

TO HEATING
1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC 220V/440V
ELEMENT LOAD
1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC
13 Amp, 28 VDC 002460
NOTE:
3. GAS VALVES: “UL LISTED ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATURAL, OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF APPROPRIATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING,
110V/60 HZ” OR ANSUL GAS VALVES, PART NUMBERS 13707, 13708, 13709, 13710, AND 17643.
FIGURE 5-123
PAGE 5-42 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued)

Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load, and Power Supply Switch

RELAY
ELECTRIC
SNAP-ACTION SWITCH OR
SWITCH THERMOSTAT
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
JUNCTION BOX
CONTACTOR
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
000279
WIRING SCHEMATIC

BLACK BROWN
RED RED
ANSUL SNAP-ACTION SWITCH BROWN BLACK

RELEASE IN THE COCKED POSITION)
TO TO
RESET POWER 4 3
INDICATOR
GND
RED
A B SCREW 5
L2 NEUTRAL
4 110 VAC/60HZ
RELAY COIL L1 HOT
6 3
9
3 2
4
7 1
1
CONTACTOR
SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
(CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
MANUAL RESET RELAY
(PART NO. 426151)
ELECTRIC RATING
1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC
1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC
13 Amp, 28 VDC TO HEATING TO POWER SUPPLY
ELEMENT LOAD 220V/440V
002461
NOTE:
3. CONTRACTORS: “UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING THAT OF THE
COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ.”
FIGURE 5-124
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 5-43
WIRING 24VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY

Refer to the following notes and wiring diagram for instruction on
wiring the 24VDC regulated release assembly.
CAUTION
Notes:
Do not install cartridge or remove tank assembly unless release
1. To be connected to a nominal 24VDC releasing circuit.
is cocked and ring pin is in place. Failure to comply may result
Input power: 750 mA at 24VDC nominal (1.02 at 30VDC
in accidental system actuation.
maximum).
If the following occurs during installation, the solenoid for the 2. Polarization: Observe polarity when connected to a release
releasing assembly may be damaged, rendering the system circuit; Terminal 4 positive, Terminal 8 negative.
inoperable. 3. All interconnecting wiring number 14 - 18 AWG.
1. If the release is electrically tripped (fired) with the ring pin 4. S1 and S2 contact ratings: 20A, 125/250 VAC 2 HP, 250 VAC
inserted such that the release mechanism is pinned in the 1 HP, 125 VAC.
cocked position.
5. SOL1 coil resistance: 28 OHMS +/- 10% at 77 °F (25 °C).
2. The lever arm of the mounted switch is bent such that the
6. Install the in-line supervisory device SDx across terminals
switch does not operate when the release roll pin is bottomed
No. 4 and No. 5. Refer to the releasing panel installation
out in the fired position.
instructions for supervisory device requirements. If an in-line
3.
Trying to recock the release mechanism while power is supervisory device is not required, install jumper J2 across
applied to the release through the alarm contacts. terminals No. 4 and No. 5.
For complete recharging, inspection, and maintenance instruc- 7. S3 contact ratings: 24VDC, 240mA maximum.
tions, refer to applicable fire suppression system manual.
THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER UPON
ACTUATION OF RELEASE
! WARNING
HIGH
TB1
Take extreme care when wiring release assembly. Failure to ACCESSORY
POWER
comply may cause an electrical shock, resulting in possible SOURCE
*
serious injury or death. S1
** NC
LOW
S2
UL LISTED OR SDX
SUPERVISED NC
RELEASING
CONTROL UNIT
J1
IN-LINE
SUPERVISORY DEVICE
TZ1
SOL1
VOLTAGE
TRANSIENT
SUPPRESSOR
* AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES, SEE S1 RATINGS

** FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER, ETC., SEE S1 RATINGS.
FIGURE 5-125
008468
PAGE 5-44 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
NOTES:
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 6 – TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 6-1
After the system has been completely installed, and BEFORE TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES
INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGE, the system must be tested at To test each mechanical gas shut-off valve complete the
the regulated release assembly. The testing information listed following steps:
in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of this
! WARNING
pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the 1.
testing of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current
ANSUL certificate in an R-102 training program. To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before
Note: AUTOMAN Release must be in the cocked position the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any
before testing manual pull station. Make certain to remove lock open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical
pin before performing pull station testing. or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas.
Failure to comply may result in serious personal injury or
TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION death.
To test each remote manual pull station, complete the following
steps: Turn gas line on.
1. W
ith the expellant gas cartridge removed, remove lock pin 2. Manually push each air cylinder rod to full ‘‘DOWN’’ posi-
from regulated release assembly cable lever. tion. The gas valve should close. If mechanical gas valve
does not trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make
2. On pull station, remove break rod from the pull station by certain wire rope is resting on each pulley elbow sheave.
inserting a small screwdriver into slot at bottom of pull knob If this does not correct the problem there may be too much
to facilitate turning the pull knob. Push slightly on the screw- slack in the line and it should be retightened.
driver and turn pull knob clockwise, then the pull knob can
be removed without breaking the glass rod. 3.
Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap
solution. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections
NOTICE where leaks appear and repeat test again to make certain
no other gas leaks exist.
Take care in removing the break rod from
4. If no gas leak is found, pull air cylinder rod to full ‘‘UP’’
the pull station side shields while rotating
position.
the break rod/pull knob assembly.
5. Recock mechanical gas valve.
3.
Pull ring handle on pull station. If the regulated release 6.
Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR
assembly is tripped easily, the remote manual pull station EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD
is properly installed. If the regulated release assembly does TO THE FULL ‘‘DOWN’’ POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This
not trip, remove pulley tee (if provided) and each pulley will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off.
elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of
pulley sheave. If this does not correct the problem, there is gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding
too much slack in the line and it must be retightened. any further.
4.
Recock regulated release assembly using cocking lever 7. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this
(Part No. 441042 or 441041) and reinstall lock pin (Part No. time.
438031).
8. Reinstall side covers to gas valve housing. Make certain roll
5.
On pull station, insert the break rod into the two holes pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot.
toward the top of the pull knob. Rotate the pull knob coun- Connect visual inspection seals (Part No. 197) on ANSUL
terclockwise. type valves. See Figure 6-1 (next page).
9. Make certain the regulated release mechanism is cocked
NOTICE with lock pin in place.
Take care in snapping in the ends of the
break rod into the pull station side shields NOTICE
while rotating the entire assembly.
If no other devices are being attached,
proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test
the detection system.
NOTICE
If no other devices are being attached,
proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test
the detection system.
SECTION 6 – TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 6-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES (Continued) valve, thus shutting off the gas line. If this does not happen,
turn power source off. Then re-examine all wiring connec-
tions for proper hookup. Refer to Figures 5-122, 5-123,
5-124, and 5-125 in ‘‘Installation Instructions’’ section for
typical wiring diagrams.
8. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism
using cocking lever (Part No. 441042 or 441041) and rein-
stall lock pin (Part No. 438301). Depress reset button on
manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON).
9.
VISUAL INSPECTION
SEAL (PART NO. 197) EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY.
This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off.

gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding
any further.
10. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this
time.
FIGURE 6-1
NOTICE
000359
TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES If no other devices are being attached,

To test each Electric Gas Shut-off Valve complete the following proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test
steps: the detection system.
! WARNING
1.
TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before The procedure for testing a field installed electric (snap-action)
the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any switch is as follows:
open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical
or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. NOTICE
Failure to comply may result in serious personal injury or
death. If an electrical gas shut-off valve is attached
to system, perform proper test procedure
Turn gas line on. for the gas valve first, before completing the
following steps.
2. Make certain electric (snap-action) switch is properly wired.
3.
Make certain all other devices connected to the manual
1. Turn power source on and if installed, depress reset button
reset relay are properly wired. Refer to typical wiring
on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). All electrical
diagrams in Figures 5-122, 5-123, 5-124, and 5-125 in
devices should be operating at this time.
“Installation Instructions” section.
2. Remove lock pin.
4.
Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap
solution. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections
where leaks appear. Repeat test again to make certain no
CAUTION
other gas leaks exist. Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be
5. If no gas leaks are found, turn power source on and depress actuated.
the reset button on the manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON)
to energize (OPEN) electric gas valve. 3. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull
6. Remove lock pin from regulated release mechanism. station. It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod
prior to operating pull station. (If installed, the manual reset
CAUTION relay will de-energize the electric gas valve, thus shutting
off the gas line.) All electrically-operated devices prede-
Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be termined to shut off or turn on should do so. If this does
actuated. not occur, turn power source off and make sure all wiring
is properly connected and retest. Refer to Figures 5-122,
7. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull 5-123, 5-124, and 5-125 in “Installation Instructions” section
station. (It may be necessary to remove the glass break for typical wiring diagrams.
rod prior to operating pull station.) Manual reset relay (RED
LIGHT OUT) will de-energize (CLOSE) the electric gas
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 6 – TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 6-3
TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH (Continued)

4. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism 3. Re-test the system by completing the following steps:
using cocking lever (Part No. 441042 or 441041) and rein- a. Make certain regulated release is cocked and lock pin is
stall lock pin (Part No. 438031). If a manual reset relay is inserted.
installed, depress the reset button (RED LIGHT ON). It will
also be necessary to re-light any pilot lights on the cooking b. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to
appliances. the ‘‘UP’’ position.
c. Install a new test link (Part No. 24916) on the terminal
NOTICE detector.
If no other devices are being attached, d. Lower the regulated release mechanism tension lever to
proceed to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the ‘‘DOWN’’ position.
the detection system. e. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
maximum clearance between the trip hammer assembly
and the cable lever assembly.
TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM
f. Remove the lock pin.
1. Test detection system by completing the following steps:
g. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detec-
a. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to tor to simulate automatic actuation.
the ‘‘UP’’ position.
4.
Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the
b. Remove the fusible link from the terminal detector and following steps:
install a test link (Part No. 24916). See Figure 6-2.
a. R
aise tension lever to ‘‘UP’’ position and install a proper-
ly-rated fusible link in the terminal detector.
b. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
(Part No. 441042 or 441041) and insert lock pin (Part
No. 438031).
c. Lower tension lever to ‘‘DOWN’’ position.
FIGURE 6-2
000363 d. For scissor-style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the
way toward termination end of detection run.
c. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket.
e. Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in.
F
or ‘‘clip on’’ style linkage, locate linkage in bracket
(9.5 mm) maximum clearance was maintained between
slightly toward termination end of detection run.
the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable
F
or ‘‘scissor’’ style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all lever assembly.
the way toward termination end of detection run.
d.
Lower regulated release mechanism tension lever to NOTICE
‘‘DOWN’’ position and remove lock pin.
Reset any electrical equipment that may
e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detec- have been affected by the system actu-
tor to simulate automatic actuation. ation.
f. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 4.
2. If the regulated release mechanism does not actuate, check f. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace
the following components and remedy any disorder as if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight
follows: stamped on cartridge.
a. Check the detector linkage for correct positioning. g. Install cartridge into the regulated release mechanism
receiver and each regulated actuator receiver. Hand
b. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming.
tighten firmly.
c. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free and
h. Remove the lock pin.
centered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley
elbow deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow.
d. Make certain that lock pin is removed.
e.
Make certain that regulated release mechanism is
cocked.
f. Make certain that tension lever is in ‘‘DOWN’’ position.
SECTION 6 – TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 6-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued)

i.
Install cover on regulated release assembly and each
regulated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate
fasteners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No.
197) in each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If
system is installed in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure
cover and secure with appropriate hardware or procedure.
CAUTION
Before installing cover, make certain detection tension
lever is secured in the “DOWN” position to enable
automatic detection and operation of the AUTOMAN
Regulated Release.
j. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or in a

permanent file.
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 7 – RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 7-1
The recharge information listed in this section deals with the RECHARGE
limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those
individuals responsible for the recharge of the R-102 system NOTICE
must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in an
R-102 training program. Determine the cause of system discharge and
correct immediately before performing system
For continued fire protection, the R-102 restaurant fire recharge.
suppression system must be recharged immediately after
use. Recharge procedures for single, double, and multiple-tank
systems are as follows. 1.
Remove the enclosure cover from the AUTOMAN
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator
CLEANUP PROCEDURES assembly.
Although there is no unusual cleanup procedure of ANSULEX 2. From tank in regulated release enclosure: Disconnect the
or ANSULEX Low pH agents, due to the alkaline nature of these expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly.
agents, they should be cleaned from kitchen surfaces within 24
From tank in mounting bracket or mounting enclosure:
hours after system discharge. The reaction from the wet chemi- Disconnect expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor
cal agent on cooking grease or oil produces a foamy bi-product inlet line(s).
that can be wiped up with a cloth or sponge. The following
3. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor
procedures should be followed:
outlet line(s).
! CAUTION 4. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank.

From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
Before attempting any cleanup, make certain that all fuel
bracket band, and remove each tank.
sources to the equipment to be cleaned have been shut off.
Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance electri- 5. Remove each tank adaptor/tube assembly and complete
cal controls have been de-energized to avoid any chance of the following:
electrical shock resulting from the cleaning process or from a. Remove o-ring and inspect for damage.
electrically conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue.
b.
Clean and coat o-ring with a good grade of extreme
Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to temperature grease and reinstall into adaptor groove.
room temperature. See Figure 7-1.
Do not use water to clean any appliances that contain hot c. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug.
grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent steaming d. Clean and inspect for free movement and corrosion. If
and/or spattering causing personal injury. necessary, replace Vent Plug (Part No. 74247).
e. Reinstall vent plug into adaptor body.
1. The agent is non-toxic; however, food product and cooking
grease/oil that has come in contact with the agent will no
longer be suitable for human consumption and should be
discarded.
2. Sponge up as much of the agent as possible using sponges
or clean rags. Dispose of these sponges or rags in a local
sanitary land fill site in accordance to local authorities.
! CAUTION O-RING
Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may

become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue FIGURE 7-1
comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with 000364
clean water.
3. Using hot, soapy water and either a clean cloth or sponge,

wipe away all foamy residue and thoroughly scrub all
surfaces that have come in contact with the agent.
4. After thoroughly cleaning all affected surfaces, adequately
rinse and allow to completely dry before re-energizing the
equipment.
SECTION 7 – RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 7-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
RECHARGE (Continued)
6.
CAUTION NOZZLE TIP
END NOZZLE
BODY
Do not flush pipe with only water or other non-approved
material, as this could cause internal corrosion, leading to
possible improper discharge.
HIGH
PRESSURE
Piping system must be flushed to remove any wet chemical PLASTIC
TUBING
residue. To prepare the system for flushing:
a. Pour the complete contents of one 32-oz. bottle of ANSUL
1/2 IN. NPT COMPRESSION
Flushing Concentrate (Part No. 79656) into an empty FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR
R-102 agent tank. One complete bottle is used for either
size tank, the 1.5 gallon or the 3 gallon.
b. Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clean water.
Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more
warm water to bring the fill level to within approximately
1 in. (25 mm) from the bottom of the fill opening.
c. Install adaptor/tube assembly and tighten.
7. To perform the flushing procedure, either secure heavy-duty
plastic bags to each nozzle (See Figure 7-2) or remove FIGURE 7-3
001740
each nozzle tip and strainer and attach plastic tubing. See
Figure 7-3. 8. If using the plastic tubing option, utilize 1/2 in. (13 mm) OD
plastic tubing with wall thickness not to exceed 0.062 in.
If using plastic bags, secure bags and proceed to Step 9.
(1.5 mm), and make certain it can withstand the pressures
If using plastic tubing, proceed to Step 8. of at least 90 psi (6.2 bar) expelled during the flushing and
blowdown procedures.
VENT HOLES
Also required is a container with some means of securing
tubing to it such as a five-gallon plastic pail and cover that
snaps onto the pail.
NOZZLE
FITTING To prepare the plastic tubing:
a. Cut as many tubing lengths as required, making them
long enough to reach the container from each nozzle
outlet.
b. Using the nozzle tip end, slide a length of 1/2 in. (13 mm)
plastic tubing over the rib on the nozzle tip and secure
with a 1/2 in. (13 mm) adjustable hose clamp. See Figure
HEAVY GAUGE 7-4.
PLASTIC BAG
c. In the pail cover, drill the number of holes required, large
FIGURE 7-2
001739 enough to insert 1/2 in. NPT fittings, with one additional
hole that can be used for venting.
d. Secure 1/2 in. compression fitting/threaded adaptors to
the pail cover, using 1/2 in. conduit nuts. See Figure 7-4.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 7-3
RECHARGE (Continued)
10. Fill each tank with 1.5 gal (5.8 L) or 3.0 gal (11.6 L) of
NOZZLE TIP END ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure
RIB ON NOZZLE
7-5. Note: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign
material from entering the tank. See Page 5-3, Figure 5-6,
1/2 IN. TUBING
for additional detailed filling instructions.
STAINLESS STEEL TANKS
1/2 IN. ADJUSTABLE
HOSE CLAMP 1/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (58 mm ± 3 mm)
2
FOR THE 3.0 GALLON TANK
OR
1 3/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (45 mm ± 3 mm)
FOR THE 1.5 GALLON TANK
1/2 IN. COMPRESSION

TUBING FITTING/THREADED
INSERT ADAPTOR
1/2 IN.
CONDUIT PAIL
NUTS COVER
000292
FIGURE 7-4
000367
RED PAINTED STEEL TANK
e.
Attach the tubing ends to the compression fittings. 1 IN. TO 1 1/8 IN. (26-28 mm)
Tubing inserts will be required. See Figure 7-4. FROM THE BOTTOM OF
THE FILL OPENING
f. Install nozzle/tubing ends to nozzle bodies in discharge FOR BOTH 3.0 GALLON AND
1.5 GALLON TANKS
piping.
g. Make certain each length of tubing is fastened to the pail
cover with the cover snapped securely to the pail.
9. Complete the following steps in the flushing procedure:
a. Connect discharge piping and expellant gas line to agent
tank adaptor.
b. Cock AUTOMAN Release Mechanism and insert lock
pin. Refer to Components Section of this manual for 000292a
FIGURE 7-5
detailed part numbers.
c. Install LT-30-R Cartridge; hand tighten.
d. Remove lock pin. CAUTION
e. If regulated actuators are included in the system, also During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F
install LT-30-R cartridges in them. to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD
f. Actuate system via pull station. AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in
agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing
g.
Wash out all system nozzles and strainers in warm system malfunction. See Page 5-3.
soapy water, rinse and return all nozzles and strainers
to their appropriate locations in the discharge piping.
11. Replace bursting disc (Part No. 416974) in adaptor assem-
h.
Verify that all nozzle types are correct. Utilizing the bly. Make certain silver side of disc is away from tank.
nozzle aiming device, ensure that all nozzles are
12.
Replace adaptor/tube assembly and tighten into place.
correctly aimed at the appropriate location on the appli-
Return and secure each tank in regulated release assembly
ance.
and mounting bracket/enclosure. Reconnect expellant gas
i. Apply a small amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone and distribution piping and/or as required.
grease across the opening of the nozzle tip. Install blow-
13. Raise tension lever to “UP” position.
off caps onto nozzles.
14.
Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
j. Remove empty tank.
(Part No. 441042 or 441041) and install lock pin (Part No.
438031).
PAGE 7-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
RECHARGE (Continued) 27. Remove lock pin.

15. Remove empty cartridge from regulated release assembly 28. Manually test the regulated release mechanism by operat-
and each regulated actuator assembly as required. ing the remote manual pull station.
29.
Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the
CAUTION lock pin.
Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or system 30. Reset all devices which were affected by the system actua-
may be actuated. tion. Refer to the following “Resetting” section.
16. Install properly-rated fusible links in all detectors except the RESETTING
terminal detector. Resetting Remote Manual Pull Station
Metal Stamped Style (Part No. 4835 and 54011)
NOTICE
Reset each remote manual pull station by completing the follow-
If actuation was caused by a fire situation, ing steps:
all fusible links must be replaced.
1. If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break
glass rod.
17. Install test link (Part No. 24916) in terminal detector. 2. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass
18. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. from station.
19. Remove the lock pin. 3. Press and position ring handle in proper location against
20. Using wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to cover and slide the replacement glass break rod (Part No.
simulate automatic actuation. 4834) through stud and handle.
4. Tighten set screw into stud.
NOTICE 5.
If no other resetting is required, refer to “Replacement
If regulated release mechanism does not Cartridge,” Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5.
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of the
“Testing Detection System” portion of the Molded Composite Style with Side Shields (Part No.
“Testing and Placing In Service” section, 434618 and 435960)
Page 6-3, of this manual. 1. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass
from station.
21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to “UP” 2. Insert the break rod into the two holes toward the top of the
position pull knob.
22. Install properly-rated, ANSUL approved, fusible link in termi- 3. Pull the excess slack back into the AUTOMAN Release.
nal detector. This will pull the pull knob assembly in place.
23. Cock the regulated release mechanism and install lock pin
NOTICE
(Part No. 438031).
24.
Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each Take care in snapping in the ends of the
bracket. break rod into the pull station side shields
while rotating the entire assembly.
25. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position.
26. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make
4. Hold the pull knob assembly against the faceplate. Rotate
certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to a maximum
the pull knob assembly counterclockwise until the break rod
of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip
and pull knob snap in place.
hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly.
5. Snap the PULL tab onto the pull knob so it is legible.
NOTICE 6.
If no other resetting is required, refer to “Replacement
If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum Cartridge,” Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5.
to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise
tension lever to “UP” position, raise trip
hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.6-12.7 mm), tighten
set screws, and repeat Steps 25 and 26.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 7-5
RESETTING (Continued) Resetting Electrical Gas Shut-Off Valve

Reset each electric gas shut-off valve by completing the follow-
Resetting Mechanical Gas Shut-Off Valve
ing steps:
Reset each mechanical gas shut-off valve by completing the
following steps:
! WARNING
! WARNING To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the
gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open
To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical
gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open devices that are capable of igniting gas. Failure to comply may
flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical result in serious personal injury or death.
devices that are capable of igniting gas. Failure to comply may
result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Make certain the power source is on.
2. Depress reset button on manual reset relay (red light on).
1. Remove side cover from gas valve housing.
Gas valve will resume its normal operating (open) position.
2. Extend air cylinder rod to full “UP” position. Air cylinder is
3.
located inside the regulated release assembly enclosure.
EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY.
3. Recock gas valve by pulling valve stem up so pin in stem This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off.
engages in cocking lever.
Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous
4.
Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any
EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO further.
THE FULL “DOWN” POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will
cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off.
time.

5.
If no other resetting is required, refer to “Replace
ment
gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding
Cartridge” and complete steps 1 through 5.
any further.
time.
6. Reinstall side cover to gas valve housing. On ANSUL type
valve, make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides
of the valve housing slot and secure visual inspection seal
(Part No. 197).
7.
If no other resetting is required, refer to “Cartridge
Replacement” and complete steps 1 through 5.
Resetting Electrical (Snap-Action) Switch

Reset the electrical (snap-action) switch by completing the
following steps:
1. Make certain the power source is on.
2. Electric (snap-action) switch is reset automatically when the
regulated release mechanism is recocked.
3. If no other resetting is required, refer to “Cartridge Replace
ment” and complete steps 1 through 5.
PAGE 7-6 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
RESETTING (Continued)
Resetting Pressure Switch

Reset the pressure switch by completing the following:
1. Depress the reset button(s) on the pressure switch cover.
The pressure switch assembly(ies) is located on the right
side of the regulated release enclosure. An audible click
will be heard to verify the pressure switch has resumed its
normal (non-actuated) condition.
2.
If no other resetting is required, refer to “Replace
ment
Cartridge” and complete steps 1 through 5.
REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE
To complete the recharge and resetting procedures:
1.
Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartridge.
Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below
weight stamped on cartridge.
2. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and
lock pin is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into
the regulated release assembly and each regulated actua-
tor receiver and hand tighten.
3. Remove lock pin.
4. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actua-
tor assembly, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in upper and
lower cover hole and secure.
CAUTION
Before installing cover, make certain detection tension
lever is secured in the “DOWN” position to enable auto-
matic detection and operation of the AUTOMAN Regulated
Release.
5. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or in a

permanent file.
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 8 – MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 8-1
The maintenance information listed in this section deals with

the limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system.
Those individuals responsible for the maintenance of the R-102
system must be trained and hold a current ANSUL certificate in
an R-102 training program.
Maintenance is required semi-annually. At the 12 year interval,
along with the normal maintenance exam, the tank(s) must be
hydro-tested and the regulator(s) must be flow tested.
Prior to performing the required maintenance steps, verify that
the R-102 system protection is designed and installed correctly
for the existing appliance and ventilation system configuration. If
not, make corrections as required.
LOCK PIN
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION PROPERLY
INSTALLED
Semi-annual maintenance procedures for single, double, and
multiple-tank systems are as follows.
FIGURE 8-2
NOTICE
009462
3.
Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and
Under certain circumstances hood and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping
duct cleaning operations may render the cap, and set aside in a safe location.
fire suppression system ineffective due to a
4. Check to make certain the actuation line used to connect
coating of cleaning chemical left on the detec-
the regulated actuator assembly(s) to the AUTOMAN regu-
tion equipment or mishandling of the system
lated release assembly is connected to the high pressure
by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it
side (right side) of the cartridge receiver in the AUTOMAN
is strongly recommended that the R-102
and that it is intact, with all fittings securely tightened. This
system be completely inspected and
includes any 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings used to
serviced by an authorized ANSUL distribu-
connect to the air cylinder for the ANSUL mechanical gas
tor immediately following any such clean-
valve.
ing operations.
CAUTION
1.
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator If the actuation line leaks pressure, the regulated actuator
assembly. assembly(s) may not operate. A severe leak can render
the entire system inoperable.
2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) or lock pin (Part No.
438031) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See
5. To check for leaks in the actuation line, a hand held or
Figure 8-1 or Figure 8-2.
electric vacuum pump may be used:
a. Disconnect the actuation line from the AUTOMAN regu-
lated release cartridge receiver and connect the pump to
the line.
b. The pump should pull a vacuum to 20 inches of mercury,
as shown on the gauge. Leaks should not exceed 5
LOCK BAR
PROPERLY inches of mercury loss within a 30 second time frame.
INSTALLED
c. If the gauge indicates a leak in the line, examine for
loose connections or damage. Repair or replace as
needed.
d. If leakage is not due to piping, disassemble the pneu-
matic actuator assembly(s) in the regulated actuator(s)
FIGURE 8-1
000321 and inspect the actuator and the o-ring in the actuator.
Repair or replace as needed.
Note: Vacuum pumps can be obtained from automotive
parts/supply stores.
SECTION 8 – MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 8-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) • Once the pneumatic actuator is disassembled, remove
Alternate Test Method: the actuator piston assembly and check the interior
walls of the actuator body for signs of damage or corro-
The actuation line can also be pressurized with either CO2 sion.
or N2 from a cartridge or with dry air, CO2, or N2 from a
larger cylinder. • Check the o-ring for elasticity or cuts. Replace, if
necessary. Clean and coat o-ring with a good grade of
a. Cock the AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and extreme temperature silicone grease and reinstall.
carefully insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) or lock pin (Part
No. 438031). See Figure 8-9 or Figure 8-10. • Re-assemble the actuator assembly(s), and reconnect
all actuation and all expellant piping or hose.
b. Make certain expellant gas line hose and/or pipe from
the regulator in the AUTOMAN regulated release is 6. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release
disconnected from agent storage tanks. mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for
elasticity or cuts and replace Gasket (Part No. 181) if neces-
c.
Connect Regulator Test Kit (Part No. 56972) to one sary. Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of
of the expellant gas line hoses and securely cap the extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge
remaining hose or pipe. See Figure 8-12. receiver(s).
d. Verify that no cartridges are installed in the AUTOMAN 7. From tank in regulated release assembly: Disconnect the
or the regulated actuator assembly(s). expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly.
e.
To verify operation of the regulated actuator assem- From tank in bracket/enclosure assembly: Disconnect the
bly(s), Pressure Adaptor (Part No. 427560) can be used expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line.
to connect to a pressurized CO2 or N2 cylinder, instead
of using a CO2 or N2 cartridge. 8. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor
outlet line.
Note: The pressure adaptor assembly comes with a 1/4 in.
NPT pipe plug that is required to be installed in the side of 9. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. Keep in upright posi-
the adaptor. tion to avoid spilling the agent.
f.
Install a suitable 1/4 inch air pressure quick connect From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
fitting (supplied by others) to the bottom of the adaptor. bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright
position to avoid spilling the agent.
g.
Install and hand tighten the adaptor to the cartridge
receiver and securely attach the corresponding connec- 10. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from each tank. See
tor from the gas cylinder hose assembly. Figure 8-3.
h. With the valve on the regulator test kit closed, remove

the lock bar or lock pin and operate the remote cable
operated pull station to operate the regulated release.
i. Open the pressure cylinder valve to verify that the regu-
lated actuator assembly(s) has operated properly and the
air cylinder has unlatched the ANSUL mechanical gas
valve, if used.
j. Once regulated actuator and gas valve operation is veri-
fied, close the valve on the pressurized cylinder, if used,
and open the valve on the regulator test kit to relieve any
residual pressure.
Note: Although only required at 12 year intervals, the
regulator in the AUTOMAN regulated release can also be FIGURE 8-3
000291
verified. See Maintenance steps on page 8-6.
k. Re-cock the AUTOMAN regulated release and remove 11. Make certain that each tank is filled with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0
the spent cartridge or pressure adaptor from the cartridge (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire
receiver. Suppressant. Fill level to be ONLY to the level indicated
in the “Installation” section. See Page 5-3, Figure 5-6, for
l. If there were leaks in the actuation line or in the 1/8 inch detailed filling tolerances.
copper gas tubing for the air cylinder(s), re-tighten the
fittings or replace damaged components.
m. If the cartridge puncture pin in the regulated actuator(s)
did not fully extend, dismantle the actuator and inspect
components of the actuator assembly.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 8-3
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 17. Remove the lock bar or lock pin and manually test the regu-
Alternate Test Method: (Continued) lated release assembly by operating the remote manual
pull station. Check pull station cover for damage or wear.
12. Examine threads on each tank adaptor and tank collar for Replace cover if cable has worn a groove in the cover as
nicks, burrs, or cross-threading. Clean and coat o-ring with deep as the diameter of the cable. If flexible conduit is used
a good grade of extreme temperature grease. See Figure in installation, check conduit for damage, cuts and sharp
8‑4. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug and clean and inspect for bends.
free movement and corrosion (if necessary, replace Vent
Plug (Part No. 74247)). Reinstall vent plug. Make certain 18. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. (Part No. 14995 or 435603/Part No. 441042 or 441041).
Clean seating surface and return adaptor/tube assembly to See Figure 8-5.
each tank. Tighten securely. Before proceeding with Step 18, test electric (snap-action)
switches:
SILVER SIDE OF DISC a.
With the AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready position,
AWAY FROM TANK
press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is working
properly, there should be an audible click.
b. With the AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the lever
of each switch up, there should be no audible click.
c. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several
O-RING adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin
can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is
pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that
FIGURE 8-4 position. If this doesn’t resolve the problem, loosen the
000364
screws holding the switches, apply a small counterclock-
13. Place fully charged tanks in enclosures and/or brackets and wise torque on the switches and retighten the screws. If
secure. necessary, a final adjustment can be made by removing
14. Carefully assemble and wrench tighten all expellant gas and the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly.
agent distribution piping. d. After adjustments, repeat Steps a. and b. Then, recock
15. Remove blow-off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow-off AUTOMAN and insert lock bar or lock pin.
cap and replace if deteriorated. On older style metal blow-
off caps with spring clips, make certain spring clip rotates
freely on cap. On newer metal blow-off caps, make certain
integral o-ring is intact and undamaged. If there are signs of
deterioration, replace cap(s).
NOTICE
Rubber blow-off caps that have been
installed in the system for one year or
more must be replaced.
16. Verify that all nozzle types are correct. Check all nozzles
to ensure that they are free of cooking grease build-up and
have a thin coating of clean silicone grease across the
orifice.
Note: Do not allow silicone grease to enter nozzle orifice.
Note: If there is any evidence of cooking grease or other
residue in the nozzles or distribution piping or agent or
agent residue in the distribution piping, the entire piping
network must be inspected and thoroughly cleaned.
Portions of piping that cannot be thoroughly cleaned must FIGURE 8-5
be replaced. 009468
Utilizing the Nozzle Aiming Device (Part No. 431992 or Part

No. 439877) ensure that all nozzles are correctly aimed at
the appropriate location on the appliance. Reinstall blow-off
caps.
PAGE 8-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 24. Remove and destroy all existing fusible links from the termi-
Alternate Test Method: (Continued) nal and series detector brackets and replace with proper-
ly-rated ANSUL approved, fusible links in accordance with
19. Raise tension lever to “UP” position. See Figure 8-6. NFPA 17A.
25. Inspect wire rope at all detector locations, pulley elbows,
pulley tee and at AUTOMAN release. If wire rope shows
signs of wear or fraying, replace entire length.
26. Lower the tension lever to “DOWN” position.
27.
Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the
TENSION LEVER
lock bar or lock pin.
IN “UP” POSITION
28. Inspect the base of the wire rope locking clamp to make
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a
maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of
the trip hammer locking clamp assembly and the cable lever
assembly. See Figure 8-8.
TRIP HAMMER
ASSEMBLY LOCKING
CLAMP
1/4 IN. (6.4 mm)

FIGURE 8-6 MINIMUM
000322
3/8 IN. (9.5 mm)
MAXIMUM
20. Install test link (Part No. 24916) in terminal detector.
21. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. See Figure 8-7.
CABLE LEVER
ASSEMBLY
TENSION LEVER
IN “DOWN” POSITION
FIGURE 8-8
000329
NOTICE
FIGURE 8-7 If clearance is not between 1/4

001096 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm),
22. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simu- raise tension lever to “UP” position,
late automatic actuation. raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5-
12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat
NOTICE Steps 24 and 26.
If regulated release mechanism does not

29. For scissor-style linkage, locate linkage and properly posi-
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of “Testing
tion in each bracket all the way toward termination end of
Detection System” in “Testing and Placing
detection run.
in Service,” Section 6, Page 6-3.
30. If a mechanical gas valve is installed, begin the test proce-
dure by removing both side covers.
23. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to “UP”
position. 31.
At the regulated release, push the air cylinder rod fully
down.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 8-5
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) e. Return the appliance to its normal operating position.
Alternate Test Method: (Continued) Again, check the hose and hose fittings to verify that
the hose does not have sharp bends, and is not kinked,
32. The gas valve should operate. twisted, or caught on anything behind the appliance.
33. Pull the air cylinder rod to its fully extended position. If any of these conditions exist, the hose and/or hose
34. Re-cock the gas valve by pulling the valve stem up until the connections will require installation modifications.
pin in the stem engages the cocking lever. f.
With the appliance in its normal operating position,
35.
Reinstall side covers on the gas valve and connect the check the hose bend to make certain the bend is not
visual indication seal. less than a 3 in. (77 mm) bend radius (6 in. (153 mm)
diameter). If less, replace hose.
36. Test electric switches and electric gas valves by completing
steps on Page 6-2 in Section 6, “Testing and Placing In g. Verify that the appliance is returned to its original desired
Service.” location. Failure to do so may result in undue stress and
fatigue of the hose and hose connections.
37. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment
by referring to appropriate section of “Recharge and Resetting 43. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to
Procedures,” Section 7. unit and/or in a permanent file.
38. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace if ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION
weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped
on cartridge. In addition to performing all the steps necessary for Semi-
Annual Maintenance, disconnect the agent discharge piping
39. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and from the storage tank outlet(s) and verify that the agent distribu-
lock bar or lock pin is installed, then screw replacement tion piping is not obstructed.
cartridge into regulated release mechanism and each regu-
lated actuator receiver(s) and hand tighten. 1. At least annually, use dry air or nitrogen and blow through
the agent distribution piping with the nozzle blow-off caps
40. Remove lock bar or lock pin. removed, verifying that dry air or nitrogen is discharging at
each nozzle location.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Make certain tension lever is in the “DOWN” position after
completing all tests. Failure to put the tension lever in the If nozzles show signs of cooking grease migration into
“DOWN” position will cause the system to not operate the orifice of the nozzle, or if there is evidence of agent
automatically. residue in the nozzle(s) or the inlet to the agent distribution
piping, some or all of the piping may require dismantling to
41. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actua- verify that the piping is not obstructed.
tor, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) through holes in cover
and box, and secure. 2. At least annually, all rubber nozzle blow-off caps must be
42.
If system contains an Agent Distribution Hose and replaced.
Restraining Cable Assembly, also perform the following Note: Annual replacement is not necessary for metal blow-off
steps: caps.
a. Carefully pull or push out the appliance and verify that
the Restraining Cable limits the travel of the appliance
and prevents the application of any pull force or bending
stress on the Agent Distribution Hose or hose-to-pipe
connections.
b. Check the Restraining Cable to verify it is not frayed
and is securely fastened to the appliance and the wall or
restraining location.
c.
Check the hose and hose fittings and verify that the
hose remains in a vertical natural loop with no noticeable
fatigue at hose end couplings, no hose twists, no hose
kinking or sharp bends.
d.
Check the outer hose covering for signs of damage,
checking, tears, or wear. If any of these signs are
observed, replace the hose.
PAGE 8-6 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION

In addition to performing all of the steps necessary for semi-an-
nual and annual maintenance, the following twelve-year mainte-
nance procedures for single, double, and multiple-tank systems
must be performed.
NOTICE
Under certain circumstances hood and duct
cleaning operations may render your fire
suppression system ineffective due to a
coating of cleaning chemical left on the detec-
tion equipment or mishandling of the system
by cleaning service personnel. LOCK PIN
PROPERLY
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that INSTALLED
the R-102 system be completely inspected
and serviced by an authorized ANSUL
FIGURE 8-10
distributor immediately following any 009462
such cleaning operations.

3.
Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and
At twelve-year intervals, the liquid agent each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping
tank(s) must be hydrostatically tested and cap, and set aside in a safe location.
refilled with a fresh charge of ANSULEX
Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. The date of CAUTION
manufacture is stamped on the bottom of the
agent tank or on the tank label. Do not reinstall cartridge at this time or system may be
actuated.
1.
4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release
regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator
mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for
assembly.
elasticity or cuts and replace Gasket (Part No. 181) if neces-
2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) or lock pin (Part No. sary. Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of
438031) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge
Figure 8-9 or Figure 8-10. receiver(s).
5. From tank in enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas piping
or hose from each tank adaptor assembly.
From tank in bracket assembly: Disconnect expellant gas
piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line.
6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor
LOCK BAR
outlet line.
PROPERLY
INSTALLED
7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank.
From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage
bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright
position to avoid spilling the agent.
FIGURE 8-9 8. Loosen tank adaptor/tube assembly and remove.
000321
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 8-7
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)
! CAUTION
9.
Date Code Table
UL 541L UL 74FF
Safety glasses should be worn during transfer operations
of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid
Month* Year* Year* Month**
contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush immedi-
ately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation persists, contact Jan A 1981 K 2005 E Jan A
a physician. Do not take internally. If taken internally do Feb B 1982 L 2006 F Feb B
not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or milk and contact
Mar C 1983 M 2007 G Mar C
a physician.
Apr D 1984 N 2008 H Apr D

Pour the liquid agent from the tank into a clean, plastic May E 1985 P 2009 I May E
container, and flush tank with clear water. Jun F 1986 R 2010 J Jun F
10. At this point, each liquid agent tank, including the 1/4 in. Jul G 1987 S 2011 K Jul G
gas hose assembly, must be HYDROSTATICALLY Aug H 1988 T Aug H
TESTED to 330 psi (26.6 bar). Refer to “Hydrostatic Test
Sep J 1989 U Sep I
Instructions,” F‑7602, for test adaptors and instructions.
Oct K 1990 V Oct J
NOTICE Nov L 1991 W Nov K
DO NOT hydrostatically test a red painted Dec M 1992 Y Dec L

mild steel agent storage tank. Instead, 1993 Z *STAMPED YEAR 1ST, MONTH
replace the tank with a new stainless 1994 A 2ND
steel tank shipping assembly (3 Gallon **STAMPED “I” FOR SEPTEMBER
1995 B
(Part No. 429862) or 1.5 Gallon (Part No.
429864)). 1996 C
1997 D
11. Verify date stamped on cartridge. The cartridge must also 1998 E
be hydrotested at intervals not greater than 12 years. 1999 F UL 74FF
(European cartridges are not refillable, therefore cannot be
2000 G
hydrotested and refilled. They must be discarded). Month* Year*
2001 H
12.
If cartridge date indicates the need for hydrotesting, the Jan A 2011 T
2002 J
cartridge must be bled down through normal AUTOMAN Feb B 2012 U1
release operation, returned to Tyco Fire Protection Products 2003 K
Mar C 2013 U2
for credit (or hydrotested by properly trained personnel at 2004 L
authorized cartridge refilling stations), and replaced with a Apr D 2014 U3
2005 M
charged, replacement cartridge. May E 2015 U4
*STAMPED MONTH 1ST, YEAR Jun F 2016 U5
NOTICE 2ND
Jul G 2017 U6
Cartridge bleed down can be used to Aug H 2018 U7
verify pneumatic accessories operation.
Sep J 2019 U8
Oct K 2020 U9
13.
If system contains an Agent Distribution Hose and
Nov L 2021 V1
Restraining Cable Assembly, a hydrostatic test is required
at 220 psi (15.2 bar) for hose assembly. Dec M 2022 V2
14.
The regulator must be flow tested at 12 year intervals. 2023 V3
Check the date code stamped on the regulator body to 2024 V4
determine if the regulator(s) requires the 12 year testing
2025 V5
(see data code table). If regulator does not require testing,
proceed to step 12. Flow test the regulator(s) per the follow- *STAMPED MONTH 1ST, YEAR
ing table: 2ND
PAGE 8-8 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued)

Step 14 (Continued) b. Regulated Actuator
a. Regulated Release Mechanism For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank.
For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas pipe or hose Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See
from tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to Figure 8-13.
hose. See Figure 8-11.
FIGURE 8-11
000369

For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at FIGURE 8-13
000371
union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and install
pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at
during test. See Figure 8-12. union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and
install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from
escaping during test. See Figure 8-14.
FIGURE 8-12
000370 FIGURE 8-14
000372
Pressure Switch: If an ANSUL supplied pressure switch

is still in good operating condition, it should remain NOTICE
connected as part of system maintenance test.
Make certain valve is closed on regulator
NOTICE test kit or pressure will escape before test
can be performed.
For multiple-tank systems, one test kit
(Part No. 56972) is required for each
regulator in the system.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 8-9
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) i. If regulator test was not successful, replace regulator.
Step 14 (Continued) j. Reconnect all expellant gas lines.
c. Install either a nitrogen or CO2 cartridge into release k.
Reset all additional equipment that was operated by
mechanism and each regulated actuator provided with the release mechanism.
system. (Cartridge should be conditioned to approximately 15. Examine threads on each adaptor and tank collar for nicks,
70 °F (21 °C) before test.) burrs, or cross-threading. Clean and coat o-ring with a good
grade of extreme temperature grease. Make certain burst-
ing disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. See
NOTICE Figure 8-16.
Before continuing with Step d, make

certain valve on test kit is closed.
d. Remove lock bar or lock pin and operate remote manual

pull station to actuate the regulated release and supply
pressure to each test kit.
Two styles of regulators are used with the R-102 release mech- O-RING
anisms. The diaphragm style (see Figure 8-15) was used in
R-102 systems up to approximately 1988. The piston style (see
Figure 8-15) has been used since 1988. Each style requires a FIGURE 8-16
000364
slightly different flow test procedure. Use the appropriate flow
test procedure as stated in Step e. 16.
Examine pick-up tube for signs of damage or corrosion.
Replace assembly if needed.
17.
Refill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons
of only new ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant.
Note: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign
material from entering the tank.
CAUTION
During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 °F
to 80 °F (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD
DIAPHRAGM STYLE PISTON STYLE AGENT. Refer to the “Installation” section, Page 5-3 for
(USED UNTIL 1988) (USED AFTER 1988) maximum fill heights for ANSULEX Low pH agent storage
FIGURE 8-15 tanks. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in
002301
agent entering gas hose and regulator, potentially causing
e.
Flow test each regulator by completing the following system malfunction.
steps:
Diaphragm Style – The correct pressure should read 90 18. Clean seating surface and return each adaptor/tube assem-
to 110 psi (6.2 to 7.6 bar) with the valve on the test kit bly to tank. Firmly tighten.
closed and 80 psi (5.5 bar) with the valve on the test kit
opened. Keep the valve opened to completely empty the NOTICE
pressure cartridge after pressure test has been verified.
Do not reinstall any tank at this time.
Piston Style – Open the valve on the regulator test kit.
The correct pressure should read between 95 to 125 psi
(6.6 to 8.6 bar). Keep the valve open to completely empty 19. Remove blow-off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow-off
the pressure cartridge. cap and replace if deteriorated. On older style metal blow-
If necessary, continue to flow test at each additional regu- off caps with spring clips, make certain spring clip rotates
lated actuator. Test each regulated actuator by repeating freely on cap. On newer metal blow-off caps, make certain
Step e. integral o-ring is intact and undamaged. If there are signs of
deterioration, replace cap(s).
f. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No.
14995 or 435603/Part No. 441042 or 441041) and insert
NOTICE
lock bar (Part No. 14985) or lock pin (Part No. 438031).
g. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge(s) from release mech- Rubber blow-off caps that have been
anism and each regulated actuator. installed in the system for one year or
more must be replaced.
h. Remove test kit(s) from release mechanism and each
regulated actuator.
PAGE 8-10 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 25. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. See Figure 8-19.
20. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking
grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone
grease on the orifice. Reinstall blow-off caps.
21. Remove lock bar or lock pin and manually test the regulated
release assembly by operating the remote manual pull
station.
22. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever
(Part No. 14995 or 435603/Part No. 441042 or 441041). TENSION LEVER
See Figure 8-17. IN “DOWN” POSITION
FIGURE 8-19
001096
26. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simu-
late automatic actuation.
NOTICE
If regulated release mechanism does not
actuate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of “Testing
Detection System” in “Testing and Placing
in Service,” Section 6.
27. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to “UP”

position.
28.
Remove and destroy all existing fusible links from the
FIGURE 8-17 terminal and series detector brackets and replace with
009468
properly-rated ANSUL approved, fusible links in accordance
23. Raise the tension lever to “UP” position. See Figure 8-18. with NFPA 17A.
29. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position.
30. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert lock
bar or lock pin.
TENSION LEVER
IN “UP” POSITION
FIGURE 8-18
000362
24. Install test link (Part No. 24916) in terminal detector.

2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 8-11
12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 39. Remove lock bar or lock pin.
31. Inspect the base of the wire rope locking clamp to make 40. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each regu-
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a lated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fasten-
maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of ers or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in
the trip hammer locking clamp assembly and the cable lever each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is
assembly. See Figure 8-20. installed in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and
secure with appropriate hardware or procedure.
TRIP HAMMER
ASSEMBLY LOCKING
CLAMP
CAUTION
Before installing cover, make certain tension lever is in the
1/4 IN. (6.4 mm)
“DOWN” position after completing all tests. Failure to put
MINIMUM the tension lever in the “DOWN” position will cause the
3/8 IN. (9.5 mm) system to not operate automatically.
MAXIMUM
41. Record date of 12 year maintenance examination on tag

attached to enclosure and/or in a permanent file.
TRIP
HAMMER
BASE
FIGURE 8-20
000329
NOTICE
If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4
mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension
lever to “UP” position, raise trip hammer
3/8-1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set
screws, and repeat Steps 29 and 31.
32.
Locate detector linkage and properly position in each
bracket.
33. Make certain additional devices have operated as intended.
34.
Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equip-
ment by referring to appropriate section of “Recharge and
Resetting Procedures,” Section 7.
35. Place each fully charged tank in enclosure and/or bracket
and secure.
36. Reconnect all distribution piping and expellant gas piping
unions as required. Wrench tighten.
37. Check each gas cartridge by removing shipping cap and
weighing cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g),
or more, below weight stamped on cartridge.
38. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and
lock bar or lock pin is installed, then screw replacement
cartridge into regulated release mechanism and each regu-
lated actuator receiver(s) and hand tighten.
PAGE 8-12 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
NOTES:
R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual SECTION 9 – APPENDIX
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-1
SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE

Note: System options do not cover all conceivable/acceptable variations. They are listed here as a general guideline to show
the most common type arrangement for multiple systems. Based on certain system designs utilizing manifolding, non-manifolding,
3-tank systems, etc., other tank/cartridge combinations can be designed. The combinations below are based on 11 flow, 3 gallon tanks
and 5 flow, 1.5 gallon tanks. More competitive designs may be available by utilizing 12 flow and 6 flow systems when appropriate.
Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen
Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required
1-5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429)
6-11 1 Single 3 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435)
12-16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493)
3 Gal. Additional Tank
17-22 2 Double 3 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493)

17-22 2 Manifold 3 Gal. Reg. Release — Double (423493)

23-27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429)
3 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491)
23-33 3 Multiple 3 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435)

23-33 3 Multiple 3 Gal. Reg. Release N/A Double (423493)

(Optional) (2) 3 Gal. Additional Tanks
3 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491)
Double 3 Gal. Tank Box
34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493)
(Optional) 3 Gal. Additional Tank

39-44 4 Multiple 3 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493)

(Optional) 3 Gal. Additional Tank
* Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal system and 11 flow numbers for a 3 gal. system.
** If tanks are manifolded, only a “double tank” nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used.
*** If tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used.
SECTION 9 – APPENDIX R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression Manual
PAGE 9-2 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued)

(Optional) 3 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491)
50-55 5 Multiple 3 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493)

3 Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 (423491)

61-66 6 Multiple 3 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493)

(2) 3 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
(2) Double 3 Gal. Tank Box
67-71 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) ––

(Optional) 3 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
1.5 Gal. Additional Tank
3 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441)*** LT-30-R (423435)


3 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435)
* Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3 gal. system.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-3




89-99 9 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) N/A



PAGE 9-4 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

100-104 10 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) – –


(Optional) (2) 3 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)
(2) 3 Gal. Reg. Actuator (2) 101-30 (423443) (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491)

Options are available up to a maximum of 15 tanks. Contact Technical Services Department for detailed information.
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-5
SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX

Part No. Description Part No. Description
429853 Mechanical AUTOMAN Regulated Release 418054 OEM Regulated Electric Release Shipping
Shipping Assembly Assembly (120VAC)
Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism in Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure Solenoid and Switch
429856 Electric AUTOMAN Regulated Release 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket
Shipping Assembly (120VAC) 79493 OEM Regulated Mechanical Release Shipping
Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism with Assembly
Solenoid and Switch in Includes: Regulated Release Mechanism
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure 1/4 in. Hose and Mounting Bracket
429850 Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly 418691 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly
Includes: Actuator and Regulator in Includes: Actuator and Regulator
Stainless Steel Mounting Enclosure Hose
429870 Stainless Steel Mounting Box Shipping Assembly Bracket
Includes: Stainless Steel Mounting Box 429878 3 Gallon Bracket Assembly
(Bracket Only)
429872 Two Tank Enclosure Shipping Assembly 433485 Remote Release Assembly
Includes: Two Expellant Gas Hoses
Two Grommets 439946 OEM Remote Release Assembly
Stainless Steel Mounting Box 418522 OEM Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly
429859 24VDC Regulated Release Shipping Assembly Includes: Actuator and Regulator
Includes: 24VDC AUTOMAN II-C Release Hose
Mechanism in Stainless Steel 429862 3 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly
Mounting Box
429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Shipping Assembly
430299 3 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly
including: 56972 Regulator Test Kit
429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly Includes: Gauge, Hose and Valve Assembly
429862 3 Gallon Tank Assembly 79694 1.5 Gallon (5.8 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH
430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release Shipping Assembly Liquid Fire Suppressant
including: 79372 3.0 Gallon (11.6 L) Container of ANSULEX Low
429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly pHLiquid Fire Suppressant
423429 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R) (TC/DOT)
430309 3 Gallon Regulated Actuator Shipping Assembly
including: 423435 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R) (TC/DOT)
429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly
423493 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double-Tank)
429862 3 Gallon Tank Assembly
(TC/DOT)
430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping
423491 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30)
Assembly including:
(TC/DOT)
429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly
429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly 423439 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (TC/DOT)
430317 3 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping 15850 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (DOT)
Assembly including:
423441 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-20) (TC/DOT)
429870 Single Tank Mounting Box Assembly
429862 3 Gallon Tank Assembly 423443 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-30) (TC/DOT)
430324 6 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure Shipping 428440 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R) (European)
Assembly including:
429872 Two Tank Mounting Box Assembly 428441 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R) (European)
429862 3 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) 428446 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double Tank)
430332 3 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping Assembly (European)
including: 428442 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30)
429878 3 Gallon Mounting Bracket Assembly (European)
429862 3 Gallon Tank Assembly
PAGE 9-6 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued)

428443 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-10) (European) 419385 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly
Includes: 9 Swivel Adaptors
428445 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-20) (European)
423572 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly
428444 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (101-30) (European)
Includes: 25 Swivel Adaptors
428948 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-20-R) (Australian)
77695 Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly (Spare)
426553 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-30-R) (Australian) Includes: 50 Blow-Off Caps
426563 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (R-102 Double Tank) 77411 Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
(Australian) Includes: 12 Blow-Off Caps
426555 Cartridge Shipping Assembly (LT-A-101-30) 433208 CB Metal Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
(Australian) Includes: 10 Blow-Off Caps
439839 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1W) 439861 Metal Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
Includes: 25 1W Nozzles Includes: 10 Blow-Off Caps
25 Blow-Off Caps
434707 CB Stainless Steel Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
439837 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1/2N) Includes: 10 Blow-Off Caps
Includes: 9 1/2N Nozzles
439866 Stainless Steel Blow-Off Cap Shipping Assembly
9 Blow-Off Caps
Includes: 10 Blow-Off Caps
439838 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1N)
439848 Metal Blow-Off Cap O-Ring Shipping Assembly
Includes: 25 1N Nozzles
Includes: 25 O-Rings
25 Blow-Off Caps
416970 In-Line Burst Disc Union Assembly
439841 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (3N)
Includes: 9 3N Nozzles 417911 In-Line Burst Disc Shipping Assembly
9 Blow-Off Caps Includes: 10 Burst Discs
439840 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2W) 25627 1/4 in. Check Valve
Includes: 25 2W Nozzles
25 Blow-Off Caps 551265 Nozzle Aiming Device (without Adaptor)
439842 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (230) 439877 Nozzle Aiming Device with Adaptor
Includes: 25 230 Nozzles 439876 Aiming Device Adaptor
25 Blow-Off Caps
435547 Series Detector Shipping Assembly (“Scissor”)
439843 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (245)
Includes: 25 245 Nozzles 435548 Series Detector, Pack of 25 (“Scissor”)
25 Blow-Off Caps 435546 Terminal Detector Shipping Assembly (“Scissor”)
439844 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (260) Includes: Test Link
Includes: 9 260 Nozzles 435545 Detector Hook Assembly (“Scissor”)
9 Blow-Off Caps
439515 Detector Hook Assembly (“Scissor”)
439845 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (290) Includes: 10 Detectors
Includes: 9 290 Nozzles
9 Blow-Off Caps 415671 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly (Socket End) –
to 700 °F (371 °C)
439846 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2120) Includes: 50 Elbows
Includes: 9 2120 Nozzles
9 Blow-Off Caps 423251 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly (Compression
End) – to 700 °F (371 °C)
439836 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1F) Includes: 50 Elbows
Includes: 9 1F Nozzles
9 Blow-Off Caps 427929 Pulley Tee
15821 Wire Rope (50 ft (15.2 m))
439865 Stainless Steel Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1N)
Includes: 1 Blow-Off Cap 79653 Wire Rope (500 ft (152.4 m))
439864 Stainless Steel Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1W) 24919 Stop Sleeve Package
Includes: 1 Blow-Off Cap Includes: 10 Stop Sleeves
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-7

550122 Oval Sleeve Package 426151 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: 100 Oval Sleeves Includes: Relay – Manual Reset
436063 Conduit Offset Shipping Assembly 423878 One Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit
Includes: 6 Conduit Offsets Includes: Electric Switch (SPDT)
Mounting Hardware
78196 1/4 in. “Quik-Seal” Adaptor Package
Includes: 24 “Quik-Seals” 423879 Two Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit
Includes: 2 Electric Switches (SPDT)
Mounting Hardware
Includes: 24 “Quik-Seals”
423880 Three Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit
Mounting Hardware
423881 Four Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit
79149 1/4 in. “Compression-Seal” Pipe Adaptor Package Mounting Hardware
Includes: 24 “Compression-Seals”
428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit
79151 3/8 in. “Compression-Seal” Pipe Adaptor Package
55598 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ANSUL)
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve – 3/4 in.
79147 1/2 in. “Compression-Seal” Pipe Adaptor Package
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve – 1 in.
79153 1/2 in. “Compression-Seal” EMT Conduit Adaptor
Package
Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve – 1 1/4 in.
423253 Hood Seal Adaptor Shipping Assembly
Includes: 6 Hood Seals
436228 Reducing Coupling
441042 Short Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Pin
25937 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO)
441041 Long Handle Cocking Lever with Lock Pin
25938 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO)
26310 Cocking Lever (AUTOMAN II-C)
15733 Gas Shut-off Equipment
416018 Cocking Lever (Mechanical Gas Valve) Includes: Air Cylinder and Tube Assembly
438031 Lock Pin 434618 Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly
13707 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 435960 Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly
Includes: Solenoid Valve – 3/4 in. Includes: 50 ft (15.2 m) of Wire Rope
13708 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 24915 Break Rod Package
Includes: Solenoid Valve – 1 in. Includes: 10 Glass Break Rods (Part No. 4834)
(Replacement)
550360 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz)
Includes: Solenoid Valve – 1 1/4 in. 427074 Trim Rings (Pack of 10)
13709 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) 434525 Flexible Conduit – 500 ft (152.4 m)
Includes: Solenoid Valve – 1 1/2 in.
435959 Flexible Conduit – 500 ft (152.4 m)
13710 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: 500 ft (152.4 m) of Wire Rope
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve – 2 in.
435979 Flexible Conduit Strain Relief
550363 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: 50 Strain Reliefs
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve – 2 1/2 in.
434347 Flexible Conduit Inserts
17643 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: 50 Inserts
Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve – 3 in.
PAGE 9-8 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01

439104 Pre-Fed Flexible Conduit – 50 ft (15.2 m)
436150 P-Clip Shipping Assembly
Includes: 50 P-Clips
31809 16 in. (406 mm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose
435982 Agent Distribution Hose and Restraining Cable Kit
434455 Henny Penny Fryer Nozzle Kit
24916 Test Link Shipping Assembly
Includes: 10 Test Links
439085 SL Style Fusible Link – 165 °F (74 °C)
Includes: 25 Links
Includes: 25 Links
Includes: 25 Links
Includes: 25 Links
Includes: 25 Links
439227 Tyco A-PC Style Fusible Link – 165 °F (74 °C)
Includes: 10 Links
Includes: 10 Links
Includes: 10 Links
Includes: 10 Links
Includes: 10 Links
439232 Tyco A-PC Style Fusible Link – 500 °F (260 °C
Includes: 25 Links
439517 Trip Hammer Set Screw
Includes: 25 Screws
15240 Maximum Registering Thermometer
197 Lead and Wire Seal
181 Cartridge Receiver Gasket
74274 Vent Plug Assembly
418087 R-102 System Manual
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-9
AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY
3
1
14 (ORDERED 4
SEPARATELY)
10
5
15 11 2
13 6
16
21
12
9 8
18
17
19, 20
000373
Figure Mechanical Electrical

No. Description Part No. Part No.
– Regulated Release Shipping Assembly 429853 429856
1 Mounting Box 419293 419293
2 Basic Release w/Regulator 79140 –
Basic Release w/Solenoid, Switch, and Regulator – 79288
3 Self-Tapping Screw 71342 71342
4 Spacer 76555 76555
5 Tension Spring 79094 79094
6 Lever and Bracket Assembly 79300 79300
7 Machine Screw 14973 14973
8 Lockwasher 7310 7310
9 Hex Nut 14732 14732
10 Caution Label 57652 57652
11 Gasket 181 181
12 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly
LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435 / 423441 423435 / 423441
Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423493 / 423443 423443 / 423443
13 Safety Shipping Cap 77251 77251
14 Tank Assembly 1.5/3 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864 / 429862 429864 / 429862
15 Hose Assembly 79007 79007
16 Enclosure Cover (Includes Label) 423744 423744
17 Solenoid Assembly – 423575
18 Electric Snap-Action Switch – 423878
19 Cover Screw 15362 15362
20 Speed Nut 423479 423479
21 Set Screw (25 Pack) 439517 439517
PAGE 9-10 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
1 3
10
(ORDERED 4
5
SEPARATELY)
9
2
12
6
11
7
000374
13, 14
Figure
No. Description Part No.
– Regulated Actuator Assembly 429850
1 Mounting Box 419293
2 Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Including Regulator 79340
3 Hex Jam Nut 67990
4 Hole Adaptor (2) 423277
5 Lockwasher 69521
6 Gasket 181
7 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly
LT-20-R/101-10 (Ordered Separately) 423429 / 423439
LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) 423435 / 423441
Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423493 / 423443
LT-A-101-30/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 423491 / 423443
8 Safety Shipping Cap 77251
9 Label 426953
10 Tank Assembly 1.5 / 3 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 429864 / 429862
11 Hose Assembly 79007
12 Enclosure Cover (Without Labels) 419294
13 Cover Screw 15362
14 Speed Nut 423479
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-11
ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
1
000290
Figure
– Enclosure Shipping Assembly 429870
1 Enclosure 419295
2 Cover 419296
3 Nameplate 429871
4 Screw 15362
5 Speed Nut 423479
PAGE 9-12 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
000376
Figure 3 Gallon
– Bracket Shipping Assembly 429878
1 Bracket Assembly –
2 Grommet 14089
3 Grommet 8688
4 Wing Nut 12065
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-13
TANK ASSEMBLY
6
5
3
4
7
1
2
000375
Figure 1.5 Gallon 3 Gallon

No. Description Part No. Part No.
– Tank Assembly 429864 429862
1 Tank Adaptor Shipping Assembly 430103 79522
2 Pickup Tube Assembly 429883 417700
3 Vent Plug Assembly 74247 74247
4 O-Ring 56909 56909
5 Union Nut 417705 417705
6 Union Tail Piece 417706 417706
7 Burst Disc 416974 416974
8 Shell 429861 429860
9 Nameplate N/A N/A
PAGE 9-14 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
REMOTE RELEASE
1
10
9
11
14
13
6, 7, 8
12
007499
5
Figure
— Remote Release 433485
1 Mounting Box 419295
2 Cover 419296
3 Maintenance Label 17351
4 Spring 79094
5 Speed Nut 423479
6 Machine Screw 14973
7 Hex Nut 14732
8 Lockwasher 7310
9 101 Release 433702
10 Spacer 76555
11 Screw 71342
12 Cover Screw 15362
13 Tension Lever and Bracket Assembly 79300
14 Gasket 181
15 101 Cartridge (Order Separately) (Not Shown) (TC/DOT) 423439
(DOT) 15850
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-15
MULTIPLE NOZZLE FRYER PROTECTION CALCULATION

EXAMPLES Example No. 2 – Fryer With Dripboard. This fryer has an
Example No. 1 – Donut Fryer Without Dripboard. This fryer overall fry vat, including a dripboard, that measures 24 in.
has a frypot that measures 26 in. depth x 28 in. length (660 mm (609 mm) in depth x 20 in. (508 mm) in length. The actual frypot
x 711 mm). Because the frypot exceeds the maximum dimen- measures 20 in. x 20 in. (508 mm x 508 mm). Because both the
sions for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required. frypot and the overall fry vat including the dripboard exceed the
Procedure: maximum dimensions for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be
required.
Find the area of the fryer by multiplying the 26 in. depth
x the 28 in. length (660 mm x 711 mm) which equals Procedure:
728 in.2 (46,967 mm2). Using the 3N nozzle (approved for Divide the fryer cooking area from left to right or from front
fryers with the longest side of 25 3/8 in. (644 mm) and a to back into modules that do not exceed single nozzle area
maximum of 370.5 in.2 (23,903 mm2) in area), divide the total limitations and longest side limitations as described in the
area of 728 in.2 (46,967 mm2) by 370.5 in.2 (23,903 mm2) to table for “Fryer Multiple Nozzle Protection” located in the
find the number of nozzles needed. 728 in.2 (46,967 mm2) Design Section.
divided by 370.5 in.2 (23,903 mm2) per nozzle = 2 nozzles The example fryer can either be divided from left to right
required. Then, verify the maximum longest side dimension into two modules, each measuring 10 in. x 24 in. (254 mm x
of 25 3/8 in. (644 mm). Doing this will require doubling the 609 mm), or it can be divided from front to back. See Figure
3N nozzles to = a total of 4 nozzles, if we are to protect the 9-2.
26 in. (660 mm) depth and the 28 in. (711 mm) length of the
fryer with this 3N nozzle option. See Figure 9-1. If the fryer is divided from front to back, two 2-flow nozzles
may be adequate. To determine this, first protect as much
Using the same process, but utilizing the 3N nozzle approved of the rear portion of the vat (the frypot area) that is allowed
for fryer protection with the longest side of 27 5/8 in. (702 with 2-flow appliance nozzles using the maximum area of
mm) and the maximum of 324 in.2 (20,903 mm2) in area, 210 in.2 (13,548 mm2) per nozzle with the maximum longest
the calculation will change to 728 in.2 (46,967 mm2) divided side of 21 in. (533 mm) for multiple nozzles. See Figure 9-2.
by 324 in.2 (20,903 mm2) per nozzle = 3 nozzles. Because
this 3N nozzle option will protect 27 5/8 in. (701 mm) on
In the example, the frypot is 20 in. (508 mm) from side
the longest side, it will protect the 26 in. (660 mm) side in to side. Use the maximum area of 210 in.2 (13,548 mm2)
this example, thus eliminating the need for extra nozzles. allowed for one nozzle and divide it by 20 in. (508 mm), a
Utilizing this option, in this example, will require a total of 9 total of 10 1/2 in. (266 mm) of the frypot can be protected
flows, but allows less nozzles and less nozzle drops*. See with one 2-flow nozzle (210 in.2 divided by 20 in. = 10.5 in.).
Figure 9-1. See Figure 9-2.
*N
ote: 2-flow appliance nozzles can also be used. This option This leaves the remainder of 9 1/2 in. (241 mm) of frypot
requires a total of 4 nozzles (728 in.2 (46,967 mm2) divided by and the entire dripboard yet to protect. One 2-flow appli-
210 in.2 (13,548 mm2) per nozzle = 4 nozzles, or 8 total flows). ance nozzle will protect up to 10 1/2 in. (266 mm) of frypot,
Using this option requires that the nozzles be placed over each therefore, there is no need to verify the remaining 9 1/2 in.
quadrant of frypot area protected and aimed to the center of the (241 mm). There is only the overall of 9 1/2 in. (241 mm)
modules. This option may be desirable if minimizing total system remaining plus the dripboard to verify.
flows is important. The dripboard measures 4 in. x 20 in. (101 mm x 508 mm),
with an overall remainder of frypot + dripboard area size
14 IN. 9 3/8 IN. 9 3/8 IN. 9 1/4 IN. of 13 1/2 in. x 20 in. (342 mm x 508 mm) = 270 in.2
(355 mm) (238 mm) (238 mm) (234 mm) (17,419 mm2). Reviewing the “Multiple Nozzle Fryer Table,”
a 2-flow appliance nozzle can protect an area, including
13 IN. dripboard, of 294 in.2 (18,967 mm2) with a longest side of
(330 mm) 21 in. (533 mm). Because the area is less than the maximum
26 IN. 26 IN.
(660 mm) (660 mm)
of 294 in.2 (18,967 mm2) and the longest side is less than
the maximum of 21 in. (533 mm), a 2-flow nozzle will be
sufficient. See Figure 9-2.
28 IN. 28 IN.
(711 mm) (711 mm)
FIRST 3N NOZZLE OPTION SECOND 3N NOZZLE OPTION
FIGURE 9-1
002466
PAGE 9-16 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
MULTIPLE NOZZLE FRYER PROTECTION CALCULATION WIRING DIAGRAM

EXAMPLES (Continued) NFPA standards require simultaneous operation for fire suppres-
Example No. 2 – Fryer With Dripboard (Continued) sion systems when two or more hazards can be simultaneously
Adding the protection required for the back of the frypot to involved in fire by reason of their proximity. To accomplish
the front protection requires two 2-flow appliance nozzles simultaneous operation, the 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN
as a minimum. See Figure 9-2. Regulated Release Assembly can be used. This release can be
activated independently by fusible line operation exactly like the
20 IN. 20 IN. mechanical version and can also be triggered electrically using
(508 mm) (508 mm)
a snap action switch from another 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN
Regulated Release Assembly or a Mechanical AUTOMAN
10 1/2 IN.
(266 mm) Regulated Release Assembly. The electrical wiring used to
20 IN. connect from one AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly
(508 mm) 24 IN. 24 IN.
(609 mm) (609 mm) to another will not be supervised. However, NFPA 96 allows
9 1/2 IN.
(241 mm) an exception for electrically operated systems which “include
automatic mechanical detection (fusible link) and actuation as a
backup detection system.”
10 IN.
4 IN. 4 IN. (101 mm)
(254 mm)
(101 mm)
DIVIDED LEFT TO RIGHT DIVIDED FRONT TO BACK In the case of multiple hoods sharing a common exhaust duct,
NFPA 17A requires one of two forms of simultaneous operation.
FIGURE 9-2
002467 The following wiring diagrams (See Figures 3 and 4) identify two
principle uses for the 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN Regulated
Release Assembly. Refer to Components Section, Page 3-1,
Figure 3-3.
1. Simultaneous operation of all independent hood, duct, and
appliance protection systems. See Figure 9-3.
2.
Simultaneous operation of any hood, duct, and appliance
protection system and the system(s) protecting the entire
common exhaust duct. See Figure 9-4.
Simultaneous Actuation of Multiple 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assemblies
115 VAC
60 HZ
ALL SYSTEMS MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE HOT
DUAL ELECTRIC
SWITCH (PART ACTUATION LINE
NO. 423879)
NEUTRAL
ACTUATION
SOLENOID
AUTOMAN 1 AUTOMAN 2 TYPICAL FOR ADDITIONAL AUTOMAN

REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLIES
– UP TO 4
FIGURE 9-3
008405
2014-SEP-01 REV. 11 PAGE 9-17
WIRING DIAGRAM (Continued)
Simultaneous Actuation of One or More 120 VAC Electric AUTOMAN Assemblies

from Multiple Mechanical AUTOMAN Assemblies
ALL SYSTEMS MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE
120 VAC
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 60 HZ
HOT
MECHANICAL
AUTOMAN,
TYP. 5
ELECTRIC ELECTRIC
AUTOMAN AUTOMAN
SWITCH,
PART NO.
423678
NEUTRAL
ACTUATION SOLENOID
FIGURE 4
008406
Note 1: For fusible link detection only.

Note 2: Use AUTOMAN assemblies with solenoid and electric switch. Replace Single Electric Switch (Part No. 423878) with Dual Switch Kit (Part
No. 423879).
Note 3: See Installation section of this manual for power capacity of solenoid and switches.
Note 4: This method does not provide supervision for battery or system wiring. The authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) may waive this requirement.
Note 5: When any one of the Mechanical AUTOMAN assembies is activated, the microswitch will transfer to the N.O. position, completing the circuit
to the N.C. switch in the Electrical AUTOMAN assemby. This will activate the AUTOMAN assemby. When the AUTOMAN assemby fires, the
N.C. switch transfers to the N.O. position, opening the circuit to the solenoid.
PAGE 9-18 REV. 11 2014-SEP-01
NOTES:

Ansul R-102 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ansul R-102 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ansul R-102 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the new approved locations for installing the Agent Distribution Hose?

What are the new approved locations for installing the Agent Distribution Hose?

What are the general installation requirements for the Agent Distribution Hose?

What are the general installation requirements for the Agent Distribution Hose?

R-102 RESTAURANT

DESIGN, INSTALLATION, Recharge, and Maintenance Manual

One Stanton Street / Marinette, WI 54143-2542, USA / +1-715-735-7411 / www.ansul.com

Bulletin No. 2018204

DATE: October 19, 2018

TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 System Distributors and OEMs

FROM: Product Management - Restaurant Systems

SUBJECT: Additional Application Use for Agent Distribution Hose

Newly approved locations for installation are as follows:

General Installation Requirements

Main Telephone Number: +1-800-862-6785 or +1-715-735-7415 One Stanton Street

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2010156-04

Main Telephone Number: +1-800-862-6785 or +1-715-735-7415 One Stanton Street

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2012086-02

Bulletin No. 2018126

DATE: July 31, 2018

TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 System Distributors and OEMs

FROM: Product Management - Restaurant Systems

SUBJECT: Overlapping Protection Option - Two 3.0-Gallon Tank System

Overlapping Nozzle Coverage

Overlapping Coverage – Option 3

Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection

Main Telephone Number: +1-800-862-6785 or +1-715-735-7415 One Stanton Street

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2010156-04

Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection

General Design Limitations

• A maximum of ten flows shall be used as overlapping coverage nozzles.

• A maximum of three flows shall be used as plenum and duct nozzles.

• A single Double Tank nitrogen expellant gas cartridge shall be utilized.

• The 245 nozzle must be used for “end of zone” protection.

• The 260 nozzle must be used for zone protection.

• Maximum depth of zone is 28 in. (711 mm).

Main Telephone Number: +1-800-862-6785 or +1-715-735-7415 One Stanton Street

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2012086-02

• Refer to overlapping system piping requirements listed in the table below.

Notes: Double Tank Cartridge Only

Main Telephone Number: +1-800-862-6785 or +1-715-735-7415 One Stanton Street

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2012086-02

DATE: May 15, 2018

TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 Restaurant System Distributors and OEMs

FROM: Product Management, Restaurant Systems

21 in. - 27 in. 16 in. - 21 in.

245 Nozzle Coverage 290 Nozzle Coverage

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2010156-04

Bulletin No. 2017244

DATE: October 6, 2017

TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 Restaurant System Distributors and OEMs

FROM: Product Management, Restaurant Systems

SUBJECT: Improved 1F Range Protection With or Without Back Shelf – R-102

Main Telephone Number: +1-800-862-6785 or +1-715-735-7415 One Stanton Street

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. S-2010156-04

Bulletin No. 2017240

DATE: October 6, 2017

TO: Authorized ANSUL® R-102 System Distributors and OEMs

FROM: Product Management, Restaurant Systems

• Garland 3-platen: MWE/G 3W, MWE 3WS

Notes: Double Tank Cartridge Only

SUBJECT: Improved 1F Range Protection With or Without Back Shelf – R-102